ASanskritPrimer 10081762 PDF

A
S A N S K RI T PR I M E R
B ASED O N THE
LEI TFADEN
ELEM ENTAR CURSUS DES SAN SK RIT

-
OF
J
PR O F E S S O R G E O R G B UH L E R
O F VI E N NA
EDWARD D ELAVAN R ERRY ,
O F C OL U M BI A C O L L E GE , N EW Y-
O RK .
(a
’
I/
B OS TON
G I N N A N D C O M PA N Y
1 885.
E n t er e d a cco r d i n g t o A ct o f C o n g r e s s , i n t h e y ea r 1 88 5 ,
BY E . D . P E RR Y ,
I n th e O ffi c e of t h e L i b r a r i a n o f C o n g r e ss a t W a sh i n g t o n .
Qro m p o s i ti o n fi g iat rs sfn o rk 11g

GE BR N D E R U N GE R , JO H N W I L SON AN D S ON ,
S C H ON E BE R GE R S T R A S SE , 1 7 A, u m vs nsn v p n ess .
B E RL I N , SW . CAM B RI D G E , M ASS.
Pr efa ce .
the p ref ce t the work f which the following is re ision

In a o
*
o a v ,
Prof B i i . w ritesHLE Rfollo w s as :
The follo w ing L i tf d w w ritte l st winter [ 188 1 e a en as n a
an d p rinted in m n scri p t form w

,
se d in the instr c tion f
a u ,
as u u o
q ite l rge n m ber f schol rs I t is b sed p on the p rely

u a a u o a . a u u
p r ctic
a l m ethoda of S ns k rit instr ction which w intro d ced
a t u ,
as u a
H AU G s d my
’
wan inst nce into the I ndi n secon d ry schools
o n a a a ,
an d h b ecome est blished there by me ns f R G B K

as a K a o . . H ND RK AR S
’
text boo k s The ttem p t to tr nsfer this method to E rop e n i

-
. a a u a un
ve r s i ti is j stified by the p r ctic l s ccess which

es u my ex
“
a a u ,
as
p i
e r e n ce hows is to bse g i ned t h ,
hy F I h e fo nd th t a ere . or av u a
beginners m ster the first diffic lties f S nskrit ery r p i dl y d

a u o a v a , an
th t le rners t ke the m ost li el y d contin ed interest in the

a a a v an u
st dy if o p p ort ni ty for cti ity their w p rt is gi e them

u ,
u a v on o n a v n
from the ery first d they v intro d ce d t once into the li ing
,
an ar e . u a v
l ng ge Moreo er t h q estion f econom y f time is m d e the

a ua . v ,
e u o o a
m ore w eighty by the f ct th t the ele m ents of S ns k rit form a a a an
Leitf den f ii den E l m t a des S ns k rit ; m i t U b g

r e e n a r c u r su s a e un s
st ii k cd wei G l
en un V G O zBU W ien 1 883 o ssa r e n . on E RG II LER .
,
.
I h e tr nsl te d bo e
av little freel y
a a a v a .
iv
im p ort nt i d to st dents f Cl ssic l d G er m nic Philology y t

a a u o a a an a ,
e
to l rge n m b er f s ch
a a ccessi ble only w hen the s bject
u o u are a u
can be m stere d in short time On the other h n d the d i d

a a . a ,
sa
va nt ges necess ril y ent iled by the p rel y p r ctic l metho d m y

a a a u a a a
re d il y be remo e d l ter by short metho d ic l exp osition f the

a v a a a o
gr mm r a a The erses in the exercises t k en chiefly v a re a
from B I di h Sp h ; the sentences

O E H TL I N G K
‘
S in p r t
n sc en ra c en a re a
d eri ed from
v rio s S ns k rit wor k s mo d elle d fter p ss ges
va u a ,
or a a a
cont ined in them To the l st lessons no S ns k rit exercises h e

a . a a av
been p p en d e d since the re d ing of the N l or f some other

a ,
a a a o
e sy S s k rit w or k m y ery well be beg n soon the form

a an a v u as as
a tion of the p erfect h been le rne d as a .

”
After sing the L i tf d for some time in the instr ction f

u e a en u o
a cl ss I w con ince d f its gre t m erits

a ,
as
p r ctic l vintro o a as a a a
d ction to the l ng ge ; w hile the other h nd it seeme d ery

u a ua on a v
un fort n t e th t it hel d t hro gho t t the n ti e s y stem of gr mm r

u a a u u o a v a a ,
w hich since the p p e r nce f Prof W N S w ork w e in

,
a a a o . HI T EY
’
,
Americ t le st h e le rne d to d istr st U n d er these circ m

a a a av a u . u
st nces i t seeme d d is ble to ttem p t com b in tion f B fi

a a v a a a a o HL E R s
’
p r ctic
a l exercises a with W N S theory ; d t t his d t h HIT EY
’
an o en e
boo k h been re ll y re w ritten An introd ction h be n dd ed

as a . u as e a ,
gi ing gener l ie w f the str ct re f the l ng ge ; the ex r

v a a v o u u o a ua o
cises h e been p r ne d h d there chiefl y to remo e forms

‘
av u ere an ,
v
which seeme d too n s l or d o btf l to h e j st cl im u u ua u u av a u a on
the beginner s memory ; d the n m b er f lessons h b ee

’
an u o as n re
d d from fort y eight to for ty fi

u ce by con d ensing the d escri p tion
- -
ve , ,
nee dlessl y f ll for beginners f the orist p rec t i e d secon d

u ,
o a ,
a v , an
ar y conj g tions I h e en d e ore d to ret in nothing b t w h t

u a . av av a u a
wo l d s p p l y the re l w n ts f those f n w h m the book is de

u u a a o o o
signed ; y t here a d the re h ing in mind those who m y t k e
e n , av a a
u
p this st d y witho t u te cher I h e dd e d ex p l
u n tions awhich a , av a a a
I sho l d other w ise h e left f

u or l comm nic tion by the instr ctor
av or a u a u .
A det ile d ex p l n tion of the ch nges in the gr mm tic l p rt

a a a a a a a a
o f the boo k w o l d req ire t m ch s p ce to b gi en here They

u u oo u a e v .
m y be s mm ri e d i n t h s t tement th t I h
a u a z e stri en t remo e e a a av v o v
a ll forms t p resent a q ot ble I the ex p lic tion of the “

non -
u a
”
. n a
r les I h e so ght to b brief b t ne er to the s crifice of cle r

u av u e ,
u v a a
ness I ery m n y c ses not only the s bst nce b t lso the
. n v a a u a u a
words of Prof W r les h e been incorp or te d into those

. H I TN E Y s
’
u av a
o f the Primer which w d one with his s nction I t seeme d q ite

,
as a . u
nee dless t d esign te ll s ch borrowings by q ot tion m rk s

o a a u u a -
a .
M n y ck no w le dgments
a a d to those whose i d h m d e are ue a as a
p ossi b le the pp e r nce of the

a w ork Prof B
a ii a re dy gene . . HLER s
’
a
ros i ty in consenting to the rendering of his boo k into ry a ve
d i ff erent form from th t which he g e it d eser es most gr tef l a av v a u
m ention T Prof W . o I o w e d eep gr tit de f

. m ny l
H I TN E Y a u or a va u
a ble s ggestions ; h w k in d en o gh to look o er the work in

u e as u v
(
m n scri p t
a u d l ter to p t t m y d is p os l the d nce sheets of
,
an ,
a ,
u a a a va
his in l ble collection f erb forms To P rof L N N I m

va u a o v -
. . A MA a
eq ll y in de b ted ; w ell for m n y sef l hints for the rd o s

ua as a u u as a u u
t sk of loo k ing o er p roof sheets w hich b im p ose d himself

a v -
,
e on
with ch r cteristic e d iness M y p p il Mr A V W J S O

a a r a . u ,
. . . . AC K N ,
a ssisted me not little in the com p il tion of the Gloss ries M y

a a a .
a ckno w le d gments lso d to the p rinters G a re UN

a ue ,
E BE . GER
( T u G .
) f Berlin
RI M M for the c
o ref l m nner i w hich their
, p rt a u a n a
o f the w or k h b een d one as .
F rom V S A G i d e to S nskrit C om p osition I h e

’ “ ”
. . PTE s u a av
deri e d occ sion l ex m p les

v a a a .
The p p e r nce of the book h been del ye d consider bly
a a a as a a
beyon d the d te origin lly p l nned for it The p rinting w beg n

a a a . as u
in No ember l st b t w interr p te d by m y illness d

v a ,
u as u ,
an a re
sulti g st y of consi d er ble length in the W est I n d ies

n a a .
I sh ll esteem it
a f or if y who m y
a av this boo k w ill
an a u se
notify me of mis p rints in cc r cies of y sort which they m y

or a u a an a
rem r k
a .
Berlin A g st
, u u 1 885 .
E D
. . P .
Table of Con ten ts,
in st e m a t i c
g ram m a ti c a l a r r a n ge m e n t
s
y .
T h e fi g u r e s i n h e a v y t yp e r e fe r t o p a r a gr a p h s .
o c or y s g g esti ons p i
I n tr du t u , . x .
I Alp h b e t d S nds '
. a an ou .
C h r cters — 2 0 a C l ssific tion f So nds

a d Pron nci tion
,
. a a o u , an u a ,
2 I —47 Light d H e y S yll bles 48

. Acce t 5 6 an av a , . n ,
.
I I Ch.
g es f So ds
an G n d V ddh i o un . u a an r .
49 —5 4 .
I II . s f E ph n i C m bi n ti
R u le o u o c o a on .
R les of V o w el C om b in tion I O5 l
u 06 5I 6 — l6l I64 G ener l a , , , ,
. a
L w s concerning F in ls 2 3 9 —2 42
a De s p ir tion 242 a ,
. a a , .
Tr nsferr l of A s p ir tion 2 44 2 49 42 8
a a S rd mL S t a , , ,
u a onan
Assimil tion l47 I4S 2 66 2 67 a C ombin tions f F in l a o a
7—
.
, , , ,
d
8 9 5 ll
an 2 3 I2 9
l r, C on ersion f ,
t p 27 ,
. v o s o s, .
l9 1 I 9 2 3 42 3 5 2
, C on ersion f
,
to n p 32 (note ) I 66
,
. v o n ,
.
M
, .
C on rsion of D ent l M tes to L ing ls

ve d P l t ls I4 9 I5 O a u ua an a a a , , ,
p 9 9 ( note
.
) 3 4 2 C ombin tions of p 2,9 ( note ) I S S —.I4 0 a n ,
.
, ,
I8 4 C h nge f h to k p 2 7 ( note I65 C ombin tions

'
. a o c cc , . . a
f m p 2 9 ( note )
o , F in l ii [ d 3] IS4
. F in l 1 t p 2 6 6 . a an 7 . a 6, , ,
.
F in l t I4S —l 5l a ,
.
I V D cl s i o
. e en n .
G en d er N mber C se 8 3 —8 9 , C se en d ings 9 0 9 I
u ,
a ,
. a -
, ,
.
P d en d ings 9 l 2 4 I
a a -
, ,
.
V S b st t i es
. u d Ad jec t i
an s v an ve .
V o wel stems -
Stems in m 0 3 I II
l Stems i n i m II3 II5 ; II4 I I5
a ,
. n .
, ,
.
, , n .
, ,
.
Stems in u, m .
,
28 ;
l n .
,
3 6, | 37
l Stems in i d f
. an u, .
,
85
l —I8 7
Stems in a i 2 ( .
, ,
7 : a ) R oot w or d s I -
a 2 I2 2 I3 ; . n , ,
in i 18 9 2 I2 2 I4 ; in i t l97 2 I2
, , , , , ,
2 I4 ( )
b. Deri ti e Stems f va v ,
.
I a I62 ; in 5 I 8 3 ; in it I Q S
n , , , . Stems i r 2 OI — 205 2 08n
, ,
.
Ste m s in Di p hthongs g 2 09 ; mi : o, n, m i , 277 .
C onson nt stems a -
Gener l 2 3 7 —242 a ,
.
( ) R oot
a stems -
,
2 43 , 2 44 , 24 6 —2 5 0 .
( )
b D eri ti e Stems va v . In a s, i s, u s, 25 2 —2 5 4 . In an
( an ,
m a n,
va n ) , 2 65 . I n in ( i n , m in , sin ) ,
25 ! In ant
( a n t, m a n t, va n t )
2 5 6 —2 64 . Perfect P rtici p les in a va n s, 268 . C om p r ti es a a v
i n ga s, 2 5 5 .
I ul
a rreg r No ns 2 69 —2 8 4 u : .
C om p rison 3 3 7 —3 45 a ,
.
F orm tion of F eminine stems a -

,
l
8 7 , 2 5 I , 2 5 5 , 2 62 —2 64 ,
2 68 .
VI . N u m er a ls .
3 2 8 —3 3 6 .
VI I P ron o u ns
. .
2 2 3 —2 3 6 2 8 5 —2 8 8 , , 4 13 .
VI I I o. Co n j ug a ti n .
V oice Tense M o d e N mber Person 5 7 6 5

,
V erb l A d , ,
u , ,
. a
j t i d No
ec ns 6 6 —68
ve s a n Secon d r y C onj g tion 6 9 —7 0 u , . a u a , .
Mo d e d Tense stems 7 l an -
, .
I X P s t S ys t m
. r e en -
e .
C onj g tion C l sses 72 —8 0

u a a , .
F irst C onj g tion u a .
Gener l a , 383 —3 8 7 .
I . R oot cl ss -
a
( H in d secon d u or a d -
cl ss)
a 4 0 4 —4 I2 , 4 l
4
—42 9
,
II . e lic ting Cl ss ( H third or b l ) 4 3 0 —44 0

R du p a a . u c a ss
o
,
.
III . N s l C l ss ( H se enth
a a dl cl ss ) 4 4 l—446
a . v or ra z- a ,
.
IV . N d u C l sses ( H fifth
an d eighth or
u- d t a . an ,
su an an
cl sses) 3 8 8 —3 95
a , .
V . N at C l ss ( H ninth
-
k i cl ss ) 3 99 4 03
a . or r -
a , .
Second , or a -
C onj g tion u a .
VI . a -
C l ss H first
a .
or bltz cl ss ) 9 2 —94
i -
a , ,
9 7 —l
0 2 , I3 4 ,
13 5 , 15 2 4 5 4 ,-
17 8 2 182 ,
ISS, 93
l —l9 6 ,
I99 , 2 00, 2 0 6,
2 07 , 2 10 , 2 2 2 , 2 6 0 .
VI I A ccented d C l ss ( H in d sixth t d cl ss ) -
a u or a -
a l07 —IIO
I5 2 —
.
, ,
I5 4 etc ( for cl ss) . as a -

a .
VI I I .
y aC l -
ss ( H fo rth ora d i cl ss ) I2 4—I 27 . u v- a , ,
I3 I—l
34,
l5 2 —IS5 etc ( f cl ss ) . as or a -
a .
IX . Accente d y t C l ss P ssi e C onj g tion e -

a or a v u a ,
I 68 —l76 ,
I8 8 , I 9 9 , 2 0 0 , 2 I0 , 2 22 .
[ C a u s ti e
a v a nd Denomin ti e C onj g tion ( p a v u a a rt l
y z H . tenth
or cu r - —a 6 5 2 —
cl ss ) I4I I4 l I5 4 etc ( , ,
. as for a -
cl ss ) ;
a
lso 2 l5 —2 2l]
a .
X . Per f e c t Sy s t e m
- .
44 7 —4 7 I, 47 4 .
Peri p hr stic Perfect 47 2 473 a , , .
X I A i s t Sys t m
. or - e .
G ener l 4 8 6 Si m p le Aorist R oot orist 4 8 7 ;

a , oris t . : -
a , a -
a ,
48 8 Re d p lic te d Aorist 4 8 9 490

. Sibil nt Aorist u a , , . a
orist 4 9l; ig orist 4 92 ; i s orist 4 93 ;

s-a , orist 4 94 r -
a ,
s -
a ,
sa - a ,
.
A orist P ssi e 4 9 5 496 a v , , .
XI I . F u t u r e -Syst e m .
Gener l 47 5 Sim p le F t re 47 6—4 8 l

a ,
. u u , . C ondition l a ,
48 2 .
Peri p hr stic F t re 4 8 3 —4 8 5 a u u , .
XI I I g b A d j c t i d S b st ti s P c s
I1
t i i p le I n fi ni t i ve ,
’
. er a e ve s a n u an ve : ar ,
( e r un
P ssi e P rtici p le i n t
a v 2 8 9 —3 OI
a P st Acti e P a or na ,
. a v ar
t i i p l in t
c t e t 3 02 3 03 G er n d s A b l ti
a va n or n a va n , , . u : so u ve s
3 0 4 —3 I3 I nfiniti e 3 I4—3 2 2 . F t re P ssi e P rtici p les v , . u u a v a
Ger n di es 3 2 3 —3 27 u v , .
X I V D i ti . S c d y C j g ti
e r va s
ve or e on ar on u a on .
G ener l 4 97 P ssi e 4 98
a ,
C s ti e 5 0 7 5 08. a v , . au a v , ,
.
I ntensi e 4 9 9 — 5 0 2 Desivd er ti
,
e 5 0 3 — 5 06 Deno m in . a v , . a
ti e 5 0 9 S IO
v , , .
XV P i p h st i c C j g t i
. er ra on u a on .
Perfect 472 47 3 F t re 4 8 3 —4 8 5
, ,
. u u
,
.
X VI . Ve r b a l P re fi x e s : Ad ve b r s and Pr e p o s i t i o n s .
S I, 8 2 , IS7 , l9 0 , 3 95 —3 9 7 .
X VI I r f C mp
F o m a ti o n d St m s o o oun e
C l ssific tion 3 4 6 —
. .
a 35 3
a C o p l ti e C om p o n d s 3 5 4 —3 5 7
,
. u a v u , .
Determin ti e C om p o n ds 3 5 8 ; De p en dent 3 5 9 —3 6I ; De
a v u
scri p ti e 3 6 2 —3 65
, ,
v Secon d ry A djecti e C om p o n d s 3 6 6 a v u
3 7 0 Possessi e 3 7 l—
, .
,
3 7 7 ; w ith G o erne d F in l M em b er 3 7 8
v ,
v a ,
.
A djecti e C om p o nds v N o ns d A d er b s 3 5 0 3 7 9 —3 S I
u as u an v , ,
.
[ D d com
va n
p o n
va d s p
-
1 3 6 ( note ) ; T t
p u s com ,p o n d s p . 1 3 7 a ur u a -
u ,
.
( note ) ; K m d h a y comar p o n d sa
p 1 3 7 (
ranote ) ; D
a- i g m u ,
. v u- co
p o n d s u3 8 0 ; B h,
i h i com p o n d s p 14
a 2 ( note
u vr
); A y y i bh a
-
u ,
. v a va
com p o n d s u ,
X VI I I Sy t cti c l R l s
. n a a u e .
Position of Mo difiers p 35 ( note ) R e p etition of W or d s p 67 ,

. .
, .
A greement of A djecti es 2 45 F orce of C ses v ,

. a
,
I O4 II2,
Prep ositions with C ses 8 2 ISO
. [ i m w ith a , , . r
I nstr ment l ( d G eniti e) p 8 9 ( note )

u a an C onstr ction w ith v ,
. . u
C om p r ti es 345 a a N mer ls 3 3 3
v Prono ns 225 2 3 4 u a u
—2 3 6
. .
, , , ,
i ti p 47 ( note )
.
,F orce f Tenses Present 9 6 ;
. . o : ,
I m p erfect I8 2 ; Perfect 47 4 ; Aorist 4 8 6

,
F orce of M o d es
, , .
I m p er ti e aI 94—I96 ; O p t ti e
v ,
2 07 C s ti e 22l a v ,
. au a v , .
P ssi e l77
a v P st P ssi e P rtici p le 2 9 0
, . a P st A cti e a v a , . a v
P rtici p le 3 03
a G er n d 3 ll—S I3
, . I nfiniti e 3 2 0 —3 2 2 u , . v , .
F t re P ssi e P rtici p le 3 27
u u a v a , .
Ap p di x
en .
H in d N mes of Letters
u a Mo dern H in d A ccent tion f . u ua o
S nskrita .
Suggesti on s f or u si n g th e Pr i m er .
The Primer be finished b y e rnest st dents in sixteen or

ca n a u
se enteen w ee k s reck oning three lessons p w eek w ith here d

v ,
er ,
an
there ho r for re ie w A fter th t L

an u S ns k rit Re der
v . a AN M A N S
’
a a ,
an intro d ction to w hich this w ork is p rtl y inten d e d to h sho ld

u a e, u
be t k en p St d ents
a u strongly recommen d ed to p ro id
. u are v e
themsel es with W N S S ns k rit G r mm r t the o tset

v HI T EY
’
a a a a u .
I t seeme d d is ble to le e the I ntro d ction n d i i d e d into

a v a av u u v
lessons d i ff erent te chers m y p refer to im p rt the l p h bet

, as a a a a a ,
etc to their schol rs t d i ff erent r tes f s p ee d Some f t h

.
, a a a o . o e
exercises for tr nsl tion m y be fo n d r ther too long to be m

a a a u a co
p t d i n one lesson
l e e I s ch c ses it wil l p rob bly be better . n u a a ,
after req iring the tr nsl tion f onl y

u m ny sentences t h a a o so a as e
p p uil m y re son bla

y be ex p ected toam ster in the re
p p a r tion of a a a
d y s lesson to p roceed directl y to the next l

’
one a ,
i th es so n n e
follo w ing ho r le ing the ntr nsl ted s t es for re iew

u ,
av u a a e n
en c a v .
The o b l ries p refixed to e ch exercise

v ca u a t exh sti e a a re no au v ,
since words w hich h e been tre ted f i mmedi tely before av a o a a re
sometimes omitte d from them The gloss ries t the d of the . a a en
book will it is ho p ed be fo n d com p lete for the exercises ; b t

, ,
u u
the me ning f com p o nd words m st in most c ses be le rne d

a o u u a a
fro m their ele m ents ; d p ro p er n mes h e often been omitte d an a av ,
their S nskrit forms being d iscernible from the tr nsliter tion

a a a .
The t ble f contents in system tic gr mm tic l rr ngement

a o a a a a a a
i designe d to f cilit te the fin d ing of

s
y d esiread rticle ; ita m y an a a
also be fo nd sef l uo tline for r p i d gr mm tic l re ie w

u u as an u a a a a a v .
A g m e t f V c b l r i s The oc b l ries
rr an e n orr nge d o a u a e . v a u a a re a a
in strict l ph betic or der ( see belo w ) A ll no ns w hether b
a a . u , su
st anti dject i es
ve s o r agi en in the stem form A ll erb forms
v ,
are v -
. v -
a re
p l ce d n
a d er the root
u ; re
p p osition l com p o nds f er b s li k e a u o v
w ise ,
d not i
an the l p h b etic p l ce f the p re p osition O f
n a a a o .
v erb l djecti es d no ns some im p ort nt ones h e bee gi en

a a v an u
,
a av n v
i n their l p h betic p l ces b t the me ning f most f the m m st

a a a ,
u a o o u
b le rne d from their res p ecti e roots Prono ns

e a gi en gener lly v . u are v a
i the for m f the nomin ti e

n o a v .
Alp h b e t i c O d a The l p h betic order is th t gi en in § I

r er . a a a v ,
b t the follo w ing p oints

u t be notice d here are o :
The i g st n d s next fter the o w els ; b t i g

v sa r a a a v u a v sa r a re
g rde d
a eq i lent to si b il nt d exch nge b le w ith it h
as u va a a an a a as
the l p h betic p l ce f th t sibil nt

a a a o a a .
The sign i re p resenting the t, a f more in d e p en d ent “

a n u sv
’
ra o
origin h its p l ce b efore ll the m t etc ; th s d i y d

”
,
as a a a es . u a r an
d nst a st n d before d ks
a r a a a .
The sign re p resenting n z,

’
ssimil ted m is p l ce d ccord ing an a a ,

a a
to its p honetic l e 1 I f res lting from the ssimil tion of

va u . . nz,
'
u a a
m to s mi o w el si b il nt
a e v 2 re p resent,
n s l semi o w el a ,
or 2, a a a v or
a n u sv a then its p l ce is li k e th t of i Th s p
ra
,
a comes b efore a t . u u nzs
’
p n
uy a d an p y before
s a nz a kr
’
t 2 B taif b the p ro d ct f sa . . u nz
'
e u o
m ssimil te d t
a am te rep resenting a n
o a m then its
u , ,
n, ,
n, or ,
p l ce
a is th t f the n sa l re
o p resente d a a so .
I n tr o du cti on .
Al
pha be t .
I S skri t i co m monly written in wh t is c lled th

. an s a a e
Deva nag i l p h bet The ch r cters f this d the E rop e n

ar a a . a a o ,
an u a
ch r cters whic h will be sed in tr nsliter ting the m

a a follows
u a a ,
are as :
n or m .
Consona nts .
g tt r l
u u a G ish 71 9
p l t l
a a a 6 0h W
M tes
u ling l ua 3 th E d
dent l a W th .
g d
l bi l
a a
P y S
er r , an sk r i t P imr er .
I trn od ctio u n.
Se m i w ls l t l a y
vo
lin g l e
p a a a ua r
d ent l a z l bi l a J a a a v.
Si b il nts p l t l 11 c ; l ing l i t s; dent l G

a : a a a ‘
‘
ua a s 4 .
A s p ir tion g h
‘ ‘
a .
2 The bo e order i th t in which the so nds

. a v c t log ed s a u are a a u
by n ti e gr m m ri ns ;
a v d E ro p e n schol rs h a e
a a d o p ted it
a an u a a v a
as th l p h betic order f diction ries etc The writing r ns

e a a
,
or a ,
. u
from left to right .
3 The theory f the d ag i m ode f wr iting is syll bic

. o eva n ar o a .
an d conson nt l Th t i it reg r d s the written nit t the

a a . a s, a as u ,
no
sim p le so n d b t the syll ble ; d f rther it reg rds the b

u , u a an u , a as su
t
s an t i l p rt
a f the s yll b le the conson nt (
a o the conson nts ) p a a or a re
ceding the o w el this l tter being m erely im p lie d

v is th a ,
as e
c se w ith short i t exce p t when initi l

a if w ritten being
a ,
a , o r, ,
w ritte by s bordin te sign tt ched to the conson nt

n a u a a a a .
4 H ence follo w these t w o p rinci p les

.
A The forms . f the owel ch r cters gi en bo e o sed v -

a a v a v a re u
only w hen the owel forms syll b le by itself is t com b ined

v a a ,
or no
w ith p rece d ing conson nt th t is when it is initi l

a p rece d ed a : a ,
a ,
or
b y nother o w el
a I combin tion with conson nt other modes
v . n a a a ,
of re p resent tion se d a are u .
B I f more th n
. conson nt p recede o w el , forming
a one a a v
w ith it single syll ble their ch r cters m st be combine d into

a a , a a u
a single ch r cter a a .
5 According t the H ind mode of di iding syll bles e ch

. o u v a ,
a
s yll ble m st end in

a u o w el i g or a exce p t t a v ,
or
‘
nsa r a ,
a n u sv r a ,
a
the end f the w or d ; d or din ry H in d s ge does not di i d e

o an as a u u a v
the wor d s f sentence i n writing fin l conson nt is co m bined

o a ,
a a a
into ones yll ble with the initi l o w el or conson nt f the followi ng
a a v a o
w or d , th t syll ble ends in conson nt only t the end of

so a a a a a a
the sentence .
I ntrod ction u .
Th s the sentence k t s kta bbi m g ha am dbk dba y

u se r e u sz
'
r e
'
n a
’
zr n a ni
'
p ld
ra rz l m
’
by the wza ter w hich d ro p s from

‘
the clo d s p on the a u u
fields the gr in grows t ll w o ld b consi d ere d

a consisting f a
’
u e as o
the s yll bles h t a kt a bh i m g b a a m d bhi dh a

se re
gsun sz
’
r a n a r n ar
p ra t dhrzm E
’
ch f these a s y ll bles
. w o l d be in
a d ic te d by o a u a a
single gro p of signs w itho t y reference wh te er to the di

u ,
u an a v
v ision f the w ords com p osing th sentence ; d the syll bles

o e an a
a re l w y s w i tt indep endently with m ore or less closeness f

a a r en , o
a pp ro ch ; either like
a this
’
fi fi g fn nt fn fi m a m fis ci r a i '
n ts e q or ma tt re s
s
S ns k rit w orks p rinted in E ro p e the com m on p r ctice

6 . In a u , a
is t se p r te the w ords
o a f a this be done w itho t y so ar as ca n u an
a lter tion f th e w ritten form Th s { W a n : i d ag m l;

a o . u , n r a na a z
b t W
u
WW t t it y m bec se the fi n l i t ta d sa v a r v a r en a , au a i an
t w ritten w ith their f ll forms B t some fe w w or k s

g
“
r are n o u . u
h e b een p rinte d in w hich by free

a v f sign c lle d i a m
, ,
a u se o a a v r a
( see b elo w the in d i i d l

,
words se p r ted I t l
i t v ua are a a . n ra ns e
r te d texts there is n o good re son f p rinting otherwise th n

a a or a
w ith ll the w or d s sep r te d

a a a .
7 U d A . V owels combined w ith p rece d ing conson nts

n er . a
are written follows as
1 Short h
. a : w ritten sign t ll; the conson n t sign
a as no a a a -
itself im p lies following nless so m e other owel sign is a a ,

u v -
tt ched t it ( else the i a m

a a belo w
o Th s
or v r a se e , u
the conson nt signs gi en bo e re lly the signs for k

a -
v a v are a a ,
kb h etc ( fa , 3
ca h ) , c a, . as ar as
“
a .
2 a $1 kit
. i n a : H T dba etc . c . .
fi g; ki fir p i fir di an kt fi i} di e
‘
3 . i a nd a: . . n . . t pz . v .
The b k bo e t rning to the left to the right is bistori

oo a v ,
u or ,
c lly the essen ti l p rt of the ch r cter h ing been origin lly

a a a a a , av a
I ntrod ction u .
the whole f it ; the b k were onl y l ter p rolonged

o oo s a , so
as to re ch ll th e w y down beside the conson nt Obser e

a a a a . v
th t the i hoo k s d the hoo k s res p ecti el y bo e d

a -
an u- , v a v an
below the line n logo s in t rning to the left for the ,

are a a u u
short owel d to the right for the long

v an .
4 . u an d it
5 k
q E b
d
:
i kfi
i n 3 b
1 O w
n ing. cu . u . . o . .
to the necessities f combin tion conson nt d o w el sign o a , a an v -
are someti m es disg ised ; th s g d ii an ; Q Q m ;

g
u u ,
a ,
‘
r u,
“
hu , 3 1127
“
or .
5 .
r and i
“
:
i i kr .
Ep r . kf .
E
a if sign . W h it th e h -
,
the o w el hook is s ll y
v -
u ua a tt che d to the mi d dle ; th s
a u ,
h
E r . 6 .
1:
7 . Di p hthongs . e: E Ice . fi ps .
a ye . at : at ka i . Wa t t .
fl ko fi bh o (i n a) ka u R
‘ ”
J
‘ “
Ta u
0 : . . : .
( .
some p rinte d texts the signs for

In d a se p r ted o a n n are a a ,
the a or being p l ced o er the conson nt sign d not o er the

. a v a -
,
an v
er
p p en d ic l r t k ; t
u ah Q T k fi t k a s ro e _
u s, o, u .
8 A conson nt sign m y be m d e t signify the so n d f

. a -
a a o u o
th t conson nt lone witho t

a a d d e d o w el by writing bene th
a , u an a v , a
it stro k e c lle d the m a m res t

a a th s ask g h g d ’
r a
’
,
u , , , .
Strictly the i a m sho l d be sed only t the end of sentence ;

,
v r a u u a a
b t it is often se d by scribes
u in p rint in the mi dd le f w or d
u ,
or ,
o a
or sentence to oid w k w r d or d iffic lt combin tions ; th s

, av a a u a u ,
m i dbkzl
l
m l
’
t, i tsu .
9 . The combin tions of conson nts

Un der B . in gener l a a are a
not diffic lt The p er p en d ic l r d hori ont l lines

u . common u a an z a a re
to lmost ll; d if t w
a a m ore to be co m bined the follo w ing
an o or are ,
metho d is p rs e d The ch r cteristic p rt f conson nt sign

u u . a a a o a a -
th t is to be dd e d t nother is t k en ( to the excl sion of the

a a o a a u
er
p p en d ic l r or of the
u a hori ont l fr ming line or f both ) d z a a -
, o ,
an
they p t
a re together uccording to con enience either si d e by side a v , ,
6 I ntrod ctio u n.
th s cont ining
u a r as its first m ember i followed by of the s one
vowels i i , , e, 0 , a t (i with witho t n s l sy mbol the

,
n, or u a a a ,
'
7
sign m st st nd u a at the extreme right ; th s af k a?k éfi ka u ,

r e, r o,
‘
r u,
f ailr kz lr ki , éfi r ka nz, afifi t r ka nsz,

al
“
fl ‘
r bh i ri i
’ ‘
“
, z .
2 rono nce d fter nother conson nt conson nts is

. If p u a a a or a , r
in dic te d by sl nting stro k e belo w to the left ; th s q g 1 1 p m

a a a , u ,
‘
ra , ,
3 31
er ad A d
, with mo d
?
ific tion s
raof the.
p rece d ing conson
n nt , a a
sign li k e those noted bo e a t 3 7 p m I the mi d dle f a v ,

ra ,
. n o a
gro p h the s me sig

u ,
r t the end ; th s
as
y g ga n as a u ,
r a ,
“
sr v a .
3 W hen . is to be combined w ith following a; r it is

r a ,
the owel which is written in f ll with its initi l ch r cter d

v u ,
a a a , an
the conson nt in s bor d in tion to it ; th s

a g fi i fi fa i gt
u a u ,
rr,
‘
n r
'
’
z .
14 C ombin tions f three fo r or e en fi

. conson nts (this
a o ,
u , v ve a
l tter excessi ely r re)

a m d e ccording to the s me r les ; th s
v a a re a a a u u ,
3 1 d dbya , g} d vya , 3 Td r ya , w
'
EQ tsya
‘
fl ttva , YE p sva , , pcya ,
Ba s tbya
g
nksv a , g] str ya , F8 21 tsm ya
"
FQ R I r tsn ya .
Both MSS
15 . d typ e fonts d iffer consi d er bly i their . an - a n
m n gement f conson nt combin tions b t little p r ctice w ill

a a o a - a ,
u a a
en ble
a who i thoro ghl y f mili r with the sim p le signs nd
one s u a a a
with the p rinci p les f combin tion to d eci p her well to m k e o a ,

as as a
for himself lls ch gro p s , a u u .
16 A sign (S) c lled the g h or sep r tor is sed in

. a a va ra a ,
‘
a a
’
, u
p rinted texts t m rk the elision f initi l fter

o fin l p (
a see o a a a a 6 r 0
belo w th s Flq a t t b B t some texts ‘

''
u v e r ac a n . u ,
,
es p eci lly those p rinte d in I ndi dis p ense w ith this sign
a a ,
.
I n tr nsliter tion this sign w ill be re p resente d by the

o ur a a
in erted comm
v in the ex m p le j st gi en I the MSS the a
a, as a u v . n .
t
is lso sed
a h yp hen d so m etimes
u as a m rk f hi t s ,
an as a a o a u .
17 The sign is se d to m rk omission f something e sily ;

.
0 u a an o a
u nderstoo d ( w hether fro m the context fro m p re io s knowle dge) l ,

or v u ,
I ntrod ction u .
7
and th s becomes m rk f bbre i tion ; th s

u a a o a v a u ,
t rai
t 0
“
o
aa
g a ta s t m t
-
ai e g t m g t etc
-
en a , . . a a a en a .
18 .The only signs of p nct tion d u ua are an l

l
19 .The n mer l fig res u a u are
In combin tion to ex p ress l rger n mbers they

a sed p recisely
,
a u , are u
as are E ro p e n d igits ; th s Q 3 24
u 48 5 S 63 0 7 620
a This u , , ,
.
s y stem f not tion origin ted in I ndi

o d w bro ght to E ro p e
a a a, an as u u
by the Ar bs who c l l it the I ndi n s y stem

a , we style it the a a ,
as
Ar bic a .
20 I writing S nskrit the H ind s gener lly begin t the left

. n a u a a
o f the letter d m k e the hori ont l t p stro k e l st ; th s 7

,
an I a z a o -
a u , ,
‘
,
i t; 9 31 a ; , h 3 B t often the hori ont l stro k e is m de

:
c
,
. u z a a
first d the p erp endic l r stroke dd ed witho t r ising the p

, an u a a u a en
from the p p er ; th s 1 a ; 1 3 ! a u , , ,
System of Sounds : Pr onunc ia t ion .
The S ns k rit is sed in I ndi to this d y ery m ch

21 . a u a a v u as
L tin w sed i n E ro p e in the p re io s cent ry it is com m on

a as u u v u u : a
me di m f com m nic tion between the le rned be their n ti e

u o u a a ,
a v
tong es w h t they m y d it is not the ern c l r of y district

u a a ,
an v a u a an
wh te er H ence it is not str nge th t th p

a v . i ti f S a a e r on un c a on
'
o an
s k i t w ords
r ries gre tly mo g schol rs fro m di ff erent p rts of
va a a n a a
I n di ; d p rob bly
a one s y stem re p resents the tr e ncient
an a no u a
mode f tter nce w ith m ch ex ctness

o u a u a .
l Vowel
. s .
22 . A . Th e a ,
i, s These three occ r both short
a n d u - vo we l . u
a nd long ,
a n d a re to be p rono nced in the I t li n m nner u
‘
a a
’
a as
in ( or - ) g a n a n d f a th p ier ,d i
p q p ll d l res
n an p ecti ely The u e, u an r u e, v .
8 I ntrod ction u .
a owel st nds i n
v el tion f kindre d with y f the cl sses
a no r a o
'
an o a
o f conson nt l so n d s B t the ia owel is disti ctly p l t l d

a u . u v n a a a ,
an
the owel distinctly l bi l

u -v as a a .
23 B Th r d lv w l Both f thes
. . e p l inly
an the -
o e s. o e a re a
res lt f bbre i ting syll bles cont ini g g i t I long w ith

‘
u o a v a a a n a r or a
a nother owel r is to be so nded li k e the in the E nglish fi b

v : u re r e,
I like l i n bl e a e .
24 C Th e di p h th g
. 1 Th . d which l w ys on s. . e e an 0 ,
are a a
long sho ld recei the long

,
u d so nds of the E nglish th y
ve e an o- u e
an d b w itho t tr e d i p htho g l ch r cter I their origin both

o n e, u u n a a a . n ,
were do btless in the m in p re d ip hthongs (

u i ); a u e a ,
o a u
b t they lost this ch r cter t

u ery e rly p erio d a a a a v a .
2 The a t . d (i sp oken li k e the i in E nglish i l d

an n a re a a s e an an
in Germ n B m ( in E nglish h ) ; th t is
a au
p re d i
ou p hthongs o us e a , as u
w ith long p rior ele m ent They wer origin ll y d o btless d istin . e a ,
u ,
g i h
u s d fro m e d only by the length of the first
6 an ele m ent 0 .
11 Co nsona nts
. .
25 . A
e ch series f m tes there
. M a t es t w o s rd
. In a o u are u
m e m bers t w son nts d ,

n s l ( lso son nt) ; e g in th e
o a ,
an one a a a a . .
,
l bi l series the s rds p d p h the son nts b d bh d the

a a ,
u an ,
a an ,
an
son nt m a .
2 6 The first d third m e m bers f e ch series

. the ordin ryan o a are a
corresp onding s rd d son nt m t of E ro p e n l ng ges ; th s u an a a es u a a ua u

,
k a nd g, t a nd d, p a nd b .
Nor i the ch r cter of the n s l y m ore d o btf l

27 . s a a a a an u u .
Wh t is to p d b
a in is to t d d th t is lso e ch other an ,
or n an ,
a a a
n s l to its w series of m tes son nt exp lsion f bre th into

a a o n u : a a u o a
and thro g h the ose while h m o th org ns

u in the m te n ,
t e u a are u
cont ct a .
28 The second d fo rth f e ch series

. s p ir tes ; th s an u o a are a a u ,
In trod ctio u n. 9
beside the s rd m t 1 w h e the corres p ondi g s rd p i t

u u e 0 e av n u aS ra e
Ih
c , d beside the s n nt g the corres p on d ing s p ir te g h I t is
an o a , a a .
s l m ong E ro p e n schol rs to p rono nce both cl sses f p i

u ua a u a a u a o aS
r tes the corres p onding non s p ir tes with

a as ery closel y fol a a a v
lowing h ; e g i h ne rly in b th .
p h . in,
h p h . d d h a as oa o u se, as a a za r ,
as in m dh This is i n cc r te f
a o u se . the son nts con a u a so ar as a a re
cerned ; b t the q estion of their origin l so n d is

u f gre t
u a u o ne o a
diffic lty d still nsettled

u , an u .
29 The s p ir tes
. not do ble lettersa a a re u .
The se er l m te series will w be t ken p in det il

v a u -
no a u a .
30 1 G tt . ls : k kh g g h
. 3 These
u the ordin ry
ur a , , , ,
7 . are a
E nglish 1 d 9 ( h rd so nds w ith their corresp onding sp ir tes

0 an
“
a -
u ,
a a
an d n s l ; the l st like g in i gi g
a a a ,
n s n n .
3 1 2 P l t ls :
. h j j h ii
. This w hole series is deri ti e
a a a 0, c , , ,
. va v ,
being gener ted by the corr p tion f origin l g tt r ls ( The p l t l

a u o a u u a . a a a
m te u d the sibil nt 9 often re p resent t w

c an s ccessi e st ges a o u v a
o f corr p tion f k the corres p on d ing degrees of corr p tion f 9

u o , u o are
both rep resented by j ) F this re son the e p honic tre tm ent . or a u a
o f the p l t ls is i n m ny res p ects p ec li r

a a a The p l t l m tes a u a . a a a u
c d j an p rono nce d w ith the

are com p o d so nds f E nglishu un u o
o h d j an in h h d j dg See lso 2 8
,
as c ur c an u e . a .
3 2 3 L i g l : t th 4 ah n
. . The ling l m t
n ua s s id , , , ,
. ua a es a r e a
to be ttered w i th the ti p of the tong e t rned p d d r wn b ck

u u u u an a a
into the do m e f the p l te some w h t the E nglish ( r ther o a a ,

a as or a
A m eric n ) smooth a e g i n y is p rono nced I p r ctice r, . . v er u . n a
E ro p e n S nskritists m k e n o ttem p t to disting ish them from

u a a a a u
the d ent ls t is p rono nced like t d like d d so

a : u , , an on .
3 3 4 D e t l : t th d dh
. . These n
p ra sctic lly the , , , ,
n . are a a
eq i lents f
u va c lled dent ls t d,o o ur so -
a a ,
n .
*
B t the H ind s gener lly

u ling ls t re p resent the E nglish u a u se ua o
dent ls ; th s m a l nd
a London
u ,
a ana
‘
.
’
l0 I ntrod ction u .
34 s
. 5p h. b b h m These
L a bi al : p ex ctly the eq i, , , , . are a u
l t
va e n s o f the E nglish p b m , , .
35 B S m i w ls y
. .l 1 The p l t l semi owel y
e vo e : ,
r, , v. . a a a v
st n d s in the closest rel tionshi p with the owel i (short long)

a a v or :
the two exch ng with one nother in c ses inn mer ble Very a e a a u a .
p rob bly the S nskrit 3; h d e ery where m ore

a a f i ch r cter a v o an -
a a
th n a our
y .
36 2 The . is cle rly ling l so nd I t th s resembles

. r a a ua u . u
the E nglish smooth d like this seems to h e been r, t il ld

an av un r e .
3 7 3 The li . so n d f dent l p osition q ite in E nglish

. s a u o a ,
u as .
38 4 The l bi l. is p rono nced E nglish F rench by

. a a v u as or v
the mo d er H ind s gg p p t
n w hen p r ece d ed u by c on sp p g nt e r
g
d
a _
( g pt
exc the
fl
s m e yllg bl a E n li h w ; s e,
an d E ro p e n schol rs follo w the s me p r ctice ( w ith

u a a witho t a a or u
the s me excep tion) B t strictly the st n d s rel ted to

a . u v a a an u
v o w el p recisely y to i owel th t i it is w so nd i the as an -

v : a s, a -
u n
E nglish sense or p erh p s more li k e the ,

i F rench i The
a on n ou .
r les f S ns k rit e p hony ff ecting this so nd d the n me semi

u o a u a u , an a
“
v owel h e no p p lic tion exce p t to s ch w so n d

”
,
av a so nd
a u a -
u : a v u
( G erm n w ) is
a no semi owel b t s p ir nt li k e the E nglish i h v ,
u a a ,
so n d s d f
u an .
3 9 C Si b i l t s : c s
. . 1 The is f p l i ch r cter
an , ,
s . . s o a n a a : a
dent l d ex ctly li k e the E nglish ( in l

a ,
an a ne er 8 as esso n v as
in )
c a se .
40 2 The s is the sibil nt p rono nce d in the ling

. . l p osition a u ua .
I t is therefore
, k in d f h so n d d by E ro p e ns is p rono nced
,
a o s -
u ,
an u a u
as ordin ry E nglish h a ttem p t being m d e to gi e it its s ,

no a a v
p ro p er ling l q lity ua ua .
41 3 The 9 is by
. . ll n ti e thorities d escribe d p l t l a a v au as a a a .
I t is the s l h so nd of E nglish tho gh the H in d s

u ua s u s id ,
u u are a
I ntrod c tion u .
11
to S p e k it somewh t di ff erently ow d ys By E ro p e ns it is
a a n a a . u a
va rio sly p rono nced p erh p s oftener

u th n
u h a as 8 a as s .
42 All three sibil nts

. lw y s s r d a a re a a u .
43 D Asp i t i . h This is s ll p rono nced li k e the

. ra on : . u ua y u
ordin ry E ro p e n d s p ir tion h B t its tr e l e in the

a u a su r a a . u u va u
e p hony of the l ng ge is th t of son nt I t i not origin l

u a ua a a a . s an a
so nd f the l ng ge b t comes i n m ost c ses from older g h

u o a ua ,
u a an ,
i n so m e f w c ses from dh e bh I t p p e rs to i cl d e in itself

a or . a a n u
t w o st ges f corr p tion of gh one corres p on ding with th t f k

a o u z a o
to the other with th t of k to c

c, a .
44 E Vi s g : h The h p p e rs to be m erely s rd bre th

. . . ar a . a a a u a
ing fi n l h so nd ( in the E ro p e n sense f h) ttere d in the

, a a u u a o ,
u
a rtic l ting p osition f the p receding o w el The i g is not

u a o v . v sa r a
origin l b t l w y s mere s bstit te for fi n l

a ,
u a a a u u a 8 or r .
45 F A s a The i or i is n s l so n d '
. . a nu v ra . a n u sv ra ,
t n ,
a a a u
l ck ing th t clos re of the org ns w hich is req ire d to m k e

a a u a u a a
na s l m te ; in its tter nce there is n s l reson nce long with

a u u a a a a a
some d gree f o p enness f the mo th E rop e n schol rs gi e

e o o u .
’
u a a v
the a the l e f the n s l in the F rench

a n u sv ra va u i o a a -
an, -
on ,
-
eh ,
-
a ,
etc w hich is mere n s l coloring f the p receding o w el

.
, a a a o v .
46 T w o d i ff erent signs 3 d i i
. se d i the M SS to , . an ,
are u n .
in dic te the a a Most co m monly i em p loy ed ; fl w il l

a n u sv ra . s
not often be m et with in p rinte d texts exce p t t m rk the ch nge ,

o a a
o f an s l m te to a ia before follo w ing semi ow l p rti

u a n u svc r a
’
a v e , a
l l
cu a r y 1 ; th s m a
y Gra m t a f ll b d
u h a C,
f tag f a n . . .
47 I t is con enient in tr nsliter tion to d isting ish the ssi

. v a a u a
mil te d m (in ll c ses) by s p eci l sign i fro m the

s a a a f a a i i ,
a n usv r a o
m ore indep endent origin re p resented by i ,

t.
I? I ntrod ction u .
Li ght a nd Hea vy Sy l
labl
es .
etric l p rp oses sy ll bles ( not owels)

48 . F or m di a u a v a re s
ti g i h d
n he y d light A syll ble is he y if i t owel
u s e as
‘
av
’
an
‘ ’
. a av s v
is long or short d follo w e d by m ore th n

,
conson nt ( long an a one a
“
by Vi g d a here co nte d f ll con sa r a an a n u sv r a a r e u as u
son nts Th s p ir ted m tes f co rse d pa t

a . te do ble
a a u ,
o u ,
o
'
co un as u
letters .
u nds Gu na a nd Vrddhi Cha nges of So . .
49 The ch nges to w hich both the owels

. d the conson nts
a v an a
of S ns k rit s bject
a ery n m ero s A m ong the owel
are u are v u u . v
ch nges the m ost reg l r d freq ent

a , the c lled g n d u a an u are so - a u a an
g d dh i which
vr f freq ent occ rrence in deri tion
, d inflection
a re o u u va an .
5 0 The follo w ing t ble exhibits these ch nges

. a a :
Theoretic lly the ch nges of T wo ld coincide with those

51 . a a u
o f r d the r d dhi f ! wo ld b d l; b t
,
an vc t l c ses of these o u e u a ua a
a re q ite n k nown The g n of lis l (j st th t f r i )

u u . u a a u as a o s ar ,
b t it occ rs only in one root kl

u p u As will b seen in the seq el ,
. e u ,
the g n so nd coincides with the res lt of the combin tion f

u a -
u u a o
an 3 1 with the sim p le owel corres p on d in g to th t g n ; th s 3 1

a v a u a u ,
a
combines with following 3: i i 5 into Q which is lso the a or

‘
6, a
g n
u af { i o d i i The r d d h i in li k e m
an nner is identic l . v ,
a , a
w ith the res lt f combining 31 with the corres p on d ing

u o an a
g n
u ; th
a s 3 ! combines with u following
,
11 a into fi a t t h a 6
, e
v r d d h i f 1 i d i
o F the p resent t h tanble is to be le rned . or e a a
ou tright .
52 I ll g n ting p roc sses 3

. n ”
re m ins nch nged
a u a e a a u a or,
14 I ntrod ction u .
Acc ent .
The p heno m en f ccent

56 . by the H ind gr m m ri ns a o a a r e, u a a a
o f ll ges li k e d escribe d
a a d tre te d
a d e p en d ing
, ri tion an a as o n a va a
o f tone or p itch ; of y d iff erence f stress in ol e d thean

y m k e o v v ,
a
no cco nt These ccents

a u .m rk ed only in cert in V e d ic texts
a are a a ,
a n d em p lo y ed only in their recit tion where s the ccents se d a ,

a a u
no w d y s by H in d s i the p ron nci tion f S ns k rit ( d le ft

a a u n u a o a an
u n d enoted in writing) m inly ict s ccents i e ri tions fa re a u -

a , . . va a o
stress The p rinci p les of the l tter system will be gi en in

. a v an
a pp en d ix The older s y ste.m f ccents h gre t et y mologic l i m o a as a a
p ort nce ; the

a l tter none w h te er ; d onl ya the older s y stem a v an
will be referre d t in the following H ere it wil lbe eno gh to st te o . u a
th t the p rim ry tones

a ccent p itch s f the ol d er sy stem
a or a -
e o a re
two higher or c te ; d lo w er
: a ,
gr e A thir d c lled
a u an a ,
or av .
, a
sva r it is lw y s f secon d ry origin being or din rily the res l t

a ,
a a o a , a u
o f ct l combin tion
a ua f c te owel d gr e o w el into
a o an a u v an a av v
o ne sy ll ble I t is niformly d efine d com p o nd in p itch

a . u nio as u , a u n
o f higher d lo w er tone w ithin the limits of

an single s yll b le I t a a .
i th s i d entic l in p hysic l ch r cter with the G ree k

s u a d L tin a a a an a
circ mflex u d f ll y entitle d to be c lled by the s me n me

,
a n u a a a .
W hene er in the seq el v ccent is m entione d witho t f ther d

,
u ,
a ,
u ur e
fi i ti
n the c te ccent is to be nderstood ; d it will be de
on, a u a u an
s i g t d by the or d in ry c te sign
na e a a u .
u o f Verb s Co nj gatio n .
57 The S ns k rit erb exhib its the closest n logy with th t

. a v a a a
of G reek being d e elo p e d in tense s y stems

,
o tgrowths f cert in v -
,
as u o a
tense stems I the ol d er st ge of the l ng ge i e in the

-
. n a a ua , . . so
c lled V e dic p erio d the mo d l r mific tions f e c h tense ste m

a ,
a a a o a -
are as n mero s in Gree k ; b t in the l ter st ge the S ns k rit

u u as u a a , a
ro
p p er ( lso c lled th cl ssic
a l l ng ge ) these o tgrowths
a h e a a a ua
,
u a ve
I ntrod ction u .
been lo pp ed ff to so ery gre t extent th t w ith o insigni v a an a one
fi t exce p tion the p rec ti e

ca n orist O p t ti e only the p resent
,
a v or a a v ,
system still ret ins y mod l riety w h te er a an a va a v .
58 There is sim p le or d in ry conj g tion f erb l roo t s

. a or a u a o v a ,
which w e c ll p i m y ; d there a cert in more r less f lly

ar an are a or u
d e elo p e d s c d y
v d ri ti conj g tions
e on ar or e va ve u a
5 9 V i c s There
. t w o oices cti e d mi d dle w hich ex en d
o e . are v ,
a v an , t
thro gho t the w hole system f conj g tion F the p resent

u u o u a . or
system lone there is S p eci lp ssi e i nflection ; the mi dd le form

a a a a v s
o tsi d e th t system
u d sometimes e en within it
a li ble to
,
an v ,
are a
be se d li k e w ise in p ssi e sense An cti e form is c lled by

u a a v . a v a
the H ind gr mm ri ns p m a i p d m w ord f

u a nother ;
a a aras a a
‘
or a
’
a
m id d le form a tm w ord one s self Some er s ’ ’

p d m f ,
ane b a a
‘
or . v are
conj g ted in both oices others i n one only ; sometimes some of

u a v ,
the tenses inflecte d onl y i n on e oice others only in the other

are v ,
v oice in both ; f erb s ll y inflected in

,
or oice S p or dic
o a v u ua one v a
for m s f the other occ r ; d sometimes the oice di ff ers the

o u an v as
v erb i com p o n d e d w ith cert in p re p osition s

s u a .
60 P e so s d N m b s There
. r nthree p erson first
an u er . are s: ,
second d third ; d , w ith s bst nti es djecti es

an d p an ,
as u a v ,
a v , an ro
n o ns three n mbers sing l r d l d p l r l All these p ersons

u ,
u : u a ,
ua , an u a .
an d n mbers u m de fro m e ery tense d m ode —exce p t th t

are a v an a
the first p ersons f the im p er ti e re ll y s bj ncti e forms

o a v are a u u v .
6 1 The n ti e gr mm ri ns denote
. the first p erson Wh t
a v a a a as a
w c ll the third ; we w ont to s p e k f the erb A y m ’

e a d an as are a o v e ,
the erb tpx n h erb m etc

v
’
othe H ind s
a z, for inst nce
t e v a o, .
,
so u u se a
un fi t bh d ti (3 d sing p res i d i va of Vbhil) to signify the whole

r . . n e .
syste m f erb l for m s from th t root since “Hf ? he d s the list

o v a a , a
o f for m in the n ti e gr mm r s My i pX Mm a m does

v a a ,
as er, or ’
o ,
or a o,
in Greek L tin The H ind s e en m ke s bst nti es t f

or a . u v a u a v ou o
s ch c tch w ord for m s d i fl t them ccording to the ne ed s f

u a ,
an n ec a o
exp ression .
62 I . the following the conj g tion cl ss f erbs w ill be

n , u a -
a o v
indic ted by the 3 d sing p res ind p l ced in p renthesis fter

a r . . .
, a a a
the root ; th s 3! N t ( Ra fa bh ti ) u ,
u
“ '
a va .
63 T s s 3 d m d s
. en The sche m e f tenses d modes p t
e 1 o e . o an u
forth by t h H in d s holds good only for the l ter l ng ge d

e u a a ua , an
e en there tterl y confo nds the ide s f m o d e d tense

v u u a o an .
64 The only logic l rr nge m ent f the mo d es d tenses in

. a a a o an
S nsk rit is shown in the following t ble (which incl des only th
a a u e
cl ssic l s p eech )
a a :
I P s e t S ys t m
. re I ndic ti e b I m p erfect
n - e I m p er ti e
: a. a v . . . c. a v .
d Op t ti e . P rtici p le a v . e. a :
I I P f ec t Sys t m
. er I ndic ti e
- b P rtici p le
e . a. a v . . a .
I I I A i st S ys te m ( of tri p le form tion )

. or I ndic ti e b Op
s a . a. a v . .
t ti ( sometimes
a ve
I V F t e S ys t m s
. u ur e .
A Sibil nt F t re I ndic ti e b Preterit ( =

. a u u . a. a v . .
P rtici p le c. a .
B P iph ti F t re
. er I n d ic ti e
ra s c u u . a. a v .
65 The tenses here disting ishe d

. im p erfect p erfect d u as , , an
a orist recei e those mes fro m their corres p ondenc in m ode f

v na e o
form tion wi t h tenses

a c lle d in other l ng ges f the f mily so a a ua o a ,
es p eci lly i Greek d not t ll fro m y di ff erences f ti m e

a n ,
an a a an o
d esign te d by them
a I no p eriod f the S nskrit l g u ge is
. n o a an a
there y exp ression f im p erfect

an l
p p erfect ti m e nor
o f or u o
p erfect time exce p t in the ol

,
d er l ng ge where the orist h a ua ,
“
a
”
as
this l e ; i the l ter s p eech im p erfect p erfect d orist ( f

va u n a , , ,
an a o
r ra )
e u se m ny discri
a r e so m in t d p st tenses
a p re t rits un a e a or e .
I ntr od c t ion
u .
u b sta ntives
‘
Ver b a lAdje c tives a nd S .
6 6 P t i c i p l s The p rtici p les belonging to the tense syste m s

. ar e . a -
h e been lre dy indic ted in the t ble t § 64 There is besides

av a a a a a .
, ,
a p rtici
a p le formed d irectly fro m the root f the erb which is o v ,
p re ilingly
va f p s t d p ss i ( somet m es
o ne ter ) m
a e n ng an a ve i u a i .
Moreo er f t p si p rtici p les

v , u ureg di v f se er l
as ve a ,
or er u n e s, o v a
di ff eren t form tions m de b t witho t connection with the

a , are a ,
u u
f t re stems
u u -
.
67 I fi i t i e . Th cl ssic l S nskrit h
n n vsingle infiniti e
. e a a a as a v .
I t is re lly cc s ti e c se f erb l o n h ing nothing

a an a u a v a o a v a n u ,
av
wh te er to do with the tense systems

a v -
.
68 G d A c lled ger nd
. eru n bsol ti e is es p eci lly
. so - a u , or a u v ,
a
fre q ent d is like the infiniti e stereotyp ed c se form ( i

u , an , v ,
a a -
n
t m
s ru t l ) f
en a deri ti e erb l no n o I t la e i th t f va v v a u . s va u s a o an
indeclin ble cti e p rtici p le with indetermin te b t oftenest p st

a a v a , a ,
u a ,
te m p or l force a .
Sec o nda ry Conjuga tio nsi
69 . The second ry conj g tions

follows 1 P si e ; a u a are as : . as v
2 I te i
. n ; 3 D id ti
n s ve 5 4 C ti I these not the . es er a ve . a u sa ve . n ,
si m p le root b t conj g tion ste m nderlies the w hole system

,
u a u a -
,
u
o f inflections Y t in the m ll is p l inly isible the ch r cter f

. e a a v a a o
a p resent system ex p nded into m-

ore less co m p lete conj g ,
a a or u a
tion ; the p ssi e is p l p bly p resent sy ste m C o m p re

a 5 8
v
— 59 a a a -
. a .
7 0 U nder the s me gener l he d belong 6 D o m i

. ti e a a a : . en na v
conj g tion which res lts from the con ersion f no n ste m s both
u a ,
u v o u -
,
s bst nti e d djecti e into conj g tion stems ; 7 C m p d con

u a v an a v ,
u a -
. o oun
j g tion res lting fro m the p fi i

u a ,
f p re p ositions t
u roots re x ou o o ,
or
from the d dition of xili ry erbs to no n ste m s ; d 8 P i p h s t i

a au a v u -
an . er ra c
conj g tion fro m th loo co m bin tio f x ili ries with erb l
u a , e ser a n o au a v a
n o ns d djecti e
u an a v s.
P y S
er r , a n skr i t P imr er .
The ch r cteristic f p ro p er ( i e finite p erson l)

71 . a a o a . . or a
verb for m is its p erson l en ding By this lone is determine d its

-
a . a
ch r cter reg rds p erson d n mber d in p rt lso reg r d s

a a as a an u ,
an a a as a
mode d tense B t the distinctions f mo d e d tense

an . u o an are
m inly m d e by the form tion f mode d tense —

a a stems to which a o an , ,
inste d f to the b re root the p erson l en d ings

a o
pp en d e d a , a are a .
u Conj ga tio n Cl
a sses .
72 Of the w hole onj g tion the p resent system is the i m

. c u a ,
-
p ort nt ad p rominent p anrt I t forms er y m ch more f a . s are v u ro
q ent th n those of ll the other sy stems together As there is

u a a .
a lso gre t riety in the m nner in w hich di ff erent roots form their
a va a
p resent stems this -

being their most
,
cons p ic o
,
s d i
as ff erence is u u ,
m d e the b sis of their p rinci p l cl ssific tion ; d erb is s i d

a a a a a an a v a
to be f this or th t co j g tion
o cl ss ccor ding to the w y
a n u a ,
or a , a a
in w hich its p t t m is m de r e se n ~
s e a .
73 O f these conj g tion cl sses th ere

. nine incl ding the
u a -
a are , u
p ssi
a e w
v hich is re,
ll y p resent s y stem onl y The a first fi a -
. ve
exhibit coinci d ences eno gh to j stify their incl sion into one u u u co n
j gu tion a d the rem ining

,
fo
an r will com p ose li k ewise secon d
a u a
conj g tion The chief d istinctions bet w een the two gro p s
u a . u are
as follows
7 4 I the fi s t the cl sses h
. n e in common r , their f n d a av , as u a
m ent l ch r cteristic
a shift of ccent the tone is w p on the
a a ,
a a : no u
p erson l ending a w p on the root the

,
cl
no ss sign Along u w ith or a -
.
this goes ri tion in the stem it elf w hich h

a va a stronger or s , as a ,
f ller form when the ccent rests p on it d w e k er or briefer

u ,
a u ,
an a a , ,
for m when the ccent is the en d ing W d isting ish these

a on . e u
forms the strong d the w e k stem forms res p ecti ely

as an a - v .
75 I the s c d j g ti
. n the contr ry the ccent
e on c on u a on , o n a ,
a
h as a fixed p l ce re m ining lw ys p o the s m e syll ble f th

a , a a a u n a a o e
I ntrod ctio u n. 19
s te m d ne er being shifted to the en d ings ; d the distinction f

,
an v an o
strong d we k forms is n k no w n Moreo er the p resent stem

an a u . v ,
-
o f e ery erb in the fo r cl sses

v f this conj g tion ends in 3 1
v u a o u a a .
There lso other p oints f d i ff erence

are a o .
76 The cl ssific tion c rrent mong the H in d

. a d hitherto a u a u, an
a mong the E ro p e n gr mm ri ns com p rises ten conj g tion

u a ,
a a a u a
cl sses rr nge d ccor d ing to

a ,
a intelligible p rinci p le wh te er
a a no a v .
The ti e tenth cl ss is re ll y no p resent c l ss t ll b t

na v
“
a
”
a -
a a a , u a
c s ti e i e d eri ti e conj g tion which extends bey ond the

au a v ,
. . a va v u a ,
limits of the p resent sy stem P ob bly the f ct th t by n o me ns -

. r a a a a
a ll conj g tion stems forme d b y the c s ti e sign h d re lly

u a - au a v a a a
c s ti e l e ind ced the ti es to do p t s ch p resent cl ss

au a v va u u na v a u a a .
Th e H ind schem e lso q ite omits the p ssi e

u a u a v .
77 The H in d first sixth fo rth

. d tenth cl sses form theu , ,
u , an a so
c lled first conj g tion of their scheme which corres p on d s exce p t

a u a , , as
reg r d s the tenth cl ss with

a secon d conj g tion The re m inder a ,
o ur u a . a
f the cl sses form the n ti es secon d conj g tion which grees ’

o a a v u a ,
a
i n the m in with first a o ur .
78 The cl sses then follows

. a are as
Fi rst
I
t“ ”M g
The t l ss ( second
I . d—cl ss f the H ind s ) ; its
r oo -c a or a a , o u
p resent ste m is coinci d ent w ith the root itself ; th s a g e d

‘ ’
-
t ; u , ,
ea
i g ,;
‘
51 d i s oh te ’
v ,
‘
a
’
.
I I The d p li c t i g cl ss ( thir d or h cl ss ) ; the root i

. re u a n a u- a s
re d p lic te d to form the p resent stem ; th s SIS j h fro m Vi?h

u a u ,
u u u,
‘
s crifice ; {3 1 d k? from Vd a gi e
a
’
ar ,
‘
v
’
.
I I I The s l l s ( se enth
. dh cl ss ) ;
na n s l extended
a c a s v o r ru -
a a a a ,
to the s yll ble [n ] in strong for m s i inserted before the fin l

a na a ,
s a
conson n t of the root ; th s ( i t dh ( or ( m n dh) fro m

a u ,
“
run
“
ru a
b inder
w dh ru ,
‘ ’
.
20 In trod ction u .
IV . a. Th e cl ss) ; the syll ble a

n u - clas i s (fifth or cu a a nu s
d ded to the root ; th s from V ress ‘ ’

a
£3
1
3 p u , su n u su , .
b A ery sm ll n mber f roots (only h lf d o en ) ending

. v a u o a -
a - z
a lre dy in a
a d lso one ery common d irreg l rly inflected
n, an a v an u a
root not ending (3’hr so dd 3 lone to form th , a it a e
p resent stem This-

is the eighth or t . cl ss f the H ind gr m an a o u a
m ri ns ; it is best r nked
a a b cl ss the cl ss ; th s 773 t a a s a su -
a , u- a u ,
a nu
fro m V “ t stretch an,

‘
.
’
V The a l ss ( ninth
. k i cl ss ) ; the s y ll ble WT t ( or
n c a or r a a no ,
in we k form s h i ) is dded to the root ; th s W T k i na (

a ,
7 n
'
a u , r or
afi qfi k i n)
i
‘
fro m Vafi kr i b y See note p 3 2 ’
r ,
‘
u
’
.
, . .
S ec ond Co nj uga ti on .
—
éd (A A /
é ,
The l ss or cc t d lp ( first
VI . a -
c abltz cl ss) ; , una en e a -
c ss or i - a
the dded cl ss sign i sim p ly ; d the root w hich be rs the

a a -
s a an ,
a
a ccent is strengthened by g n thro gho t if it be c p ble f

,
u a u u ,
a a o
t k ing g n (see 5 2
a u th s Ha bh ( thro gh the inter
a u ,
'
a va u
medi te st ge bhd ) from V i bhu be

a a -
a ,
‘
.
’
VI I The cl ss or cc t d cl ss ( sixth or t d cl ss) ;

. a
'
a , a en e a a u a
t h a d d cl ss sign is e in the rece di ng cl ss b t it h the as u as

g p a ; a a
-
.
,
a ccent d the n ccented root is not strengthened by g n ; th s

, an u a u a u ,
SS t d fro
u m V
fig t d
a thr
'
st u ,
‘
u .
’
VI I I The y l s ( fo rth or di cl ss ) ; y is
. d d e d to the
a c as u v- a a a
root w hich h the ccent ; th s fi a t di y from Vi i 1 d i ( by

, as a u ,
v a
-
v
the H in d s gi en Q 3 ; di ) p l y u v as v ,
‘
a .
’
I X The p ss i conj g tion is lso p ro p erly p resent s yste m

. a ve u a a a -
only h ing cl ss sign w hich is not exten d ed into the other

,
av a a -
systems ; tho gh it d iffers m rk e dly fro m the rem ining cl sses

u a a a
in h ing s p ecific me ning d in being for m ble from ll tr n

av a a ,
an a a a
s i ti erbs b t with endings of the m iddle oice only I t for m s

ve v ,
u v .
e nsi o n
Dec l .
83 The declension f s bst nti es d th t of djecti es cor

. o u a v an a a v
res p ond closely th t the t w cl sses f w ords m st be tre ted

so a o a o u a
together The p rono ns d n m er ls on the other h nd exhibit

. u an u a ,
a ,
here in the k in d red l ng ges m ny stri k ing p ec li rities

as a ua a u a .
84 N mb . d G d su There three n mbers sing l r

er s a n en er . are u ,
u a ,
d l ua ,
d pl r l ;
an d the s l three gen d ers m sc line feminine
u a an u ua ,
a u , ,
an d ne ter The d l is se d m ch more extensi ely th n in

u . ua u u v a
Greek where it p p e rs in m orib n d st te

,
a a a u a .
85 C s s The c ses
. a e eight in n mber gi en gener lly in the
. a are u ,
v a
following or d er nomin ti e cc s ti e instr ment l d ti e b l ti e

: a v ,
a u a v ,
u a ,
a v ,
a a v ,
geniti e loc ti e d oc ti e The o bject so ght in the rr nge

v ,
a v ,
an v a v . u a a
m ent is sim p ly to t next to nother those c ses w hich

se one a a are
to gre ter less extent in

a a or n m b er nother i d ntic l in ,
one u or a ,
e a
form ; d p tting the no m in ti e first

an ,
u le d ing c se there is a v ,
as a a ,
no other or d er by w hich th t object co l d be tt ine d a u a a .
F the
or ses of the c ses in udet il see W h 2 6 7 — 305 a a . .
8 6 The ste m s of s bst nti es

. d djecti es m y f con enience
u a v an a v a or v
be cl ssifie d follo w s I Stems in 3 1 I L S t m in { i d 3

a as : . a . e s an u .
I I I Stems in a n d Q i d m n n mel y A r d ic l stems

l
d
‘
.
, ,
an : a ,
. a a , an a
few others inflecte d li k e them ; B d eri ti e stems I V Ste m s in . va v . .
23 r ( a t
or ) V Stems in O or t. . c n so n a n s .
87 St .
g d w k c s s r on I stems ending i n conson nts
an ea a e . n a ,
an d those in a r ( or 3 1
K ) there is seen d istinction f stem ar ,
a o
form in d i ff erent c ses Sometimes the stem forms a .t w o w hen -

are ,
they c lled strong d we k resp ecti el y ; sometimes three

are a an a v :
strong mi ddle d we k est As is the c se w ith erbs this ri tion

, ,
an a . a v ,
va a
o f stem form often goes h nd i h n d with

-
shift f ccent a -
n- a a o a .
88 I the m sc line d feminine the strong c ses

. n a u the an ,
a are
no m . d an both sing d d l d the m p l The rest

a cc , . . an ua ,
an no . .
I ntrod ction u . 23
a re we k ; or if ther be the distinction f three stem forms then

a ,
e o -
,
the instr d t b l g .
, d l sing the gen d loc d
a .
, a .
, en .
, an oc . .
,
. an . a .
,
an d the gen p l ( llof which t k e e dings beginning w ith

. . owel )a a n a v ,
are we k est ; d the instr d t d b] d the instr d t b l

a an .
, a .
,
an a . u .
,
.
,
a .
,
a .
,
an d loc p l ( w hose endings begin with conson nts )

. . mi ddle a ,
are .
89 I the e ter the onl y strong c ses

. n the nom d n u ,
a a re . an
a cc p l
.
; if there be. the t i p le distinction t hen the w d r ,
no . an a cc .
sing . mi ddle
are d the s m e c ses i n the d l we k est
, an a a ua are a .
Otherwise t h c ses cl ssified in the m c line

e a are a as as u .
9 0 C se di g s
. The norm l scheme of c se endings
a -e n n . a a -
,
as
r ecogni e d b y the n ti e gr mm ri ns ( d con eniently to be

z a v a a a an v
a ss m ed the b sis of s p eci l descri p tions) i this

u as a a , s
Sing l r D l Pl r l u a ua u a
m f n m f m f .n . . . . n . . . .
N m a s u as
A m . d a u as
I d bhyd m bhi s
D
’
e bhya m bhya s
Ab . as bhya m bhya s
G . as as am
L . i as su
p p lies entire to conson nt stems

It a d to the r d ic l d i ision a an a a v
-
,
of i d u stems ;
an d to other owel stems with consi d er ble
-
un v -
, a
vari tions d modific tions The en d ings which h e lmost

a an a . av a or
q ite nbrok en r nge thro gh stems of ll cl sses

u u bhya m da , u a a ,
are an
08 of the d l d bhi bhy a m d ua f the p l r l

,
an s, a s, ,
an su o u a .
91 P d di g s
. The c se en dings bhya m bhi bhy
a a -e n d n . a -
, e, a s, an
cu i e those of the mid dle c ses

. . c lled p d a are a a a
endings The tre tment of stem fi l be fore the m is gener lly the
. a -
na s a
sam in the co m bin tions f w d with

e as nother a o or s one a .
24 Lesso n I .
L e sso n I .
92 . Ve r b s c t d ls A
. P r e se n t I n d i c a t i ve a c t i ve . Un a c en e a -
c a s.
n m ber f roots co j g ted in this cl ss h e m e di l short i t

u o n u a a av a a .
I n sm ch 31 is its own g n these roots merely dd a

“ ” “
a u as a u a , a an a
to form the p resent stem ; e g Hg d p resent stem 3 g d -

. .
,
va ,
-
va
'
a .
The fin l 3 1 of the ste m is lengthene d in the three first p ersons

a a .
Sing . D l ua . Pl r l u a .
W m
'
W
’ ’
I . va da m i E va d a va s va dd m a s
W m m
'
vd da
'
2 . va da si th a s va da th a
W W “ f
’ ’
vd d a ta
'
3 va a a ti i n va d a n ti
.
s
The ending f the 3 d p l r is p ro p erly wfi fl ti ; it s ff ers
93 . o r u . an u
a bbre i tion ho w e er by the loss f i t 5 : in erbs w hose stem

v a , v , o s
“
a ,
v
en d s in a a .
9 4 As h y .syll ble ending

a i ea v t t b g n te d a n a c o n so n a n ca n n o e u a ,
a root li k e Gh q j i m kes its 3 d sing Gfi a fi t j i ti ; fi g i d v a r . va

“
n n
m kes fi fi i d li etc See 53

a
g t n n a , . .
95 E pho i c . l At the d f w ord st n ding i n the

u n r u e. en o a a
fin l p osition of sentence or lone Q

a d 1a
: l w y s become ,
a ,
“
s an r a a
i
v sa rg h ; d g
a e ner lly lso before
an
i k
g I h q p q ; p h ad a , c , , ,
an
before sibil nts [i t p i t Q a w hether these st n d in the s me ,

s, a a
w or d ,
initi l in the following word ; e g a 3 m B rg
or as a . . e
va d t p a as becomes l w s
y 33
un a r 71 :
H a : d t h p h a a va a a un a .
96 Fo c f th p
. s t The p resent in d ic ti e signifie
r e o e r e en ,
a v s
1 Present time 2 I m m e d i te f t rity 3 P st time in li ely

‘
. . . a u u . . . a ,
v
na rr tion ( historic l
a
“
a
Vo ca b l
ary 1 u .
Ve r b s t o b e j
c on u g a t e d lik e H
g va d
fl ca r ( intr ) go w
. nder gr e , a ,
az f ll ; fly
“I t p a t a .
M 7T (
r f o r m , c o m m i t. a i l y j s crifice ( éZ y o
I
p e a a c . a cc. p er s . ci s fi /t
x
m li e i
j v v . i n str . r ei ) .
m ty j le e b ndon rotect ’ [
g ll w
W hs p
a é w : éL o I C C- M
av
,
a a . ra .
a
/
\
d h b rn d sp e k
{g a u Hg.
y va a ,
sa .
m dh a v run fl i t dwell
.
“
va s .
W m na
( intr ) b w bend on e s a ? .b ( t ) c rry
o be r ;,( int ’
ca r. a , a r .
self ; (t ) honor re erence

r . fl w blow p roceed,
v . o , , .
tfi
tp cook
ac g in: p p
. n r ise a s a .
Adver b s and
hence
whence ? m ka th a m h o w ?
m ku ta s
why ? 1 ka d a when ?
“
W 1 a d hu n d now
m ta d d then ya da when if ,
we: a dya to -
da y
‘
qé a
'
sa rva tr a e eryw here m

v sa da alwy a s
m a va th s
m so , u
{ fi r a t so , t h us a tu b u t , howe er v
V! eva j st x ctly
u , e a a
“
ca (p p
o s t o s .
) -
qu e
m p un a r
g i
a ; b a n ut
Lesson I . II .
Ex erc ise 1 .
wa s hm a a l m vg w t a l wa w fi n s l ww
( fi t fi t ls l n a m v m vn v n u l m a in tai n e r a s
‘
a v n
e ue lg az un f e t t m fu wa u le lgu z va m zm o u
la
f i fi t m a m a z t as le é a ai ra fi n n qs u
’
-
ee u t aa i ga e
e n aa
y 15 .
*
To d
g Al w y s
a I
1
th y b n d on
e a a
”
. 16 . No w 1
ye o
2
. 17 . a
1
p t t
ro ec1 8 W t w bow g in
a
.19 W hither r nnest
. t h ? e o
1
a a
”
. .
1
u
2
ou
20 W s crifice 2 1 Th y tw coo k 22 Y b ndon 23 H ‘
. e a . . e o . . e a a . . e
b rns 24 N w w li e 25 Y tw p r ise 26 W h y d y
u . . o
1
e v
2
. . e o a . .
2
o e
hend ? 27 There th y fly 28 W here d y dwel l ?

l
.
1
e
2
. .
1
o e
2
L e ss o n II .
cc t d cl ss
97 . t d R oots
Ve r b s
f this cl ss
. U na en e a a , c on
’
. o a
which bd in o w el d conson nt roots not forming he y

e a v ,
a n a -
av
s yll bles a g n te their owels in forming their p resent stems ; u a v -
e g fi f j i d fl t form a j d a m ?g d
. .
,
d l bhu form
an
i
a e an
’
“ “
ru an
ith the cl ss sign a

98 . W fin l a -
a , a a the g n te d root
I! e of u a
unites to form we: y see § I5 9 ; a a HT with W

so “
becomes 0 a
an ; W I w ith
a va i s] y iel d s W I ar a Th s f a j i 3 d sing
a ra . u , ,
r .
W fi j Ra fi? bh a v a ti g m
' ’
31 M a
’
ti ; m ti
ya g sin s
:
a -
a ra .
99 R oots in conson nts bu dh 3 d sing m bddh ti ;

. a :
g l e ,
r . a
fa a fi afi j fifa
' '
ci t, c e ta ti ; ti
’
-
a
31 vys, va r sa .
The s p erior fig res in dic te the p osition i n the S ns k rit

u u a a
sentence f eq i lents f the w or d s so d esign te d By this in d i

o u va or a .
c tion is oi d e d the necessity f p p l y ing e p honic r les w hic h

a av o a u u
h e t y t been st te d The ord er of w ord s in S ns k rit is ery

av no e a . a v
free d r rely infl ences the me ning of the sentence F rom the
,
a n a u a .
fig res the n mber f w or d s req ired in the S ns k rit sent ence w il l

u u o u a
re dily be seen W ords in I t lics

a not to be tr nsl te d . a a re a a .
Lesson II . 27
100 . The roots I nt g a in a nd

m ya m ma ke the p resent stems -
” (7 K
'
d h ed
W W
’
g a c c h a an ya c c a .
10 1 . The root Hg sa d, ‘
si t
’
,
m ak es the p resen t ste m -
m s i da .
The root 33 g hi d e m k es V T
E ?! g i h ti u h,
‘ ’
,
a i
‘
a .
102 Se er l roots in fin l 3 “ a for m their p resent ste m by

. v a a -
a
p ec li r p rocess f re d p l ic tion ; th s Q T th a 3 d sing f a g fi i

u a o u a u ,
s ,
r .
f qa fi r p zba ti ; m fa a fi r j ig/
‘
“
t i s th a ti h
' ' “
; tn p d g r a i r a te .
103 . Ma sc uline s an d N e u t er s in a a .
a. M a sc u liu e s :
2 3 d ev a ,
‘
g o d ’
. d o
Sing l r u a . D l ua . Pl r l u a .
2m
3
a“ d ev a s
2 3 i d e va u d eva s
b . Ne ters u : t fia
'
p h a l
a ,
‘
fr itu
’
.
N m .
p h a l
a m m3lp ha le ( a
'
i ) W p h a l
a n i
A cc .
Vo c .
ma h
p al
a
As r le the gr mm ri ns d a u t llow ,
h to st nd in a a a o no a c a
th t form fter
a owel b t req ire it to be do bled becoming
a a v ,
u u u ,
3 ; h ce An s p ir te is do ble d by p fi i g the corres p on ding

. a a u re x n
a n d as p i t e C f § 16 5 ra
-
. . .
The dent l sibil a nt E is ch nge d to the ling l EL s if a 5 .

a ua
”
i m m di t l
N
’
e
“ g d
a ed b y g ny Q W £ l g 3 ! ce d 3 11 a oreb y -ll ,
V
-
fi
sa ve a an , _
k or T
M
i nless the {i b !
g f i l folluo w e d b n Th s s na o r r u
—
,
.
‘ fl h fl '“
W “ ,
g .
fi tm f a t i th ti becomes fi g fi js ti th
a t-
i the cb n g e f V th to - s a a o
3 i h p rocess of ssimil a tion w ill b ex p l ine d belo w ) So a a e a .
wfi rg g i becomes Wm g i s ; d $1 3 3 1 dh
a n - cu
d becomes a n u an a n u s-
W dh a n u sa .
The n s li tion f the lter nt owel a in other wor ds its

a za o a a v ,
or ,
bein g follo w ed by a d oes not p re ent its ltering e ff ect p on a n u sv ra ,

v a u
the si bil nt ; th s fi fi k i hsi And the lter tion t k es p l ce

a u ,
ue . a a a a
in the initi l f e d ing fter the fin l { f stem whether

a o an n a a 8 o a ,
the l tter be reg r d ed

a lso ch nge d to 1 s con erte d into a as a a or as v
i g ; th s W
v sa r
h a vi s -
h is s
a
cu .
{ fa z
g h ui h inste
,
d of m av -
u or av -
su a
Lesson II .
10 4c s s 1 The nomin ti e is
. F o r ce bj t of a e . . a v c a sus su ec i vu s .
2 The cc s ti e is
. bj ti
a d enoting chiefly the ne rer
u a v c a su s o ec vu s , a or
direct so m etimes ho w e er the m ore remote object ; so m etimes lso

,
v , a
the t m i d q m
er d e x tent f ti m e
n us a d s p ce ue ,
an o an a .
10 5 E ph i c c m bi ti
. f w ls u on o na on o vo e .
1 El or t“ d + w or W = 3 fli e g m a fi l g td p i
. a i . .
‘
a a
rfi g
’
t a i
‘
a ra z a
p .
2 .
W or w + { i or
i i z
u ef
3 . 31 or u or a n z
zfi o. e g . .
WET PE R -
u ta
“fl ?! g a to ta
’
.
4 .
g m
“
an + $ r a g ar . e g
. .
W m a ha w : rsi h
wg fi i : m a h a r si h .
5 .
“
at or an + u e or ? ai =
'
fi at . e g i lfl T—
.
—
j QH .
' ‘
fl fi a g a ta i
’
va .
6 .
W or a n lfi - -
o or fi au = 3 fi an . e .
g .
m
fir -
t af mfi x
fl fi qfi lt g a td u sa dh i h
’
o sa dh i h z .
will be the p r ctice e ery w here i this work to

10 6 . It a v n
se p r te in d e p en d ent wor d s in tr nsliter tion b t not in the d

a a a a ,
u eva
nag i text ;
ar d if initi l o w el f f ollo w ing wor d h
an an a v o a as
co lesced with fin l of the p receding t i will be in d ic ted

a
h a a , s a
by p ostro
an p he single a if the i i t i l owel be the shorter n a v
,
do b le if it be the longer of the two di ff erent initi ls which i n

u , a
e ery c se f co m bin tion yield the s me res lt To i d the b

v a o a a u . a e
ginner p oint ,
wil l sometimes
a be p l ce d i the d ag i a , n ev a n ar ,
un d er long owel formed by t w co lescing owels ; th s a fi

a v o a v u ,
“
fim agn i n cz W h a m
’
flT .
Vo ca b l
a ry l
l u .
Ve r b s , a cl ss a f erj t ( tr . and intr ) con q er win . u ,

.
m g a m ( g a
'
c c h a
) go
ti .
g dr u run .
I 4,0 a
‘
m h a (j igh ti ) s m ell fi ni le d g ide

‘
g r r a . o a ,
u .
Lesson II I .
L e sso n III .
107 . cl ss Roots of this cl ss form their

Ve r bs . Ac c e n t e d d -
a . a
p resent ste m b y d
-
d ing ccented w to the root w
a hich i not an a a
'
, s
g n ted The inflection of these stems is p recisel y li k e th t f

u a . a o
stems belonging to the p receding cl ss excep t t the p osition a ,

,
as o
f the ccent ; th s fi l ksi p p resent ste m fa n ksip d p res ind

o a
l
-
u , , , . .
f fl m fi q k ip m i f i mfq k ip i fi qfi k ip ti etc
‘
' '
'
s a ,
s as ,
s a ,
.
/
108 Se er l roots i a; of this cl ss ( by the Hi n d s w i tt n
v a n r a u r e
fl
.
y
fi
w ith a ; ) form stems i n { T i ; e g 3 5 k stre w f qfl ffi k i d ti

r ra . .
”
r,
’
,
‘
r .
C C
The roots in t i d 3 d a ch nge t hose o w els into an

‘
u an
“
u a v
“ j g d
W an res p ecti el y before the cl ss sign
u v,
; th s f fl ksi v ,
a -
u , ,
r
M fi di m,
m
'
3 ksi yd ti ; dh u va ti
’
§ g a lsa va ti
‘
a
-
su , .
10 9 the root { E i s d esire { Q i h is reg rd ed

. F or ,
‘ ’
,
c a as a
s bstit te in the p resent stem ; th s ( i f? i h ti 100 note)

u u - u ,
cc a
'
.
Li k ewise a; 7 m k es its p resent W f d r k ti

, d It p
? h
a
‘
cc a
’
an rac ,
so m etimes gi en Q M m k es fi f a p r b ti v as , a
‘
cc a
'
110 A n m b er f roots follo w ing this cl ss

. u strengthened o a a re
i n the p resent by p en ltim te n s l ; th s m i p resent ind a u a a a u

,
s c, .
fa g fi t i ii d ti The n s l is l w ys ssimil te d in cl ss to the

-
s c . a a a a a a a
following conso nt ; th s EL sed before p l t ls na befor u

”
72 1 8 u a a a ,
it e
dent ls R m before l bi ls ; d A i b efore si b il nts d g k

a , a a an t a an .
I II M s li s d N t s i 31 o t d ’
. a cu ne an e u er n a, c n .
M sc lines a. a u
S ng l r i D l u a .Pl r l ua . u a .
d d bhyd m a
I ?! d
m d ii
‘
a e ven a ev evc s
D
3 3 1 ]
1 d o c o yo
g m d evebhya s
b. Ne ters follo w ex ctl y the declension of m sc lines in the

u a a u
abo e c ses ; th s W p h l W EI p h ld y etc

v a u , a en a , a a, .
Lesson III .
31
112 . The instr ment l nswers the q estions

F or ce o f c a se s. 1 . u a a u
wherewith ? d whereby ? d exp resses cco m p niment gent

an an a a ,
a ,
or m e ns 2 The d ti e d enotes the remoter object

a . . d directiona v ,
a n .
I t is lso sed a d ti m m di ;
u ery fre q ently lso to denote
as a vu s c o o v u a
end p rp ose Sometimes ( d oftenest with co p l omitte d)

or u . an u a
i t is p redic ti e i n the sense f m kes for tends tow rd 3 The

a v , o
‘
a , a
’
. .
a bl ti e nswers the q estion wh en ce ? d ery freq e tly d e otes

a v a u an v u n n
c se 4 The geniti e is
au . .
j
l ti denoting ll kinds f v c a sus a a ec
-
vu s, a o
belo ging ( e g g
n bj ti bj ti p. t i ti.
) 5 The
en L . su ec va s , o ec o n s, ar vu s . . O
c ti e d enotes the p l ce
a v y h ction occ rsa v en ,
an a u .
I t is often sed b sol utel y in greement w ith a p rtic ip le ex p ressed

u a ,
a a
or nderstoo d
u the bl ti e is sed in L ti ,
d the geniti e
as a a v u a n an v
in Greek .
Voca b l
a ry u m .
s fa ? -
( cla s si c si i i c a
'
ti ) dri p dro p ; ,
i n
n
1
- 9
E i s ( i h ti ) wish desire moisten

'
{ L cc a
,
. .
fl krs ( krsd ti) p lo g h

g t
i g j ( r j d t ) l t ug ; cre te
. s
'
s i e o a .
m ksip (ksip d ti) h rl c st “ ( d t i ) to ch ( i cert in “
a
! c s u
p r ; u ,
a ,
n a
throw . connections ) w sh a .
di p (di cd ti ) show p oint l ss

fi m
r t ou a c a
-
.
,
WQ P W h (p r t i ti) k k bo t
213 m” ac( g fih ti l
01 ) hide
as ,
conce l
as a u : a . , a .
a m fa} ! i e ( i cd ti) enter

v fig
v d ( i d t i 10 1) i t . sa s o , s .
S u b st ant a sc . W h a sta h nd
a .
W ka ta m a t .
N ea t :
3 7
16 s p e r
ku n t a a . field ksetr a .
m bd l child boy a, ,
.
W d h m oney riches ana , .
a n ) m d g ro d w y street 15 79 1 p lo gh
r a a ,
a ,
.
m 7 0 “ u .
fi t ?“ m gh clo d e a u . fi n i s p oison v a .
at p rro w
a ra a .
W sa hba f o r tu n e , lu c k , h a p p i n ess .
Lesson I II . IV .
Ex erci se Il
l .
W fit fi g la t w m fi tfl m zt s t m flfi
fi W ls l
’
*
W m i l8 l
m fi% f fl a fi1
ga z ltn m f u a fa fi a z t é t ls
w a fim e la fi mz t fi zm
’ ’‘
zt a fasa zt t ta a s ao u
The boy s k s the m

15 . b t the ro d ( m ) 1 6 The
4
a en
1
a ou a
2
a . .
clo ds dro p w ter

u
1
the fi ld (l ) 4
The tw m g
a
3
on e s
2
ea . o en
1
o
4
by tw ro ds ( i t ) i t the city The king gi es the tw

2 3 4 ?
18
’
o a ns r . n o . . v o
m enm y
1
1 9 The m n s sons
on e
z
i t . m t
s
20 T h g.d a
’ 1 2
s
4
on a s . . e
‘
o s
4
gi e the w ter of the l d 21 W w sh ( 3 13 1) b th

v
3
a
2
c ou s
l
. . e a
3
u se o
h nds wi th w t
a
2
22 B th m le d th i sons ( d l) hom
a er
l
. . o en
1
a
4
e r
2
ua e
3
23 The tw boys p oint t t h ro d t th city

3 4 2 1
.
(g )
mo ou e a o e e .
L e sso n IV .
113 . Ma s culi n es in t i .
wfi l
'
a ym ,
‘
‘
fire ’
S i n g u la i '
. D l ua . Pl r l u a .
D . i n ? “ 72
9 23 ? n
A fi g a gn e
s M h e
G W m a g n yo s
See ote to 102 n .
The dent l n s l t
when i m m edi tely followed by owel
a a a i i t, a a v
,
or by F l; a m
Q g a is
71 o r t rned into the ling l or
“
or v
,
u ua
“l if p receded
n the s m e word by the lin g l sibil nt semi
in a ua a or
vo wel o wel i by EL s g fi g r
or v
a fs d th i s t . c. ,
‘
r, ,
or
“
: an ,
no
Lesson IV .
114 . s
N e ut er in 5 .
W va r i ,
‘
w ter
a
’
Sing l r u a . D l ua . Pl r l
u a .
N . érr
‘
rt c d ri a r ft fi
m va r i n i
m c ar i n i
A . 77 77 n
I .
m u d r i nd
“
f m rq
a l
‘ ' ‘
vd r i bhyd m a TrTfi i q va r i bhi s
D .
a i fi v a r i ne n
m v a r i bh a s
y
Ab m . va r i n a s
G . n n Q Tfi
‘ '
m va r i na m
L fi rm va r i ni
m v ci r i su
‘
ua zu
g
u
115e ter djecti es in t i

. M sc u ldeclined li k e
in e and n u a v are
the s bst nti es bo e B t ne ter djecti es ( ne er s bst nti es )

u a v a v . u u a v v u a v
m y in the d t
a b] g
, d loc si n g d the gen
a d 1. a
w “
. en ., an .
, an . an 0 0 .
d l s bstit te the corres p on d ing forms f m sc lines

ua ,
u u o a u .
116 E p h ic h g s f q . d u These t w so nds

on c an e o s an r . o u
st nd to e ch other in the p r ctic l rel tion i t l m bi ti

a a a a a ,
n ex er n a co na on ,
o f r e p di g
co r d d son nt in co ntless c ses a becomes
r s on n /
su “
an a : u a 8
in sit tions q g f oring the occ rrence f son nt ;

r ua re u lr ln or av u o a a
an d less often ,
becomes K w here s rd is req ired I ,
r s a u u . n
intern l combin tion the two a f less interch nge ble The a a re ar a a . s
is extremel y common ety mologic l fin l the not common as an a a ,

r .
117 A F in l Q 1 Before. son nt either o w el or conso

. a s . . a a ,
v
n nt (exce p t I
a belo w ) a is ch nged to the son nt f r se e ,
s a a
“
nless in d eed it be p rece ded by w or a n a th s m

u , ,
a ,
u ,
onl y if the ltering letter st nds immedi tel y before th m l b t

a a a e a sa
,
u
at w h te er d t before the l tter t m y be fo n d nless

a v 1s a n c e a 1 a u : u ln
,
d ee d there inter ene l t l ( exce p t a y) ling l dent l v a a a , a ua , or a a .
r h s vw i n
3 m m p ep
‘
mm
’
u
g e , m g 1 d m na are a ar en a u
See p receding note .
P e r r y, S k i P im
ans r t r er .
34 Lesson IV .
E ra a
g n i s a tr a becomes wfi qfi o ga i r a tr a ; m {g fi l a n is
g
d a h a ti becomes W ?! g i d h ti See lso 9 5 a n r a a . a .
118 2 F in l W befor e y son nt conson nt

. . befora a s, an a a or e
initi l short 3 1 is ch nged t a ft

a d the initi l 5 ! is a , a o 0 an a
"
d ro p p e d ; th s t“ W E gp j t i beco m es h m "
i 7
1t
“
u nr as a
g a n o
'
, gp
j ti
m h ‘
a ga nr
p s a t
3 t $3 tr a
'
a r a nz o
p .
is the p r ctice in
119 . s ystem f t lit ti t ren d er
It a o ur o ra ns er a on o
the sign 8 w hich d enotes this dro p p ing of initi l 3 ! by

. an a a, a n
in erted co m m li k e the ro gh b th i g‘f p rinte d G reek texts

v a, u rea n .
12 0 3 B efore y initi l
. o w el other th
. n short a fin l an a v a a ,
a
Q R
“
loses its q becoming sim p le 3 1

as d the hi t s th s s, a ,
an a u u
occ sione d rem ins ; th s 3 “ Ta ft? rp i h ti b ecomes 3111

a a u ,
n as cc a
M a nr
p a i cc h a ti W W t a ta s u d a ka m an W ta ta
in l m a before y son nt w hether o w el

12 1 . 4 . F a s an a ,
v or
conson nt loses its a b ecoming sim p ly m a ; d the hi t s

a ,
s, an a u
th s occ sioned rem ins ; th s Et n a { fi rm gp a i h ti T IT

u a a u ,
n
‘
s cc an
{fi f a i c c h a n ti ;
m fifl j ma fi a
-
p as a ya n ti
afl
i t“
' ‘
ec l nfp nr
nr
p a j a ya n ti .
B F in l g 1 F in l I i n gener l sho w s the s me

12 2 . . a
‘
r . . a r a a
form w hich E; w o l d exhibit nder the s me con ditions th s 8 u u a : u
W p
g
st n d ing t the
un a r d of sentence becomes 3 3 1! p
a h ; a en a un a
Jfi
‘
g g i
‘
7 h : g i b B t mr, i d fi lg fter s: i n a . u
w
n
fi -_ m
na
m
‘
m
r, a i a or ,
m int ins itself b efore

a a o w els d son nt conson nts ; th s W v an a a u ,
p un a r a tr a ,
W W p un a r
j a
g tia .
do ble
12 3 is nowhere d mit t e d if s ch w o l d
. 2 . A u r a : u u
occ r e ither b y retention f origin l I

u ,
b y con ersion of a o an a r or v s
to I the first I is omitted d the p rece ding o w el if short

r, r ,
an v
, ,
is m d e long b y com p ens tion ; th s m m : p

a am h a u , un a r r a
a ?”
( m a r a ma h; i f “ fi afi a gn i s r o c a te Wt fi flfi
“
T
“ ‘
p u n
w fii fi fi
’
ni te fi afi dh eu n e r o c a te dh en u r e c a te
'
a r e ca
g .
Lesson IV .
Voc a b l
a ry IV u .
V er b s fig ( ) gro w ruh r o h a ti
’
hr t ( k ff m sme r {i gf p i i g
‘ ‘‘
’
r n t a ti ) cu t ,
t cu l
i p ( l
iomp d t ) . i a .
Hi mu c ( m u ri c d ti)
’
free d eli er m [ p (l mp ti) bre k to p ieces

,
v , flw u u a
'
a W w w
m
,
h
,
rele se a . d e st te p l nder
m
é va a , u .
u ‘
S b st u . :
fire ; ( p ro p er t nfm p a ni m
m
5
wfi q g i , m i gZ 2
W J 7
a n .
, T as ,
.
, / 1
n me) A gni the g o d of fire W p ap
a i , . a , n .
, s n .
y r -
a
A J a ft m enemy
a r z, (.m a
,
m m m p n m e of .
“
r a , .
,
no . r .
, a
W s i f t; i m as s w ord ,
. hero
,
. a .
a f: r t i m seers ,
i .
fi h m tree W . or sa ,
.
, . M
do o r mo és
i m fi h i m acp oet ( W ? )
F a e p i m m p n m e of M ”
ca ,
.
, no . r. a
fi f t g i m mo n t in
i god
‘
r r ,
.
,
u a . a .
; ( p 1 ) p eo p le tr th righteo sness
'
w w St lj m m
'
GVO S
Y g c ana ,
.
,
an . . u , u .
g ig d hkh u misery m i g fi
a , h i m mn p . n ,me f , s ar ,
.
,
no . r .
,
a o
fort ne u .
g d a o .
Ex erc ise IV .
W 3 ?" “ W W m fi
W ! “ a m z la l
W m i fifi fi fa la lwfi f w w m g a fi la l w
’
Efi m lt m w m la l a a m
W a te r m a w m t t t qm fi rfi fi sfi m e t w :
m m m
i
ga t fi rs a n ao u a ft : fi a l
W <§ 23 )
l v fi1 W I R I ‘
M a
a
l wi -
51m
m i sa l sfi
‘ ‘
m m z n qs n
d w ells in the m
15 . (Ji m 1 6 B th enemies h rl
1 3
o u n ta i n s
g
. . o
1
u
4
s p e rs t the k ing (d t ) 1 7 Ra m to ches hi t w sons wi th

a
2
a
3
a . . a
1
u
4
s o
3
his b nd 18 a F ire b rns the trees

e
z
19 Seers s p e k the
. .
1
u
3 2
. .
1
a
2
tr th 20 Th gh righteo sness h p p iness rises (I i ) for m

u
3
. . r ou u
1
a
3
a
4
an
Modifiers gener lly p recede the word which is m odified a .
*
3
36 Lesson IV V . .
kin d 2
The seer s tw h nds to ch w ter
g en . 21 .
’ 1
o a
2
u
4
a
3
.
F r its the trees 23 Peo p le remember

1 3 2 1 3
22 .
( fi t) u a re u se on . .
Ha ri 24 Ram h rls the swor d fro m hi h n d

2
. .
'
a
1
u
4 3
s a
2
L e ss o n V .
s U cc te d g cl ss Roots of t h i cl ss for m
12 4 . Ve r b . na en a -
a . s a
their p resent stem b y dding 21 g to the root which be rs the

-
a a ,
a
a ccent Th s from 7 1? h is m de the p resent stem W d hg ;

. u na a -
n a
f ro m a l bh 1 1 2: l
ubhy
pt 3 a ,
a.
125 The inflection f ste m s of this cl ss follows the mo d el of

. o a
fig va d .
12 6 . ert in
roots bec se of their p ec li r exch nges
C a
“
i n d- , au u a a
w ith { i d i i form s es p eci ll y in the form tio n of the p resent

an
I
“
-
,
a a
stem ,
gi en by the H ind gr mm ri ns en d ing in Q or
a re v u a a a as
”
i (i i 3 h (cf
or d by them ssigned
0 to the 3 1 bh.a or an a ,
a cl ss Th s tan dh a s ck ( Hin d Q dh ) for m s n dhdg ti ;

-
a . u ,
‘
u
’
u e , a
t h e root { hi or 3 T h ( H in d 3 h ) for m s m h g ti ;t va u ve .
va
’
a
m g d (H in d fi g a i ) m k es WW fi t g dy ti u a -
a .
12 7 F the root g ald y

. is s bstit ted in the p resent
or r ,
‘
se e
’
,
u u
system nother root W p p w hich m kes W 3 p cg ti

a a ,
a
’
a a .
12 8 M s li s i 3 11 bh a n ‘ ’
3
‘
B . a cu ne n u. nu, su .
Sing l r D l u a Pl r l
. ua . u a .
N W . bh a
m bh a u ar m arr bh a
n us n
-
n a va s
A W bh a m
.
“r if t bb a a
nu p n n
I m g u bh a n u n a “1 3 1 m bh d n u bhyd m bh d n u bhi s
“
.
rc
D m . bh d n a c e mm bh a n u bbga s
Ab .
m bh d n o s
s —
IT bh anu , m
fl”
“ u ‘ ‘
i w w fiw w
Su b t T
f! su n
t '
. .
,
ff fi i fi f éffi
‘
3 1a a nnafoo d fo dder ,
n .
, ,
. W M ) q rm m a ni
‘ ' ’
,
m je w el .
,
.
70 9 J a m a al .
w e m
a horse va ,
.
,
.
“
( at r a tn a ,
n jewel
.
,
.
m d dh i m oce
u n a ,
.
, a .
U fa r a gi ,
m he p . a
XH /
.
W 4
te cher p
A t st r i
w i n d la w
,
m m
'
H Q g ur u , .
,
a .
3 1g va u,
y .
,
a /H Z I /L -
qa p tt a le f letter
ra ,
n .
, a , .
fw vi snu , m .
,
n om .
p r. n m e of
a
11
W p a ra eu , m .
, a xe . a god .
m p d d a
,
m .
,
foot ; q rter ; ua £3 a t
p ru ,
m .
,
enemy .
ra
y, be m a .
fm t ci kh a r a , m s mmit
.
,
u .
i ”
f
fl
fi fl
g mg ba h u , m .
, arm .
m ci sga , m .
, p p ilu chol r , s a .
bi n d u , m .
, d ro p .
$3 sukt a ,
n .
, V e d ic h y mn .
Ex ercise V .
a ffi r m ffi q fi t m s l m u m m fi a fi
ufi a m sl
{m fi fi gfi l fi g fi fl t au t m m m “ i f? ! a m ?
'
f?m s fi fi m m n fi n a m
i fl z la l z z n q c u
Now the s n s r ys clim b the mo nt ins 20 A d ro p
19 .
4
u
’ 1
a
2 5
u a
3
. .
2
f w ter f lls d w f m the clo d w e see

1 “ 3 I 2 4
o a 21 O
a m o n ro u . . en ,
the c ity 22 B th k ings lo e p oets (g

3
. 23 The
. o
1
v
3 2
en . or .
win d blo w s (a ?) f m the s mmits of the mo nt ins 24 The

1 4
ro u
3
u a
?
.
king h rls s p e rs t hi enemies ( d t

1
u
“
25 The schol r a
3
a s
?
o . or . a
l
b ews b f hi te cher
3
e or e 2 6 Tw m n come wi th th i s a
?
. o e
1 3
e r
sons (i ti ) 27 The tw kings d esire the p o et s je w els ( d t

2
ns z . . o
1 " ’ 2 3
a .
28 O seer we t Vi sn The1 2 4 3
or ifi .
( ) 2 9 t w , sa c r ce o u a ce . . o
O rthodox H in d s m int in th t the V edic were u a a a
r e led to their rep ted thors w ho th s w them

ev a u au , u
‘
sa
’
.
Lesson V . VI . 39
coo k food wi th fi 3
3 0 The seers p r ise
1
re
2
. .
1
a
4
Vi s n u g
wi th hy m ns 3
31 I the city the king c lls hi enemies

. n
1 2
a
4
s
3
L e sso n VI .
I3 l Ve r b
. s y cl ss
The roots f this cl ss which d
. a -
a , c o n t
’
d . o a en
W m a W in forming their
lengthen their p resent stem ; th s a -
u ,
HR t m W t fi
a m y ti ;,H R b h m m fi I bh m y ti — b t athis ro ,
-
rc
i
’
a u
l st m k es some for m s w ith short 3 !

a a The root Hg m d h a . a as
the s me lengthening m a fi t m ddy ti

a : a .
I3 2 C ert in d roots ( fi . b y the H ind s w ritten with fin l )

a -
ve u a 0
m k e p resent stems with ccente d y ; th s { 1 dd Q fi t dy ti ' ’
a -
an a a u , ,
a .
I3 S The root W y dh is bbre i ted to f a i l i dh in the

. v a a v a v
p resent s ystem f a t a
-
f a i dh y li : c a .
I3 4 The root am; k m s id by the n ti es to form its

. ra , a a v
p resent stem ccor d ing

- to this cl ssa re lly forms it only ccor d ing a , a a
to the cl ss d the root o w el is lengthened in the cti e oice

a -
a ,
a n - v a v v ,
b t not in the mi dd le ; th s m
u k i m ti : b t mid d le u ,
rc a ,
u
kr a m a te
'
I3 5 . The root Em; ca m , u sed only with the p rep osition WT d ,
forms W f tfi f d c ém a t i .
r
36
l . N eu te r s i n 3 u . ma d/
m ,
‘
honey
N .
Hg
“
m a dhu
W fi
‘
i
‘
m a d hu n i Ra f ?m a d/
i (m
g
I 1 m a d/ m m m a d/
zu bh d m r“ m a dh u bh i s
“
811- 3 tun a
3
“
.
y “g
D .
H g ? m a dh u n e 31
W m a d/
zu bh a s
y
Ab
m m a dh u n a s
‘
H
“
f
.
G 21
W m a dh u n o s m m a dh zi n d m
’
Hu
“
Lesson VI .
Ne ter djecti es (b t t s bst nti es) in E m y t k e

I3 7 . u a v u no u a v u a a
the forms p rop er to the m sc line in the d t bl gen I sin g a u a .

,
a .
-
.
, oc .
,
and gen loc d l .

-
. ua .
ISS Ch g s f fi . l 1 Before initi l EL j d

an e 9 o na
“
it . a an ,
i b ecomes
it 3
1 i ; th s 3 1 1 W t d j d becomes HT 7 u ,
n an n
td ii j -
W ta n ca tr iln ta ii ca tr ztn In
'
a fl l
' ‘
‘
a n dn ; fir t 31
i xi i
“
l st c se ho w e er Q
a a ,
v ,
e h is lmost l w y s s bstit te d for the initi l
a a a u u a
1 [ 9 ; th s W td h h t m
’
‘
u , c a rz .
13 9 F in l3 ;. before initi l at a i t, an a l
,
is ssimil te d d becomes
a a an
n s li e d l w hich is written i 551

a a z
, ,
or ( w h t i the s me thing)
a s a
Before the gg d p l t l ling l d dent l m tes there is

40
l . r a a a ,
ua ,
an a u
inserte d fter fin l i sibil nt of e ch f t h

a cl sses a n a a a o e se a re
sp t i l
ecy before
vewhich L beco,
m es d m ; th s for an a F it a n us v u
ta n we find m td hc
ca for 3 11 am am t thd a m t td h ca ,
“
a ,
s
*
ta th d .
Voc a b l
a ry VI u .
Ve r b s 3 K ca m + m d ( d oc m a ti)
i
si p
,
C go to ; f
r e c h d ti ll I09 ) a rink rinse the mo th
d ,
u .
to one s lot f ll p on TR t m ( la m y t ) be
’ “
a u ( a a t
, .
m kr a m 3“ d ( d kr ém a ti) {LE
I t § ( td sy ti)urejoice t ke a ,
a
stri d e u
p to tt c k
, a a .
p le s re in a( w u .
m d i ( di y ti) p l y M é v <M v a a .
J M >
T h is r le re ll y in ol es historic s r i l the l rge m

u a v v an u v va ,
a a
j i
ort y f c ses fofin l a in the
a l ng ge being
o f origin l a n a ua or a as .
Pr ctic lly the r le p p lies only t t before i

a a
,
d 21 t since
u a o i it c an ,
c ses in ol ing the other i iti ls

a v excessi ely r re
v n a are v a .
Lesson VI .
a n bhr a m ( bhr ci m ya ti
‘
'
§ I3 I) m cr a m ( cr ém ya ti ) beco m e
w nder bo t
a a u . we ry a .
A a f lw 7 7 1 .1
n ma d get dr n
( k
m a dy )
a ti u . A h
5 r ( h
’
a r a ti) t ke
a a wa y ste l
, a , X
c- ZP ,
hit ierce p l nder M la w h i t m r

d h ( i dh ti) h m
-
q
‘
El y y
v a p v a ,
. u
,
v
-
m c (c y )
m d m a ti become q iet a u ,
be exting ished go t u ou
?
.
,
er
a
» ”
M
Su b t s w rrior m fi fi ffl ‘
ksa tr i ya , m .
, a ,
an
W a ks m die dice f the second c ste

‘
a a ,
.
, ,
. o a .
at 5a m
7
le
e W fi dh m m inj stice 3 a rp ti m k ing [
a ar
W
a ,
.
,
u ,
.
n a ,
.
, .
m m -
)
wrong . t eye [ A W ne ra ,
n .
,
.
“7 “
m li m bee a ,
It
? m d/ m
.
, honey . a ,
n .
,
.
w c a te r r u,
fi g m lh
n .
,
mo th f ce a . u c a ,
n .
,
u ,
a .
a, o xr o s, M W Tks m be r a ,z t m r ty
i g
m . d e th,
a .
-
u, .
,
a .
fi n k p m onger a Hg , W e lth m oney

.
,
a . va su , n .
, a , .
Ex e rc ise VI .
m m g fi w fa fi t w ui fi um m
’
la l’a wfi n u
i m w fi m fi a f a ls l w f a fi w wm f a l s lw fi fi mfi
fi wf a lu l W W W M Q I W ! !
m : I S lW W i a fi f fl f l lfl fi W:
fi fi t
c v i es
fi l l
am a w m m gfi m a f m qo l a m : m fi n qa l a i s
‘
’
(ai m a zm a lmi : fn wa m w fl m fi n qs lm flfl tm
‘
mffl lae lm fi m i gwf a w z n aq n

The w rriors p l y f money
16 . 1 7 The king s
a
1
a
3
or
2
.
’
.
»
horses beco m e we ry the ro d to d y 18 The w rrior a

5
on a
4
- a
l
. . a
1
p ierces h i enemy
4
w i th the s p esr 1 9 B fond f ( E L)
S
3
a
2
. . ee s
I
are o
a
h one
y 2 0
z
Th. w ter f h i te rs . moistens f
( ?)
a h i feet
e a
?
o s a
1 “
s
3
.
2 1 There bees
. flitting bo t (a n ) 22 Tw men
2 1
cook
are a u
3
. . o
1
a re
i ng honey d fr its 23 W hen the te cher s nger ce ses

5 ?
an
4
u
3
. .
1
a
’ 2
a
3
a
‘
,
then the schol rs rejoice 24 Te rs st nd i the w rriors

5 “
a
7 s
. . a a
‘
n a
d
4? Lesson VI V I I . .
ey es . ”
The ene m ies o er w hel m (i t ! ) the king wi th rro w s
25 .
1
v
4 2
a
3
26 A . q rter f the inj stice f lls p on ( as) the king

ua
2
o u
1
a u
4 3
L e ss o n VII .
s ti V b ( t i e
l
4l Ca u . The Hind gr m
a ve er s na v
“
cu r u a
m ri ns d escribe cert in p resent syste m w hich they ssig to

a a a a -
a n a
so c lled
-
a cl ss This is ho w e er in f ct no p resent cl ss
“
cu r -
a
”
.
,
v ,
a -
a
a t l l b t
a c s ti e secon d ry conj g tion which is not con
,
u a au a v or a u a
,
fined to the p resent sy stem B t m n y form tions of thi s sort h e -

. u a a av
no c s ti e l e ; d i t is chiefly these th t
au a v gro p ed by the
va u an a are u
H ind s in their u cl ss w hich lso incl d es so m e d m i ti cu r - a , a u en o na ve
stems i y with c s ti e ccent F p r ctic l p rp o ses it is

n a
'
a , au a v a . or a a u
w ell eno gh to consider these erbs here

u v .
I42 The c s ti e stem is for m e d b y d ding w dy to the

. au a v -
a e
root which is s lly strengthened ; d the strengthening p roces

,
u ua an s
is in the m i follo w s a n as
I43 1 Me d i l or initi l
. i B . d ai r h e the g i a a ,
u, an av u ta
strengthening if c p ble of it ; th s 3 1 g W ,
dy ti ; a a u ,
ag, cor a “ a t
fa g 3m ag figfl fif d
’
vi d, v ed d ti ; bu t d a ti
‘
i i
'
ya t p , t p a
y .
I44 . 2 . A fin al v o w el ha s the vr ddhi - strengthening ; th s u ,
E
3; dhr , mt a f a dh d r a ya ti
'
efore Q u B a
ya
i di d E fi d b ecome
an a
M
.
,
3 111 1
; dy and ma \
do res p ecti ely ; th s v u , l fl
‘
bh i , W fif ‘
bh d ydya ti ; 4 h
b1 m, m a qfi f bh d v dya ti
'
a .
Me di l or initi l W in m etric lly light syll ble is

MS . 3 . a a a a a a
sometimes lengthene d d sometimes rem ins nch nge d ; th s ,

an a u a u , /
fi a ks l c s fi l fi a f a ksd ldy ti ; b t a t j m c s fi fl fl fi l
‘ ’ ‘ ‘ ' '
a ,
au . a u c a , au .
\
j ana a
y ti .
The inflection is the s l one of stems

MS . u ua a -
.
147 R ls f p h.o i c c m b i t i I
u eextern l combin tion
o eu n o na on . n a a
an initi l son nt f w h te er cl ss ( e en owel or semi o w el

a a o a v a v a v v or
n s l ) re q ires the con ersion f p reced i ng fin l s r d to son nt

a a u v o a a u a a .
Lesson V I I .
43
I4 8 . in l a t beco m es g d before y initi l

F i n al a t . 1 . F a , an a
son nt excep t the p l t ls the n s ls d at I th s 3 “ a ?

a , a a a ,
a a , an : u ,
m gh a t
e t
'
beco m es 3 m m g h i d t ; m m W fi lp ap a t
a ra e
'
c a ra
raks ti a M bh i m
org/ t i UW
I H g p y ti becomes UN T rc
’
a or o cz a
’
g fi f a p d p d d ks ti or m qr
g lmf fi p dp d d bh d m y ti or t n t n fi qt
ra a
’ '
r a
'
a f a p d p ci d g op d ya ti
‘
lin l i t t is ssimil te d to
49 . initi l p l t l ling l
2 F . a a a an a a a a , ua ,
or a li
“
the next w or d ; th s it becomes i t before E[
n d u 0 -
c an
h s j before a j d a 1 before a z e g 3m
‘
5 m gha i
t c ,
t t a , an
.
. . .
, e ca
beco m es f li n g m ghd ; 33“ m g h d t j l m becomes

Elm
“
e e ca e a a
m m g j
h d i l m ; m m m p p
m d d t l k det b ec m es a a o o
W an
d p d p d l I o kd t .
I5 O efore initi l 1 1 9 fin l
, 3 . B a ,
a t[ t-
becomes fi e, and the
111 9
; then becomes § h ; th s m c u , 33 : a rp at ca tr u h becomes
3 1113
3 : ri f d c h a tr u h .
Before initi l s ls Ft t beco m es i

I5 l 4 . . th s m a na a n : u ,
Smf fi gr h d t
y ti beco m es W fi a fi f gr h i y ti B t
na the ch nge
a
‘ ‘
cn na a . u a
into g d is lso p er m itte d tho gh h rdly sed ; th s m a ,

u a u u ,
grh d d n a ya ti .
Voc a b l
a ry VII u .
weigh g r“
s
a .
(
’
Ve r b HE; tu l t o l
a y a ti
) .
g Q w
’
x
( W e/
{
fla
w ( denom ste
ko i ba g/
a m .
é g q
‘
d a nci
'
n g/
a
( d enom . da xm d é p wd )
k th d y ti ) rel te tell
a a a ,
. d
nd ya t i ) p u nish .
W k s
\
l ( k d d
l y )ti aw sh s a a .
fi
‘
F (
9 Ta t
“
) bring d
’
a n a ya ti .
enom — torment
4 (m
m g y ( ) flg
’
4 d d a ti d i d
(p y ) t i
'
w
z a ia
g n y a a l p i a a ve x .
7
.
,
n mber co nt
u , u . 5 p aj (p tj d y ti ) honor
1 k
’
z a .
33 ( ou r d y )ti ste l cor a a .
Ep r ( p d y ti ) o ercome
ra ;
'
a v
3
4
3 3 1 41 ( t d d y ti ) strike be t
'
61 a a a .
,
44 Lesson VI I VI I I . .
Sub t s Q ua] r flp a ka ,
n .
,
gold p iece -
.
m a: j a n a ka , m .
,
f ther
a .
m lk o a ,
m .
, world p eo p le ,
m i da m ”
da z sti c k ; p u n i sh m e n t .
( sing . and
HQ p y merit
un a
W,
n., a dh m holy m s int . s u, .
, an,
'
a .
fr it ; re w rd gold
{ afi {W
h l M }
i
va p a a
j,
n .
, n (1 ¢
u a . su v a r a, n .
,
. e
(
“
m a m d m d y z note d H?! it t
r m d ri er ch rioteer
a i a
,
n .
,
a s a , .
,
v ,
a .
p oem . t m thief s en a ,
.
,
.
Ad b s {a i li k e ve r va a s,
Ex erc i se VII .
i j nw gs fi rt fl fi n qu
fi a zg a m ’
m sa
m m m mm
m m fi s a fi ls lwfi é afl w fi fi m fi r w nm m
a w a a fi a nu l wfi m m m m w I ii
-
a 1 z ! t ri a
l fi wt t t m
’
“fi lm m fi u t lg a fi I nfi l w
m rfi w m le l m ar W
’
a ms u fi t m o u
N e w
W a l aa l gfi w m fi m fi m l am a m
fi sh w gm n qe u
Thie es ste l the p eo p le s money 1 5 The t w o boy s
14 . v a
4 ’ 2 s
. .
1
w sh their mo ths 16 The f ther tells his sons ( d t ) the

a
3
u
2
. . a
1 5 2
o
re w r d of S i
a The schol rs honor d re erence their
4
n
g
. a
1 3
an
5
v
4
te cher 18 Ye both bring fr its in y o r h n d s d co nt

a
2
. .
3
u
1
u a
2
an
5
u
4
1 9 Merit p rotects fro m m isfort ne 20 The ch r

1 3 2
th me . . u . a
i t
o e er s
1
stri k e the horses w ith stick s 2 1 I nger ( bl) the
4 2 3
. . n a
1
a .
ki ng p ierces the thief with s p e r

2 5 3
a a
“
.
VIII L e ss o n .
P s t I di c t i M i d dl The
i
IS2 V b .
j g ti er s, a -
con u a on . r e en n a ve e.
p resent in d ic ti e mi d dle of erbs whose ste ms end in

a v is inflected v a
as follows :
Lesson V I I I .
I5 8 . F in l a re m in nch nged before initi l

ti e and zh
‘
o a u a an a
h t W
s or b t the w dis p p e rs
a ,
u Th s a ? a t? a t a b a . u , va n e a ra e
comes 3 ?$3 3
5 t ; Q ? bh a
va n e t‘
rabecomes “E h S3 “
no a ra
bh a no t
‘
By f the commonest c se of fin l fi is w here it
ra . ar a a
'
0
re p resents fin l m s (see a a
I5 9 The fin l { i or B
. ele m ent f d i p hthong is ch nge d
a it -
o a a
to its corres p on d ing semi owel EL y i t before y owel v or v, an v or
d i p hthong e x ce p t w hen the r le of

,
IS S w o l d p p l y Th s Q u u a . u ,
e
becomes Era; y d i a t m a y ; 3 a becomes 3 13 ; a , an ,

d
“
0 a v, an
a
wr( M a t, (i Th s i n in tern l combin tion 3 31
v . u , becomes a a
w
,
5 n e- a
W na
y ; a ah w b h
‘
becomes -
“ a bh o a
;
-
Vi a re: a i y y ields a va so
i
- n -
a a
d af r g m bh a y yiel d s W W
a-
am ay y
n -
a a , an bha y u- a a v- a a .
I 60 I . t lcombin tion the res lting semi o w el is in gen

n ex er n a a , u v
er l dro p p ed ; d the res lting hi t s rem ins Th s 3 ? { FR

a an u a u a . u ,
va n e i ti becomes a ? { fi t i ti ( thro gh th e interme d i te st ge va n a u a a
a fixfl fi t y i ti )
va n a
; “ fi l
l { fi f b h a i ti becomes m a f f a b h a no
’
na
i ti ( thro gh m fi f d bh a u i ti ) The c se f fin l Q is by f
‘
nav . a o a e ar
the more freq ent See lso I64 u . a .
I6I .C ert in fin l o w els m int in themsel es

a a vnch nge d b a a v u a e
fore y following o w el S ch
an 1 i t ar e
v d Q . d l u are .
, ,
an o as ua
endings both of d eclension d of conj g tion ; th s fi rfi { 3 gi l

, an u a u ,
r
ih a ,
w a ri a dh t ; 1
-
5 3 a s? p h l
’
it t 2
a Thera fin l i
“
a e a ra . . a ,
or
only o w el of interjection ; th s { Ti h i d
,
v an 3 13 h g u ,
e n ra ,
e a n e.
Vo c a b l
a ry VII I u .
s (d e p onents ) s p ring p ( mother i l ) i?fi St

fi
"
Ve r b u n oc .
f
M W ) 7 ? wi lt] ik y ar
( denom thaa “ L
T E
a bh a s ( bh d s t ) p k J Hi fi é
. ar a e S ea / l
ou )
y t a
) e k for (
as w t w 1
1 m g ( m i y t ) d
. i fl p Wo r r
'
a e e .
‘'
é - c v,
h ea /n /
ice g um a
'
a j fi i ks (i ks t ) behol d m y w )
a e t d t t stri
se e , e for ( w . a a e v .
[ mp (k i mp t ) tremble fight w
m ca 1 14 g dh ( yd dhy t )
3 ; a a e
( . a a e .
S lt j
i a
(j g/ )
an t be born rise instr a e f ccom p niment ) “ U /
, a ,
. o a a .
r ”
7
L sson VI I I
e . 47
( a r a bh t ke R
WT d (a r a bh a te )
'
a oa nd (
’
va n d a te
) greet honor , .
h O ld begin rm mks (Q i d ) l é ( 6< ” (fi )
r
OI] , . te ea r n . W y ( « a/
en d re Z 37 0
" t ) p le se ( d t gen VS a j
’
h h a te )
"
d
’ /
ee
Hg (
“
“Ha
fi ru r o ca e a a sa sa u e e
. .
4 a m, 5a m
Gri t l
a bh ( l bh t
a
) recei
’
e t k e B E
a
L e v ,
a . sev
(
'
seva te
) ser e honor v ,
Su b t s . 11
3 121 m a n u sya ,
m .
, man ( h om o) .
wa s?a n a r th a ,
m .
, misfort ne u .
‘
ai ya ii
j , a m s crifice .
,
a .
wy a , “ B al
”
l“ u dyo g a , m .
,
diligence .
a? va n a ,
n . w oods forest
, ,
.
W ka l
y a na ,
'
n .
,
d nt ge
a va a f a
'
i fi lvi n a
‘
y ma, fi i dw c j
l .
,
e n e d n
'
m l( a w e)
s l tion
a va . a fifi f vi ci , m w e .
,
av .
(T i ta r a , m .
,
tree . 311 6 1 book -
.
V0 54 (M
r“ d vij a , m .
, A r ya n ( t m ,
ce -
ém )
a? czi d
’
r a ,
m m O f the fo rth
.
,
an u
figm fi ldvi j a ti ,
m .
, A ya r n . c ste
a .
irt e v u .
f g fl h i ta , n .
, a d nt ge
va a .
M ed e a-W a
n
h d ‘a '
Ma
w fié dh a i r ya , n ste d f stness
.
,
a a .
ea 113
3 p a cu m be st Ad ve b : r ‘ '
I
‘
na not
fi
Le n ,
.
,
a . v
, .
W ba la , n .
,
strength might ,
.
Ex erc ise VI II .
W u wfi l
m a gar
’
8 I WW T§ 1€=
I EIW B I VI
fi fi ls lfi mfi : éi fi i fi ifiw fi
( a bl eaa i az a a l la a
c
fi le l
a a re : n o n m m a m laa l w af t
m w z fi fi l aa t mfi a fi m m az mh
fi a w fi w l as l a fi fi a afi t a e fi a m wfrt
‘
lau l vfi
17 . The
ho ses yonder tre m ble by the p ower (i t )
tw o u
“ 5 6 3
ns r .
i fa th s is ery com m only sed p rticl of q ot tion

( ‘ ’
, u , v u as a a e u a ,
follo w ing the words q ote d u .
o
t
w 0L
48 Lesson VI I I . IX .
of the o ce g
w es 1 8 The f ther beholds his son s f ce
n s
’ 1
av
2
. . a
3 “ ’ 1
a .
2
19 W . stri e fter the d n t ge of the

“
e v th s
3
a a va a
2
u
4
fi
(( ) pf s e k the t h 20 The chil daren k their
6
f ther ea c er s
s
. .
2
as
4
a
1
for foo d 21 I the forest yon d er ele p h nts

3
. n
‘ 2
a
3
are
fi gh t i g w ith be rs 22 The t w o Q fi d ser e the t w o Ary ns

5 “ ?
’ 4 1
n a . . ra s v a
here 23 F r its p le se the chil d ren 24 W hence do ye recei e

.
?
. u
1
a
?
’
. v
3
m y ? 25
one N w t h t w o
z
begi n the . i fi o e se e r s
z “
sa cr ce
3
L e ss o n IX .
I S2 eminines in
. F 3 " d, declined like f lr t sen d ,
i ‘
rm y
a .
’
N . s en d 3 ? sen e ( d i) fi
' '
c
fl fi sen d s
A .
3“ sen a m 7, n n n
I .
3 3 111
“
sen a yci W m sen d bhyd m m sen d bhzs

’
D .
3 3 13 sen a yci i
’
fim q sen d bhya s
Ab m . wn d yd s 77
G . n n i n f ra sen a y os film sen d n d m
L .
213 121131: sen d yd m am sen d su
V .
a? sen e
jecti es in E l
I 63 . decli e d in the m sc li k e 23 in
“
Ad v a are n a .
,
the fem li k e firm in the ne ter li k e I lia B t often the fem

.
,
u
“
. u .
ste m ends in fi 5 d is d ecline d li k e a f t ( in Less X I ) “ '
,
an
“
. .
I64 F in l fl (i i d i f?(i
. ccor d ing I5 9 become 3 111 fi g
a an n, a ,
an d
m d res p ecti el y b efore y follo w in
o
g owel d i p h tho ng v an v or .
The EL or i t m ay then be d ro p p e d le ing hi t s The 21 is , av a a u .
in f ct l w y s d ro p p e d b t the a not often Th s w W?

a a a ,
u
\
. u ,
becomes thro gh the me d i m f m , a ra W u

1 ma ; u o ,
a f t r becomes m fa
a .
I 65 I niti l fter short owe ls the p rep osition WT d the

Q . a , a v , , an
Lesson IX . 49
p rohibiti e beco mes Q th s W3 W b m W?

v p a rticle : u , eco es
W ; 3 11 m a n ta 3 11 m m .
I66 An initi l Q f root gener ll y becomes “I fter

. a
“
o a a a a
verb l p refix t i i pg fg i th origin l re p resenting R ; s ch

a
‘
co n a n
L
e er a or u
wa rs bet w een fi ler a n etc Th s W fl fi l f a m i fl fa

‘ ’
as , , ,
. u , , .
I67 The follo w ing p refixes

. often se d befo e erbs 3 m a re u r v :
‘
fter long to w rd ; W d o w n fi ; a i p p forth
a , a , t ; a
’ ‘
,
o
” ‘
u ,
u or ou
’
3 1 t1 to w rd ; fa down ; in into ; fi g
‘
o ,
t forth ; W
a to ’ ‘
,
’
‘
ou ,
’ ‘
a.d ist nce w y ; n fi ro n d bo t ro n d ; 11 for w rd forth ;

a , a a
’ ‘
u a u ,
a u
’ ‘
a ,
’
FR long with com p letel y

‘
a ,
.
’
Vo ca b l
a ry IX u .
Ac t i ve Ve b r s fi ll W -
(p a r dj a
ya t e ) be co n
fia
’
vv w W -
I
“
i l
a
“
( a va g a cc h a
’
ti ) u nder q ered (
u r a r el
y w . a ct . sen se
st n d
a . conq er ) u .
g W descen d . 11
5
“
It (p r ap a dya t e) fl e e f o r
'
r
re
fifi i 3 11
-
in t od ce r u ,
f geu to ( a c e. f
o p er so n ) .
consecr te M d fi l w ) beg get by begging t

e o/
re ri te ll 7 44
‘
(a
7
e a w
a , , . a
7
qfi w i ndy ti ) le d bo t ; 2 1 11 : ( d eno m m rg y t ) h nt
'
1 g gg a
ar a a a u a a e u
M m
.
a
m rry
a . for see k ,
.
W 3 ? ( tp d t t ) fl y p i i t ( d u t t ) exist s bsist
a z be‘
u .
“
-
v r a e ,
u
, ,
m an ila
( g W3 ( éb ti ) descend become a va r a . .
be brilli nt shine ; a ,
D p e ts e on be eminentn .
m GR ( i g
“
h t ) come sa r z a c c
'
a e
together meet [ M WM , .
S n b st :
W fi
g gd
a f the G nges
m pr a y m
a
. . . .
, , .
(
“
g m .
,
rro w
a .
m m .
,
ho seholder he d f
u , a o
W f .
,
d ghter m iden
au , a . f mily
a .
P err y S k
, an s rit P ri m er .
50 Lesson IX /
0 5 “
“
N
Wi s
.
11 4 “
it
) M
M
sh de n rotection 1
,
fim
"
5 1 1 11 f .
,
a . .
p A
f .
fC J u
m t w ilight
at!” f
fi
n om P r a y ag a (
f
m
f 3
pr
f i
a
; zw
. . . . .
, , ,
’
C 1 ty ,All h ab ad ) Q 3?m a . .
,
he en av .
fe r he rt 6
are:
m
“
n .
,
a . n .
, a .
fi le
M } 1 111 51 f w ife w om n
.
, Adj ,
a .
“Tm f s p eech l ng ge .
,
m f bl c k ,
a ua .
, . a .
fi at f lms .
, u m f a a n ; b i d w ic k.ed , .
c
,
.
W i t h m p Y m n a ( i er m f . 3IT m r ch. b nd
,
nt ; a u a t v , , .
°"
,
u ,
a u a
the J mn ) u p l m n y a . . a .
m m b ttle
.
,
n Ad .
, a .
v
“
( W T f street .
, H g together with (p p .t w os os . .
f a g ” f kno w le d ge le rning
.
, , a .
f a g ?! m bir d Hm.
,
s ddenl y q ick l y .
“
u ,
u .
3 1TH m .
,
h u n te r r W
’
)
W
Ex e rc ise IX .
W W
“
W
”
t ql m fm m m m fl fit
m fa ls lw m m w : I Q I fi I ma xi m : a ft
W m ii
’‘
a l t“ fi mfi é i a aia n fi r .
m z um r n fi fi r
w m w wfi m a fi M W I m m m < § l
6
n 4> w fi
W fi n e lan W W W sewn :
g
i
f t i t fi afi fi n qo n
W W W W W H M f a w n w a rms
Hfi
f fi W m fi m efi m lm
i m f fl
‘
m f a s fi a ma nn fi ww a m fi m fit n as "
The tw
15 . beg m ch lms from the w i es of o s ch o l
a rs
l 6
u
2
a
3
v
5
‘
the ho seholders 1 6 At P yag the G nges nites w it h the

u
“
. . ra a
1
a
2
u
4
Y m na 17 B d men d
u a t re ch (EnL) he en 18 O
3
. . a
1 2
o no
4
a
5
- av
3
. .
V is n to d y ( i m rries G nga H ri s d ghter 1 9 I the 3 2 7 ’

e ’ 4 s
u - a a a a a au . . n
,
b ttle the k ings fi gh t w ith rrows d con q er th i

a
1
mi
3 4
a
2
an
6
u
7
e r en e es
b
.
Birds of fe ther flock together

“
a a
”
.
Lesson I X X . .
51
20 H ere in the street the t w kings d ismo nt from th i b l c k

.
2 3
o
l
u
6
e r a
4
horses 2 1 The seer t w o so ns

5
. eminent in le rning
.
’
8
2 3
are
4
a
1
22 F rom fe r of th wicked h nters ( bl) t w o birds fl y p

3 1 2 4 5
. a e u a . u .
23 At t w ilight ( l d ) the seers I3 3 ) re erence the go d s

1 2 4 "
. oo . a .
, v .
24 I the street f the ill ge the te cher d the schol r meet

. n
2
o v a
1
a
3
an
5
a
4 6
.
25 W .tw ifi to the gods f

e l ; we do not s cri
o sa c r ce
2 1
or o u r se ves
4
a
H ri
5 3
fi f
ce or a
L e ss o n X .
s P ss i I fl t i
I GS . Ve r b A cert in . a ve n ec on . a
r ‘ A n
stem inflected with mid dle en dings is sed only w ith p ssi e
, ,
u a a v
m e ning a d is formed from ll roots f

,
an w hich there is occ sion a or a
to m ke p ssi e conj g tion I t sign is

a a a ccented Ely/d d d ed
v u a . s an a a
to the root w itho t y reference to the cl sses ccording to which

,
u an a a
the cti ve d mid d le for m s

a m dean The inflection is p recisely are a .
like th t f other stems Th s a ?! t m/é a n ? t y

a o a -
Fifi . u ,
a , an
’
a se
,
“
t yd t
an etc e, .
l6 9 O tsi d e the p resent sy stem m i dd le forms m y be d i

. u - a
_ _ _
u se
. _ _
g
a p ssi ea sense ; b t th
ve re is s p eci l form for t h u
p ss in a a e aor. a .
the 3 d sing r . .
l70 The for m f root to w hich t h p i i g i p p end d

. o . e a ss ve s f
n s a e
is s lly w e k one Th s p en ltim te s l is d rop p ed ; d

u ua a a . u a
o
u a na a an
cert in bbre i tions which

a a m d e i n the w e k forms f the
v a are a a o
p erfect or in the p st p ssi e p rtici p le

, fo nd lso in the a a v a are u a
p ssi e p resent syste m

a v E g from
W p ss -
3 13 13 ; fro m a i
l . . .
,
a .
l.
K2
9 w
1 l F (
m p »
P
m I the roots 3 r d a t the m
1 fi g n q e
g r
1
“
1
. a n
s , , , , ,
an ,
becomes 3 in the p res ; th s 3 3 56 “ a W ? ( see no te to

u . u ,
1
, ,
IOZ )
“ 3 Si
, m il rly
W m k es ( 31 1 3 . d 1 1 3 d
W m
a k e ,
a , an an a
m d
W 3 ;an
W m kes fil m ? a
Lesson X .
I72 . F in l a and 3 of roots a re gener ll y lengthened ; th s

a u ,
f M u )
? M ”
fa she s o r
ge ! 0,
in l 3 3 is in gener l ch nge d to fl ; th s $ fi fifi ;
I73 . F a a a u , 1
b t if p rece d e d by t w conson nts it t k es g ; th s m El fi “
u o a a un a u , ,
‘ h ‘
N w
”
r ,
The roots in ri ble w hich the n ti es w rite w ith a s; i

“
va a a v ,
ch nge a ; to if l bi l tt p rece de t B i g ; th s 3
h
“
o r, a a er o
a
a e ,
u , ,
l
m a;
Q ( “N 0
z
l
t em b t e
-
j
‘
w
j a
3 g a s re , , u ,
F in l i n of roots s lly ch nge d t t ; th s Q T I

l74
“
. a ls u ua a o u , ,
m a ; W T W ; Efi t fi l B t W T m k es W W ;
, d some ‘
u a an so
other roots in WI f b
l
! .
a ow
I7 S The roots Hi . d m s ll y form their p ssi es from a n u ua a v
p r llel
a roots in
a a n ; th s m B t a n ? d a w? occ r u , . u an l u .
I7 6 V erbs f c s ti e inflection d d enomin ti es in W

. o au a v ,
an a v ,
form t h i p i by d ding a t the c s ti e or d enomin ti e

e r
‘
a ss v e a o au a v a v
stem fter a t ; h been dro p p e d th s a rfifi is stole n ; any ?

‘
‘ ‘ ’
a as : u ,
‘
is co nted u
I7 7 The p erson l p ssi e constr ction w ith the logic l s bject

. a a v u , a u
in the instr ment l is p rtic l rl y common w ith tr nsiti e erbs ;

_
u
f
. " -o “ M
a ,
l
a u a a v v
a n d not less the im p erson l p ssi e constr ction bo th w ith so a a v u ,
tr nsiti e d intr nsiti e er bs Th s fl ?m

a v an m a? H e en a v v . u ,
‘
av
’
is re che d by the m ; m m ?! one comes hither ; g m?
a an
’ ‘ ’ ‘
o ne
[ 1
8 99 3 1 5
9 it is he i e they y The p re d ic te to the‘
a r d . .
1
‘
sa
’
. a
instr ment l s bject of s ch constr ction is f co rse lso i

u a u u a u o u a n
t l; th s U fi mffi m Sfi a fi R a m li es see ’
t
s ru m en a u ,
‘
a v as a r .
Voc a b u l
a ry X .
Ve b r s , ss i s
wi t h p a ve t kea ,
r e c e i ve , s e z e . i
i i (p kri a
y t ) m ke d
’
e
p erform a o
( d
'
o pa ti ;
p d a eya te)
’
bite di ff
?
. . .
, ,
.
m
'
2 d d
( y ; p
ti . d i g a to) c u t,
di g .
m p .
/ ) p
d i al d i e l y
a .
I n (g éya tz; p g i yd te)

’
. sing . 1m (p .
'
dh i ya la ) p u t , p l cea .
Lesson X . XI .
( Us e p a ssi ve co n str u c ti o n s thr o ug h o u t .

)
Gr in is sc ttere d for the b i d 2 1 G rl nds
20 . a
2
twi a
3
r s
l
. . a a
1
are
ned ( W ) by the m i d
3
u se 22 Ag in H ri is p r ised a ens
z
. . a
?
a
1
a
4
b y Ra m 523 V i sn drin k s w ter from h i h n d 24 Ple s

3 1 4 3 2 ‘
a . . u a s a . . a
an tly (E lfin )
1
sleep s in the h d ; y the p p l
one
3
s a e
z’
so
4
sa
5
e0 e
6
.
2 5 Both seers 26 The f ther sets ho p es his chil d

1 z 1 4 2 ?
. ifi sa c r ce . . a on
’
2 7 The schol r neglects th te cher s comm n d 28 The

3 4 ’ 1 2
. a e a a . .
tw schol rs thin k bo t th i text book ( m ) 2 9 G r in is

o a
1 3
a u e r -
?
720 . . a
2
so w n i the fi ld 3
3 0 They p l y with dice (i m p
n
p )e s
l
. . a
2 1
er s . a ss .
3 1 The k ing s co m m nds recei e d by the obe d ien t ser nts

’ 1 2 5 ?
’ 4
. a a re v va
3 2 The m d igs in the fi l

1 3 2
. d an e .
L e ss o n X I .
r s I m p f c t Act i
l
78 . Ve bc j g t i The im p erfect is
. er e ve , a -
on u a on .
for m e d from the p resent stem by p fi i g th g m ent 3 d dding -

re x n e au L an a
a set of second ry endings a .
I7 9 I f the p resent stem begin w th o w el the gment nites

i v a au u
-
.
,
w ith it to form l w ys the rd dhi g g el not the g u th s W + f

'
a a v -
v ,
u a : u
or
i or u r
re
p p ositio
I8 0 be p
. refixedIf the a gment comes bet w ee n , au n
re
p p osition d erb in Gree k : th s from
an E l
i f t im p f vste m ,
as u ,
l-
“
a
,
.
-
a m ; i a t ! i t a n ; f a i l i m pef S tem E t
x -
11 1
“
,
o
-
.
IS I Th e inflection in the cti e is

. follows a v as :
Sing D l . Pl r l ua . u a .
dh m “ m m
' '
dd m
'
d
''
a ua u a va czua a va a
W wa g ?!
'
d u zu
'
do a d a s FR a va da ta m o va
wa g m am wa g r
' '
da n
'
3 da t d a tci m
'
. er a va a va e a va
The im p erfect is the tense of n rr tion ; it ex p resses p st

I S2 . a a a
time si m p ly witho t y f rther im p lic tion ,

u an u a .
I8 3 P lys yll b i F m i i i i declined li k e Ha ri er

’
i ‘
“
. o a c e n n es n , ,
v .
m
7 gh
u M a a .
Lesson XI .
D l ua . Pl r l u a .
a efi na dyd u W E: na dya s
W na di s
m d i bbzs
’
11 na
W d i bbya s
’
na
Ab .
wan Q
-
na dya s
G 39
L
’
W W ua a a
y m
V i f; ma de
IS4 . s ls The n s ls q q
F i nal n a a . a a , , a nd
a ,
occ rring fin ls u as a
a f ter a s o r h t g
] do bled before
a
y e , are u an
m i n i ti a l o w el th s W
v : u ,
fi tfi E H beco m es wf fl s ffi l .
Voca b l
a ry Xl u .
Ve r b s fa i l 11 ( p r a vi cd ti ) enter Vi n g —
r
.
,
3
2 3; 3 13 ( a va kgu td ti ) '
cut o ff or W se t oneself a .
down .
a + 2 11 ( d ba r a ti ,
'
-
te ) fetch bring ,
. N h
t {a m
-
11
3 (p d th a ti ) recite re d ,
a .
S b t u s .
wife consort wafi
‘
f .
, ,
.
we
’
r vw
fl m p p .
;,m i g ; w l
tl
g fi
urfi f d ghter
o se ea n n ea 1. .
,
au .
W m m p ”
t l god I ndr m no m boo k ( m n scri p t)
r .
V ”1e f i a .
, a u .
e
m p the goddess a t m flood high w ter

no . r., .
, , a .
I ndr a ni Ufi lfi f e rth gro n d

'
. a u
ti
.
, , .
I I p oe m
n .,
m m p riest
. Br hm n , a a .
W m liter ry work book m m fi h t f g Q d ‘ . , I M

»
” m a
Z
.
, a , . .
, s . u.
Gra f t f mother .
, m t fl V (
.
t W ”
” ‘
w -
a
t
l
“ e 1
W Q /
m
u
f fem le sl e ser nt co ncil meeting

.
f
V
4
,
f e é '
’f
W T f f € “
°m w M
a av u o
.
,
7 7 , va . .
, ,
.
a f t f go d dess q ee
, 3 3 1 f rmy ,
u n
“
,
a
fl fl fl f city
‘ ' ‘
.
, Eh? song f p r ise
. n ., o a .
fl Tfi f wo m n wife .
, a , .
56 Lesson XI X I I . .
Ex erc ise XI .
a finfi ew
’
guf m lm afi a z m ai m mm m
w fi i m w w fi afi a w m m ns n m zm
fw a g m q fi fi 'W
W W I é l m fi r
W m t ls lm ér w mm m wm l c l gfm
W W fi fi fi m 1 W e
le l 11s fl a n:
"
‘
E T ai a o “
ve rt
W 1 as 1 fi re? f a t es “ 111 113 711 3 3 1 6 sna r
fi
1 fi rm afi v W a n qua rts h
-
W 3 1 C
R g a a : '
3 111 1 II Q Q II
hen ye beso ght (I raq) the king f p rotection (

14 . W u
“ 2
or
3
a ce .
then y were ( Q T) in misfort ne 1 5 I the t w o ri ers G ng

5
e
7
u
6
. . n v
r
ra a
2
é it is Ra fi ?) high w ter 1 6 The t w o w omen s ng

4 3 ( 5 1 4
d Y m
‘
an a un t a . . a
a song f p r ise bo t R m (g ) 1 7 O
o a
g 3
w hy d y a u a a
2
en . .
1
se e r s ,
?
’
o e
both s cri fice to the go ddesses w ith melte d b tter ? 18 The q een
a
6 4
u
s
. u
’
s
1
Women ser nts bro ght je w els d p recio s stones 1 9 I

-
va
2
u
6 3
an
5
u
4
. . n
a nger ( bl) the te cher str ck the schol r w ith his h n d

1
a . a
2
u
“
a
5
a
3
.
20 The t w o ser nts bro ght w ter from the cistern ots l 5 “ 3 o
2
va u ln
.
p a .
2 1 Ye ff (i mpf ) w oo d from the trees w ith the xe

4 3 2 l
. t cu o 22 Th . a . . e
seer p r ise d I n d a ni I n d r s consort with h y mns

1
a
6
r
“
,
a
’ 2 3
,
5
L e ss o n X II .
85
l . s si d 3 declined in
F e m i n i n e S u b t a n t i ve n z an
'
‘
u are as
the p r d igms the next p ge The t w o series f forms exh i bit

a a on a . o
com p lete p r llelism w here the a sho w s i y or y the other

a : o ne , ,
e, a
,
sho w s res p ecti el y or ; cf 5 0 S I I the D Ah

v u ,
v, 0 ,
av .
,
. n .
,
.
G d L sing these stems sometimes follo w a f t; th s m lyd ’
an . .
,
u a z,
db en e d z,
’
-
d
y ,s -
yd m ~
,
-
v d s, -
vd m .
IBB . F em i n i s ne in
’
z and 3 u : Fifi !
“
‘
op inio n
’
,
Lesson XI I .
Sm g D l ua . Pl r l
u a
N “ fa g : ma ns
'
ti t fl
- m a ti t1 m m a ta ga s
A wfi m: m a ti m i1 m m a tzs
I W m m m a ti bhya m Hf fl fi i fl : m a tzbbzs
’
t ci
‘
T a y
D 1 1 11 3 m a ta ge t i ff-na g ; m a tzbhya s
'
Ab Hfi q m a tes
Q
“ 1
.
1
3 8
3 Q Q 8 3 9 $ 9 S
V . I f? m a te
IS7 .
g
A djte c t i ve s often inflectedin in the f i a nd
“
a u are e
m inine li k e t i ffr d $ 13 B t dj ecti e in 3

-
an p recede d by . u a v s u one
conson nt often form deri ti e feminine ste m by dding i f

a a va v a .
Th s a s? m ch N m sc erg q f a f t n 3 3 ; gm he y
u ,
‘
u
’
,
. a .
“ -
,
.
,
.
‘
av
’
,
a m
m
. f t i f f i
, i i This
. fem is then
,
d eclined
11 . li
“
k e a t }. . .
Vo ca b l
a ry XII u .
Ver b s : W W te ch
a ,
in 86 1m v u/u t
,
o éz c
w be i
( p )
Ic n order
'
a l a te ; tend str ct u .
or cond ce to (w u 2151
? ( . vi n d d t i , vi n dd te ) a c q ire u . W
7
‘
f
m d
’
Lesson XI I .
S u b st . : a ffi r m f .
,
fly , g o a t .
m g m rrel .
,
flfi fi qu a f s l tion . deli er nce I ‘
.
,
a va ,
v a .
‘ W
a na l n
p oem .
, a f g f stic k
. t fi .
, , s a
'
afi ffi f glory .
, ( fi q m .
y ; rein “
f
‘
.
,
ra . 0 1'
fi : t m co w herd she
.
p herd
, ; ( If ? f night M V ( M
,
) .
, ,
‘
AW
g rdi n ( j f )
ua a m m wo n d
.
o ’ a
.
,
u .
En fa f birth ; c ste ; kind

.
, m f re p ose a . .
, .
fi ‘ f decision f ch r cter ; E fi l f he ring ; holy writ

g .
.
,
j o a a .
, a .
co r ge
u a .
g fi r f tr d ition ; l w b k .
,
a a i oo .
( M
t ) m p rince 6 3
. , m slee p; dre . m W .
, a .
” W W ,
fi fth? f p r
. d ence intelligence
, gi t f u j w ,
. .
,
a .
Wfi fi f d e otio n honor
.
, mmv , .
,
m vf m p rt p iece .
, ha f m l w
a ,
. F ,
.
0
, o .
i f ? f ros erity blessing m f m rinci l first M m

y
)
N c 0
p.
p
, p ,p .
, .
, a , .
a
I fi! f
i e . rth gro
,
nd l n d a a ? m f, or f 5
u }
a light E X
, X a . .
,
.
, n .
, .
0
,
. Q W
Ex erc ise XII .
a m m a fi m m m zu
fi m z m fi rfi fi r m fa m fl z u s g y
M i s fi t qug fi afi f
g q ga a u fi m
’
me t a ln a ri a s fl m é la l a fi z fi fi fi g mrw q
fi
.
fa m g n gi afl g fi r w fi lu l
m sf w fiw z li l
m
fi fl
’
flI W w mm ts l Tfi é fifl fl fi m ti ar a
m m qm a fi qfi m fflfi fi
’‘
m a ma nm a n fl
’
i ’i ma t
fi rst mm m w rf via : t ea 1 w wa rm
as " 18 11 C
is n rejoices t the de otion (i t ) of the p io s

15 . V u
3 4
a v
2
ns r . u
1
d gi es del i er nce 1 6 Men f m n y c stes d w elt in the

6 7 s 3 1 2 5
an v v a . . o a a
city 1 7 The bir d s

4
. the h nter . d fly from the 1
se e
3
u
2
, an
5
up
6
gro n d 1 8 By the p ower of intelligence w e o erc me d e

u
“ ?
. .
1
v a
4
a v rs
Lesson XII . XI I I . 59
ity 1 9 The co w herd g rds the cows in the w d 20 By

s
. .
1
ua
4 3
oo
z
. .
intelligence d diligence ye
1
cq ire m ch glory 21 The
a n
3 2
a u
6
u
4 5
. .
p oem tends to the

1
p oet s glory ( tw 4
d ti ) 22 F p ros p erit y
" 2 3
o a ves . . or
1
w e b w before (Di o 2 3 The reins

3
being f stene d
va
2
.
1
a re a
4
( m g to the h o rse s j ws 24 I the ight we both

’ 2
re d a
3
. n n
1
a
3
( pf )
i m holy w rit
.
2
L e sso n X III .
I BB . Ve r b s, a -
j
c o n u g a t i on . I m p e r f e t M i d d le c . Th e im p erfect
m id dle of v erbs in a is as follo w s
a te{i i W 3 f€ wmfg
- ’
1 la bh e ( i) dl
a bh c wa ki dl
a bl
zczm a hi
'
o
’ ’
. a a °
w m; fim q m
' '
al
’
2 bh a tbci s l
a bb e tb d m al
a bl dhva m
‘
. ar a O a o za
m
’
3 .
W d la bb a ta 0 d la bh etd m ”F a a l
a bh a n ta
W ith m a nd
W of the d l ua , of .
I f?
! a nd Q ? o f the
p res . i nd m id . .
I8 9 . Ro o t - wo r d s i n i
‘
i a re declined as follows
the D A b Gen
In d L sing d G p l these stem
.
, .
-
.
,
an . .
,
an . .
, s
some imes follow a f t ; th s dh iyd dh yd dh yd m dli d m C f

t u ,
'
z,
'
z s
,
’
z , zn . .
§ I SS Obser e th
. t w here t h c se endin g begins
v with ow al -
e a -
a _
v a
the ste m fin l 5 i p lit into lg a s s

”
.
Lesson XI I I .
The follo w ing dd ition l p refixes

I 90 . se d with erbs a a are u v
a ,
mf a o er bo e ; wfi : nto close p on a ffi ] to nto

”
‘ ’ ‘ ‘ ’
‘
v a v ,
on u u x u ,
, ,
‘
g inst ( often w ith im p lied iolence) ; fi t d own into in n fi i
a a
’
v
‘
, ,
‘
b ck to g inst in ret rn a p rt w y t
a ,
a a ,
u
“
‘
a a ,
a a ,
'
ou
’
.
I9 I Both in erb l forms

. d in deri ti es the fin l v or B a an va v ,
a
o f parefix or d in rily i
l g l
i the initi l Q f root
a to which n ua ze s a o a
it is p refi x e d ; d in f w c ses the i t em ins e en fter an ,

a e a , r a v a an
interp ose d 3 ] of gment or re d p lic tion ; th s fro m W r fi au u a u ,

’
m ; Wal t r a fts p res p ss W 3 13-

im p f p ss W ,
. a .
,
. a .
The fin l R
I9 2 of
p refixes in { i t d B E becomes
L be
"
. a an E
fore initi l q q q 15 ; th s from t r + m fi m fi

g
a ,
1 u a
, , .
, ,
Voca b l
a ry u X III .
ve r b s ; mm n f a (p r a tzbh ésa te)

’
a nswer
F o r é ¢v
f
m fa ( f
’
ti kr d m a tz, kr a m a te ) (w )
’
+a a - . a ce . o p ar a .
p ss be y ond or by tr nsgress
a ,
a . rise ; r le a u .
a l i
W ( jj y ) é t b born u a e e , ( y ) t i rr nge
r a ca com’
a
p ose a a ,
arise from ( liter ray wor k ) a .
n rise come into existence W I gé b c '
W “ ( ti é ti fi l
d k
“
a .
p s ; ra c z o a
,
£ 11 Wfi i co er kee p sh t v ,
u . forbid .
m fi r ( i d ey ti ) d is p p e r v n a a a
, fi e + fi (
1 i é t ) d well ; d e ote
n s va e v
p erish . oneself to ; ttend a .
fi
g G E gir d ; Q
"
T f a fi x mo
-
nt st nd bo e u , a a v
eq i p u . or o er ; le go ern v ru ,
v .
6
W W ( i p d y t ) grow n s
'
a a e , g l + q
1 fii t h d y inj re o ff en d
1n ex u , .
61 m
(W rm
arise from a . a )
Sometimes with the erbs Hg , v an d ‘HTT, bbre i ted to fi t;

a v a
t in cl ssic l S k t m ost co m m only sed conj nction lso ’

bu
‘
a a . u as a u : a ,
‘ ’
to o .
62 Lesson X I I I . XI V .
the l ng ge of the Ary ns th s ns w ered (i mp

a ua p ) the a
”
: u a er s . a ss .
Br ahm ns 18 By its cle erness the d o e w freed from the

a . . v v as
net 19 The te cher girde d b oth bo y s with the girdle 20 W hen

. . a . .
the schol r s m o d esty dis p p e re d then the l w w o ff ende d g i t

a
’
a a ,
a as a a ns .
2 1 W hence di d ye get (
.
m) the w hite cows ? 22 The w hole .
e rth w r le d by the gre t k ing 23 F p ros p erity (d t ) we

a as u a . . or a .
took ref ge with the k ing ( ll Hg ) 24 T w l w boo k s w ere co m

u -
. . o a -
p ose d by V is n 2 5 The m il k of the bl ck w is dr nk by

u. bot h . a co u
children .
L e s s o n X IV .
93
l . Ve r b s , j g t io
a -
P sc on u a n. r e en t I m p e r a t i ve Acti ve . The
inflection o f this m o d e is follo w s as
Sing . D ua l . Pl r l u a .
W W
' '
-
da m a
’
dam d a va
'
1
“
. ca er
g rat v a va
m
’ ’
W
’ '
2 HQ caaa va d a ta m va d a ta
—
.
m w
'
da n tu
’ ’
3 d a la da ta m a g og
. va oa
; va
I94 The three first p ersons

. ro
p p erly s bj ncti e for m are u u v s,
an d ccor d ingl y often ex p ress

a w ish o f t re ction a r u u a .
I 95 The secon d d thir d p ersons f the im p er ti e e x p ress

. an o a v
oftenest comm n d ; sometimes w ish a f t re ction The a a or u u a .
n eg ti e sed w ith the i m is RT

a v u v.
“
I9 6 A r re i m form either 2 d or 3 d p ers sing ( or

. a v .
,
n r . .
is m d e w ith the en d ing a m ; th s m

a It l e is th t f u ,
. s va u a o
a
p osterior or f t re i m ( li k e the L tin forms in t d
u u t t ) v. a o an o e .
I S7 Ro t wo d s i 3 1 i t inflecte d li k e li f e rth ‘
“
. o - r n , , a
exem p lifie d in the exercises no f rther indic tion nee d be m de ,

u a a ,
excep t in s p eci l inst nces f the p osition f the words in the a a ,

o o
S ns k rit
a .
Pl r l
u a
NV wg bb as
i m bbu va s
A b/
W mva m
Ab ‘ EI
J K bku va s
n n
G
W bb u vo s
W bh u va m
L ‘
fi
O-l
‘
f bbu vz
77
m ca di ma s
Voca b l
a ry Xl
V u .
Ve r b s: m mp a ss
( y te)
d r
p d see m look , .
i n Wfi ‘ (a bl
z ds a tz
y y )
’
rep e t a , Hall -
inh bit ; d well
a
st dy
.
u , le a r n lM M
M M ’
g it I I (p r a va r ta
'
t ) get
e going
a
,
throw forw rd a or bre k a o u t, a rise

into .
Lesson XI V .
Su b t s W f .
,
song f p r se ; p r ise o ai a . 4m
1
Wfi tfi g est m .
, u .
g
“
m f .
, d ghter i l w
au -
n- a . W
wi fl '
ntr th n .
,
u u .
Adj
W m st dy ; recit tion .
,
u a .
W lo w er
, ; f
other.
0
m , .
i rrfifl c
“
mm
'
d p rescri p t ion o an ,
.
W f highest
, .
; other .
m se t ch ir n .
, a ,
a .
W f m croo k e d bent
, .
0
, ,
. Vi m / £ 0 4 41 )
g ig f s p oon.
p
,
s crifici l ,
es . a a
W f h be tif l
, .
“
au u .
S p oon .
Ad m :
1T]? m lect re lesson .

, u , .
W n d er n d erne th (gum ) ,
u a e .
“ 5 44 “
W T f cre t re ; s bject
.
, a u u .
fi m long ( of t ime ) .
i f e rth gro n d
” a ,
u .
{ WEE K f f r ar , a a .
W n orn ment a . I n p h i bi t iro

p t i l li k e Greek ve ar c e,
3
1 f e y ebro w
.
,
.
N f L aitin,
a ne .
Wi f wom
e
n w i f Affj j fi j a ,
e
‘
HT (p o stp o s .
) or .
3 ? f lt r .
,
a a .
w ne r by a .
W 0\
f m other
.
,
i l w -
n- a .
Ex erc ise XIV .
afi m m u fi a ai m w l
fi
fi m m fié fi m m u an
W W W fl W W H IW W ?
aa a fi fm m ua l fi a fl g en o fi fi fi qfi fi ls l
g a m m j y fi f w m s lq mafi r fl a w m m
w
'
m a ri a fi
"
lu é af fi rm : g a rfi a wfif g a a m m r fi
g
wfi rfi i m m i afi
m
’
t fi lm
a m fam r fi rfi r W a r I so u am ? an m
fi % W W TW
I QQ I I Q Q I § § i Q fi fiW fi I QQ I
en a m fi f oru m s "
-
g (
1 5 The w omen sing t h e p r a ises (si n g u l ) o f I ndr a ni
. ar (p a ss .
c o u si n
) . 16 .
“
St d y ye holy writ
u a nd the sciences s p e ,
a k the
Lesson XI V XV . .
65
the tr th honor y o r te chers th s i the p rescri p tion f the

u ,
u a
”
: u
1
s
3
o
text boo k s f schol rs (g ) 17 Let k ings p rotect th i b

-
2
or a
4
en . . e r su
j t
ec s a n d p nish the wic k e d th s is the l w
u not o ffen d ed : u a
18 0 . w omen re erence y mothers i l w 19 Let not the

, v our -
n -
a . .
co chm n stri k e torment t h horses 20 Bring the je w els

a a or e . .
“
th s the t w o m id ser nts were comm nde d by the q een

u a Let - va a u .
us w ith two s p oons d p w ter the lt r 22 Let l

p y with ro a on a a . .
“
us a
d ice for money th s s p o k e the tw w rriors ( p ) ”

u o a a ss
23 . To d y let m e init te (i m ) m y t w o sons th s s y s the

“ -
a ia u.
”
: u a
B r ahm n 24 Let the ma dig cistern

. . en a .
L e ss o n XV .
r s c nj g ti
I9 9 . P s t I m p ti M i d dle The
Ve b , a o u a on . r e en er a ve .
p resent im p er ti e mi d d le is inflecte d th s a v u :
S ng D l i Pl r l ua . u a
a i r l bh d m y? ? l bh h
’ ’
1 a l b b d
a h d W d
i m a ca i a a ai
m la bba sc a 6 53 m W la bh a dkva m
’
2 a bh e th d m
l
The first p ersons

200 . re ll y s bj ncti e forms The i a re a u u v . n
fl tiec f the p ssi e i m

on is p recisely si m il r th s fi fi m
o a v v. a : u , ,
a m etc , .
20 I N s i Q r These stems li k e m ny belonging t th

. oun n .
,
a o e
.
conson nt d eclension exhibit in their inflectio n d i fference f

a -
,
a o
stem form strong middle d w e k ( F the c ses c lle d strong

-
: , , an a . or a a ,
etc . I ntrod
, se e I the we k c ses ( exce p t loc sing ) the
.
,
n a a . .
stem fi li a r w hich in the w e k est c ses is ch nge d n t r lly

-
na s ,
a a a a u a
to ( B t reg r d s the strong c ses the ste m s f this declension

r. u as a a ,
o
f ll into t w o cl sses in the

a which is m ch the l rger a : one u a ,
com p rising ll the m i g ti d f aw others the a is no na a ou s, an a e
i ddh i d becoming m d ; w hile in the other cl ss cont ining

vr e
i , r a , a
P e rr y S ki
, ans r t P ri m e r. 5
Lesson XV .
m ost no ns of rel tionshi p the a is g n ted beco m ing a t

u a , u a ,
a r.
I both cl sses the l sing h a t

n a , ste m fi l The bl
o o. . as ar as -
na . a
g m e
sing is of-p ec li r form
. tion ; d the fin lu
g isadro p p ed a an a
‘
in the nomin ti e sing l r a v u a .
202 N m i g t.i s i as; r li

o k e a
na
t? m a d oer ou n ,
.
,
‘ ’
I .
fl ka r tr d a i li n g - tr bhyd m ka r tr bhi s
D . i n? ka r tr e W ka r tr bhya s
4 61 1
“ a al :
“V -v i » Ab .
a ii jg
‘
k a r tu r ( or -
as
)
i
R
fQ
A
m m
l
b
av
G .
“
-
k a r tr o s ka r tf zi d m
L .
ai fi f t ka r ta r i mgs
e
ka r trsu
2 03 . T wo no ns f rel tionshi p
u o a , fi s t sister
,
“
dH m
g
”
, an .
,
gr n dson follow this declension ; m kes the l

’
bu
‘
t G
3
"
a a ce .
, p a .
E
EK sva sr- s .
The no ns f gency
2 04 . someti m es sed p rtici p i lly
u o a a re u a a ,
or w ith djecti e l e The corres p onding feminine stem is m de

a v va u .
-
a
in t i d d eclined lik e a fi ; th s Gif f k t i

“
,
an u , ar r .
2 0 5 The gr m m ri ns p rescribe
. com p lete ne ter d eclension
a a a a u
also for b ses in g p recisely n logo s with th t of

a ,Hg a a u a or
“
b t s ch for m s
u r re
u a re a .
a ry XV
Voca b l u .
w a rm ; 1
R
a gi Fl
‘
-
'
t e c ti o n to t ke ef ge with
,
a r u
p erfor m do , .
Lesson XV .
Su b t s 3
11 n step
. .
a “ . U » . W te cher M l
? m .
,
a ia n “
m i n ” p en nce ex a
p i tion a .
7,
d oer m k er thor ;
l"
M }
i 3}m
9
i
.
El .
, ,
a ,
au as H m ” s u p p o r t e r , p r e s e r ve r ; lord
6
dj
a d oing m k ing
.
, ,
a . h sb nd ;
u stera ma .
m m time .
,
.
( f a ? m p rotector .
,
.
M (W W
§
\ V T f gr cio sness
.
, p it y a u ,
.
3
5 13 “ m tri l l w i t J J .
,
a , a -
su a a Am
/ ,
c am .
m gi er ; dj . genero s
,
v as a .
,
u .
W m p nisher go ernor .
,
u , v . V:
2
m sc m p rog e .
,
a ,
u .
Hg m cre tor .
, a .
{g m seer thor .
( of ,
V edic ,
au honor glory ( f t
n .
, ,
o en as am
b ooks ) ; seeing ’
dj as a ,
. i n d ec l, w . .
f ly
ol
m g m cre tor .
,
a .
Adj
W m d ecision ; cert in t y .
,
a .
f
{ t} , f .
p oor .
3 3 m le d er .
, a .
at f,
. best most excellent
,
“fi g a m le rned m p d i t
‘ ‘
.
, a an un . better ( w .
f o lly
’
“
Ex erc ise XV .
g fi fl fi lfl m ‘
a f fi
‘
fl g i fl t fi l
u fii qu f a a rrfi g w
si
afi
’
i
t ns l
’
v n l
m w arrfi ri fl a m m §i
’
w a rfa % fi tfi m
' ’
fi
{fi m fi m fi ls l a gfi a fi wm ia l fi rfi
Hfi
m
g fi n m wfi ls lu fi m m fl w afifi
W fi m w
'
’
m zm l a
gw t a qfl i fi fi fi
w flfi
r m zn e n
ord s often re p e ted to gi e intensi e a distrib ti e

W a re a , v an v ,
u v ,
or re p etition l m e ning So here

a t e ery ste p The p a a .
“
a v
”
. o
sitio f fl i ery n s l ; it wo ld n t r lly follow E li a

u o
‘ ’
s v u u ua u a u a .
L b l s p p ly being oc . a so . u
“ ”
.
68 Lesson X V X VI . .
Let the wife lo e h h sb nd 1 1 Let the w r riors follo w

10 . v er u a . . a
th ie rle ders d fight with the enemy

a 1 2 At the i
an th b y . r ve r e o
is to m eet his t w sisters 1 3 The w orld w cre ted by o . as a
the cre tor 14 I the ho ses of p io s gi ers l m s is gi en to

a . . n u u v a v
a scetics 15 King Bhoj w (WG

. genero s to w r d the thor
. a as u a au
( l )
oc f the
. e logies
o 1 6 Let ser nts lw y s beu sef l to (fi x ) . . va a a u u
m sters rotection bet e o rsel es ‘ 5

th ie r 17 F
a p ( ) k y . or are a a u v
to the gods the p rotectors f the p i 3

,
1 8 Men li e by the
2
o ous
l
. . v
gr cio sness of the cre tor 1 9 O genero s

a u the p oor ben d a . . u o ne,
bf th !
e or e 20 The m le d s his sisters to the city ( p
ee . an a a ss .
L e sso n X VI .
s c j g ti
206 . P s t Op t t i e Act i
Ve r b The
, a- on u a on . r e en a v ve .
p resen t o p t ti e is for m ed fro m the gener l p resent stem b y t h

a v a -
e
a d dition f mo d e sign fter w hich

o a se d secon d ry end -
, a a re u a
ings ( in 3 d p l t 3 11: in l t sing m i d w in 3 d p l m i d

r . ac . a s, s . . a ,
r - . .
( t
“
i
) After
ran stem this
. m o d e sign in ll oices is i i an a -
,
-
,
a v ,
“
u n ccente d which blen d s with the fin l to 11 ( ccente d

a
,
a a e a or
not ccor d ing to the ccent of the ) d the Q is m int ne d

.
‘
, a a a : an a ai
u nch nge d before owel ending (Q R W m

a a r n a ) by a v -
, , , e
me ns f interp osed e p honic Elly The inflection i the cti e

a o an u . n a v
v oice is follo w s as
1 a? “ d y ca e a m H aw ca d eva ca d em a
2 3 2R d va es 3 2 7m; ca de t a m 32 3 va d e ta
W d et Haw
’
3 ca va d e ta m ca deyu s
Simil rly m a , vi pé a
y m ,
"
Gr
am
’
n a hyeya m , W
cor a
’
y y
e a m etc ,
.
Lesson X VI .
S n b st me l a a nd gifts to the Br ah
N
'
J fi
'
m .
,
f .
,
b ll steer co w ;
u , ,
f .
,
m ns a .
s p eech .
Adj
fi a n .
,
o x-n t re ; st p i dity
a u u .
m f ,
. m ore gre ter
,
a ,
EN G m .
,
fo dd er h y ,
a . gre test a .
W IT?
! m .
, so n -
i h - la w .
m f , .
0
3m g r nting wishes ;
a
mg f .
,
da u ghter . as f .
,
80 .
Q3 , the f b lo s W a u u on
m u d, bo der co w
S
IT " n -
,
.
, g . .
fi ra m .
, ft r
a he ; d u .
, pa
rents ; p l .
M ,
f .
O
W , b dly rr nge d
a a a
or sed u .
Hg fi i f 3 11 rr nge d sed
, .
0
,
a a , u .
“ m W se m s ge 319 f i n best
3 .
,
i an, a .
,
.
, .
a r e! m .
, brother .
Pr o m :
FTf .
, sh e , it .
m m month .
, Ad v . and Co n j . :
i t“! n p r ai
m n p rotection .
if " .
mg n ob l tion to the m
.
, an a a n es,
a cco m p l i d by s crifici l
an e a a a
Exe rc ise XVI .
fi w fi fl gfi m fi m m fi la l a w m w
fi a n w fi fi fi f s fim ls l m m mu m afi g sl
n
m a t? w arm
’
fi
’
W rrfi t fi r I in fir . ni t m filt
Predic te Pl y a . a u
p on words thro gho t u u th e v erse .
Lesson X VI . X VI I .
71
m i m a fii a lem s ffl m : f n wtw
g a t
gm fa
m II R II ‘
13 . m ny c ttle d
By B s a bh a d a t ta , so n - i n - l
aw of N ah a p an a , a a an
v ill ges d m ch money w ere gi en to the Brahm ns 14 Tho

a an u v a . . u
sh lt gi e the m other s je w els to the sisters ( p t d

a v 15 Let
’
o . an .
the co chm n bring (Err g ) fo d der for the horses ; let him not tor
a a -
ment the horses 16 Of the f ther s p ro p erty gre ter p rt is to

. . a
’
a a a
be gi en ( i m ) to the el d est f the brothers 17 C hil d ren bring

v e . o . .
“
,
w ood d w ter into the ho se d ily ; th s w the f ther s com

an a u a
”
u as a
’
m nd 18 Let t h co w s gr e in the forest 1 9 Let both li e

a . . e az . . v on
the m il k (i t ) f the bl ck w 20 The w gon is dr wn by

ns r. o a co . . a a
t w o steers 2 1 The seer rejoices o er the p ir (i t ) f w hite

. . v a ns r . o
steers 22 H ri d i m rry t w o sisters the d ghters of Ra m

. . a an a a ,
au a .
L e s s o n X VII .
f r s
2 I0 j g ti
. P
Ve b t Op t ti e M i d dl
, a c on u a on . r e se n a v e. The
o p t ti e mi d d le ( w
a v
e) f stems forme d sho w
a n o a -
,
as in the
p rece d ing lesson is inflected follo w s , as :
3 5 rd l W m fi
’
a bh er a n
l
'
3 a bh e ta l
d bh eya ta m
.
< fl
Simil rl y y 3 16 1
3 51a i g y h y etc c or e
’
a . s a r z a cc e a , .
D ecl s i The stem i fi f shi p bo t is entirely reg ‘ ’

‘
en on . .
, , a ,
l r t k ing thro gho t the nor m l en d ings

u a ,
a gi en in § 9 0 u u a , as v .
Th s m W u :W et i
c “ Ta M:
t 3 m : : °
: a
e c° 1
fi fifl t
72 Lesson X VI I .
The stems ending in long o w els (a n t Hi ) f ll into

2 I2 . v ,
“
, a
t w o w ell m r k ed cl sses A
-
at st e m s mostl y monos yll b ic
a : . r oo - a
an d th e i mp d s w ith
r com p r ti el y sm ll n mber f others
co oun , a a a v a u o
inflected li k e them ; B d r i ti f e m i i st e m s in a n d i . e va ve n ne an ,
with f w in a infle te d li k e m m Hg} d a m The stems

e c .
an .
of cl ss A t k e the orm len dings thro gho t w ith op tion l ex

a a n a u u
,
a
ce p t i in
ons d t b l gen d loc sing fem
a . d,
w ith
a
t inserte
. d -
.
,
an . . .
,
an
“
before m f the gen p l The sim p le wor d so no ns with . . a re as u
few exce p tions fem ; djecti es ( r re) d in djecti e com . as a v a , an a v
p o n ud s they coinci d e i m sc d fem forms The d eclension f

,
n a . an . . o
the sim p le w or ds in E: d 3 7 h been gi en (in l8 9 l97) ; “
an as v ,
those in WT r re th t it is t p ossible to m k e p whole

are a a no a u a
scheme of forms i n ct l a ua u se .
2l3 W hen y .root in W T or i a is fo nd fin

an l member “
or u as a
of com p o nd word these root fi l

a u tre ted follo w s ,
- na s a re a as
1 Roots in a n lose th t
. owel before o w el en d ings exce p t in a v v -
,
the strong c ses d in the p la w hich is li k e the nomin ti e

an a ce. .
,
a v .
Th s f a g t u m f ll p rotecting
u ,
- .
,
.
,
‘
a -
’°
Sing . D ua l . Pl r l u a .
I .
fa w n vi cva p -
d fa a fi a ‘ ' vi eva p -
os rm
2 I4 oots i i d Bi ch nge their fin l o w el before

. 2 . R n
“ "
an a a v ,
vo w el en d ings into i t d q if b t
- conson nt p rece d e the fin l
,
“
an , u o ne a a
vo w el ; b t if t w more conson nts p rec d e the ch nge is into

u o or a e ,
a
{ 2 1 \
d 3 3
an
C
Th s Eta a?! m f corn b y ing nom a a u ,
-
.
,
.
,
‘ -
u
’
: .
-
vo c .
afi fi q m
a
, f a cc ; “ J
i
m . f street
‘
swee p er m sing ” .
,
‘ -
’
: no . .
w , a cc.
m
El .
Lesson X VI I .
Vo c a b l
aryu XVII .
Ve b r s I :
n ( r a m a te
)
’
a m se oneself
u .
t ;
a (p ) ex
u rn
p ect f a ( i d m ra ti ksa te . v r a ti ce se from
) a
Wfi I ( p oet ce se ’
WQ bh i d ti
‘
‘
i - - a nan a ,
. a .
t ) rejoice in greet with j y Q T a fl ( ) follow

’
J ‘ a n u tzsth a ti
“
- e ,
o r o u t,
cco m p lish a .
Su b t s . : fi n frien d (
ra . m . 43 h “
W g r d en m
m) ga b ttle
r
t;
n .
,
a a n .
, a .
i fi f q f gric lt. re
,
a u u .
a rfma z
‘
tr d e ‘
n .
,
a .
Saf a d
'
life
‘
n .
,
.
f q fi : m r le ; f t
‘ '
.
,
u a e .
( W
fl ea m comm n d .
, a .
1
3 “ m f ther i .
, a -
n -
la w .
W T Q c ttle r ising n .
,
a - a .
A dj
W 3 3 d omestic p riest ch
3)"
p ,
a Hg , f .
0
3 11 , good p le s nt de r ; , a a , a
l in
a . as n . su s b t fort ne .
, u .
Ha m e ting n .
, a . f i n d o btf l ;
.
V
, u u nu
m ser nt .
, va . ste dy a .
11 W d e th n .
, a .
Ex e rc ise XVII .
fa i n g m ? m u u e} u m afia w as "
w a ft fi lm : u m ga n la na t?a t : 313 23 3 3 f a sfi wzrfa s

’
1
W : 1 16 m m ? 3 2 11 : m
’
m m fm sfin n
m é
’
W 3 m m a t
fi fi ls lé fi wi m é nrfi sm s lwfz n swm m fi fi s fi a

'
in i m sfi i a m
‘
a r I u I s um a c W 3 g ’
fi f sfl t
‘
s
‘
t. I a m nfifi
'
y w fi mfi i fi t n is i cii i i a i
‘
”
i m
‘
a e n i
m m m gufi i m a qfi m l j wfi wfi fi t éfi m
t
m i e nfi g m nqo nw fi Gi m me"
“
Ru le for an a scetic who is to

, p ut a si d e l
al e rthly desires
a
a nd
p a ssions .
74 Lesson X VI I X VI I I . .
Let fo dd er be bro ght ( WT E) ( p t i m ) by the brother

12 . u -
o .
,
u.
for the horses f the ll p rotecting king 13 M y ye good

o a -
. . a se e
fort ne u m y ye cq ire ( Elli ) glory 14 The king with a a u . .
his W rriors crosse d the a in shi p 1 5 Tell ( p t i m ) where sea a . . o .

,
u .
o ur frien ds m y meet w ith their broth ers 1 6 Y m y m se a . . ou a a u
y o rsel es
u in the g r d en b t vce se e ting ( bl f m ) the fr its a ,
u a a a . o u
(g ) en 1 7 M y est tho . be s ed by the llp rotec t or fro m t hy

. a u av a -
misfort ne 1 8 To d y let the k ing s two sons b consecr te d

u . .
-
a
’
e a
( pot i m ) y
b .the,
ho se p riest u{ 1.9 Ye both sh l l greet (p t u -
. . a o
i m ) yo r p ents
u . 20 I t w e t w o sho l d s p e k ntr th then we
u ar . . u a u u ,
sho ld be p nishe d by the k ing 2 1 M y I conq er the enemies

u u . . a u
w ith m y br e w rr ors th s is the k ing s w ish ( { EL av a i : u

’
u se
22 M y we recei e the re w r d f irt e

. a v a o v u .
L e sso n X VIII .
f
d
s ti2l
5 The chief p oints to be notice d in the form
. Ca u a ve .
a tion f c s ti e stems h e been gi en lre d y ( in Less V I I ) ;

o au a v - av v a a .
some dd ition l ones follo w a a .
4
2 IS Most roots in WI d a
. dd q before the conj g tion an a u a
sign ; th s st un ts from 13 1 ; W e ; n ma fi t ; m i n ts fro m

u ,
3 1 3 “ m k es 8 1111 115 1 ; W d 13 1 so m etimes fi mfl fi l etc some

“ ‘
. a an , ,
.
,
times fi W f i l etc 1 111 d rink m k es W -

( ,
tho gh from .
,
‘ ’
,
a as u
t il ) A fe
. w roots in d i t k e the s me 1 wit h rio s an a a ,
va u
irreg l rities th s m m from a ffixK

u a : u ,
-
.
q
2 I7 Me d i l initi l 3 ?in light sy ll ble is commonly length
. a or a a a
ened b t sometimes rem ins nch nge d Th s t itt W

,
u ; a u a . u ,
-
,
3 51 m m; i n most roots in
m t W u B t wt d an
“
a . .
. u . an ,
F ri I t l
l EHE
L ,with other r rer
‘
ones
,
gener lly kee
‘
p the i t short
,
a , a
th s mt W ra
u , ,
Lesson X VI I I . 75
2 I8 . F in l owels t ke
a v a ur d dhi before th s u ,
“
3
5 m m
, ;
m sfit
“
3 i , .
Some erbs f c s ti e me ning

2l
9 .
b y form tion de
v o au a v a are a
nomin ti es th s 1:11m a p rotect

v c lle d c s ti euto 2 m ; ffi ,
‘ ’
, a au a v
u n fit to I ii ; W . e to it ; m n
w a ta t
3 1 , .
o 7 .
2 20 F the p ssi e f c s ti es
. or Less X a v o au a v , se e . .
2 2 I The c s ti es f intr nsiti e erbs

. tr nsiti e The
au a v o a v v are a v .
c s ti es f tr nsiti e erbs
au a v constr ed sometimes ( ) with two
o a v v are u a
acc s ti es so m etimes ( 6) w ith

u a v ,
f the object d i an a ce . o an an n
t l f the gent Th s he c ses the bir d s to t the “

t
s rum en a o a . u ,
au ea
c k es m y be rendered either ( ) I HW R fi ng m g m
a
”
a a :
,
or ( )
b f a sfi : f u o
a m
i 2 22 . Pa r t i c i p les
The gener l p rtici p i l en dings fl fi. a a a are
\
( we k form
a m et) for the cti e d W T? for the mi d d le B t a v ,
an . u
a fter tense stem in i t the cti e s ffix i irt lly 1 1

a -
,
a v u s v ua «
, one
f th t w o i t being lost ; d the middle s ffix is FI T-1 ( ex

’
“
o e s an u
cep t W sometimes in c s ti e for m s) . Th s m bh t au a v u

’
a ua n
—
, ,
di y t fi a
gm fl r m
’
t da t t bh a
a i a
;
ln
y , ; H a v an , t c cor a an va
ma etc F the d eclension f the p rtici p les in W

na , . or belo w o a
.
se e ,
Less XX I I I . .
1 2 23 P f th F i t P s
. The p ronomin l declension
r on o u n o e rs er on . a
exhibits so m e striking p ec li rities w hich t e sily ex p l ine d u a are n o a a .
The p rono n of the first p erso i declined th s

u n s u
Sing D l Pl r l
. ua . u a .
m m
w ant i t .
su m
m a m : a
.
mm , W
Lesson X VI I I .
t
w
,
224 . The forms t n 3 m lt , ,

a re en c t i c,
0
a nd a re ne er v
u sed a t the beginning f sentence or before the o a , p a rticles a “
rono
t 2 25 . In p u ns of the first d second p ersons the p l ral is an u
o ften se d f the u or sing l r Prono ns ( d other wor d s well )

u a . u an as
sho w in S ns k rit a a c rio s ten dency to gree in form w ith the

u u a
p re d ic te r ther th a a a n w ith the s bject to which they refer u .
Voca b l
a ry u XVIII .
Ve rbs , wi t h c s au a t i ve : s fl c
di e ; s ( m a d y ti) k ill
au r a
c s c m ke fl at s cri fi ce ; c s
' ’
( i ) (y j y ) i
“
eat a l a t
i
‘
‘
Q ; au . a
y a a a au . a a
ea t; gi e v to e a t . m k e to s crifice ; off er s crifice

a a a
W st dy re d ; c s
u ,
a au .
(a for
ti ) te ch a § + wfi i in c s ( bh i a d y ti)
'
dhyap a ya a . au . a v a a
333
c s
i“ ( k l
p d y t
aui t ) m ke
.
; a a ,
-
e a greet .
or d in p p oint a ,
a .
f a g k no w ; c s ( d dy ti) i h au . ve a
in (j y )t i
c a n s. beget ana
'
a . form
in c s fi
( j p y ) d i + fi l in inform
‘
fi a a t
“
t 5 11 i au . a ca ns .
comm n d a .
( dh t ) gro w ; c s (
ua r
'
a e
(fl y au . va r -
o m
1 1 gi e ; c s ( p y ) m k e dh yd ti t ) m k e g w ; b i g p
'
d ti
3 v a au a a a a e a ro r n u
-
.
, .
gi e p y GIR in h d ) torment
v or a .
L ( y t
c a us
y t i . c a a .
gfl ; i se e ( d p yd t i )
n ca n s sho w . ar a .
g he r ; in
a
( c a y ti ) m k e
ca ns . r ca
'
a a
1 3I T -
. tl fi in c s d h a p y )
d ,
ti au .
'
a he r i e recite p rocl im (
a , . .
, a a cc.
m k e p t on clothe in (tw
a u ,
o
v
fl + fl q le d w y ( c s p
'
a a a au . a a E rr st n d ; in a
( th a d
p y ) t i ca n s . s a
na
y y i)
t
a
'
a .
p t u p l,
ce ; pp oint ; t p
a a s e .
in c s s p re d ti sth t ) st rt ff ; in
INT au .
( p r a th dya ti ) a , I t (p ra a e a o
p rocl im a . c s (p thap y ti ) sen d

au . ras
'
a a .
The p riest w ho p erforms s crifice for the benefit of nother ,

a a
p ers o is s i d to m
n k e th t p erson s crifice tho
a gh the “
a a a
”
,
as u
l tter ( w ho is c lle d W
a ) w ere celebr ting the s crifice f a a a or
himself .
78 Lesson X VI I I . XI X .
p oet recite ( W u se
) e
a log y of V i
u sn 24 W torment u. . e o ur
he rts with wishes

a . 25 . Both schol rs greet the te cher
a a .
l L e sso n X IX .
22 6 . Pr o n o u n of t h e S e c on d P e r s o n This .
p rono n ( for w hich u
the n ti es ss me a v a u fi g a n d a in
g g as b ses) is decline d th s
a u
Sing l r u a . D ua l . Pl r l u a .
N a n .
em a“
A '
W , m 1 W
3 3 1K ,
w ,
W
L W ra m rm
{ -
D
W , 3 EU
R W W R, W
Ab .
W T .
G .
a n,
as “ , W g
na
w . W
L .
a fix w g i
The forms 3
2 27 .
, W , W a re enclitics s bject to the
, u
s m e r les RT fl etc
a u as
”
, , .
228 . Th e Pr o n o u n of P e r so n ( for w hich the n a ti ves

th e Th i r d
a ss m u e b se
Hg as a the b a se is re a ll y a ) is declined a s follo w s
( note nom sin g m .
, . and
M s li a cu ne
Sing D l . ua . Pl r l
u a .
N .
as
“
v ii
A .
HR
”
1 c m W flu
D Ha su re at ! ?
Ah '
m 77 i)
L .
m fig mg
is m d e lmos t entirely by the geniti e c se not by deri ti e

a a v a , a va v
p ossessi e d jecti e B t oftenvthe nem a

p h tic p ossessi e p rono
v n . u u a v u
o f the E nglish is o m itted in S ns k rit a .

Lesson XIX .
N eu te r
3
n 37
m fig : et c., a s i n the m a s culi n e.
The m sing m sc m
22 9 . d its com p o nd m
no lose . . a .
, an u ,
their fin l a before y conson nt ; before o w els d t the d

a an a v ,
an a en
of sentence they follow the s l e p honic r les Th s G 1 1

a ,
u ua u u . u ,
fi fa , 11 fi rs fa ; n ( W ; tit m fa ; fi re e: .
The third p erson l p rono n is sed oftenest

23 0 . we k a u u as a a
or indefinite de m onstr ti e es p eci lly ntecedent to rel ti e ;

a v , a as a a a v
an d often li k e the E nglish definite rticle “

a .
”
23 l Li k e a . declined ( ) Q R this formed by p fi i g

are : a ,
‘ ’
,
re x n
q
‘
to the forms f 3 thro gho ; th so nom sing ,
m “ a f mu ut u ,
. . .
, .
,
11 .
mg ( ) ; 6 the el ti e p rono n ( d d j)
r fl which
a vwho ; u an a .
‘ ’
,
‘ ’
() 0 co m p r ti es d sa
p erla ti es
v from p r
anonomin l roots u s ch a v a , u
as fl at w hich ( f the , d m o w hich (of the an

‘
So W ; m a n one f m ny ; a w other with i t ’

d W ‘ ‘ ’
“
an o a , s
co m p r ti e W a a 5 d Wv d i ff erent Y t other words

an
‘ ’
. e are
so inflected b t w ith m inste d f mg in m ,

u sing a o no .
-
a cc .
-
vo c . .
ne t u .
Ha fi g
: a s, l l ; c an ,
in p l some, ; 3
‘
3 12
a 1 f ’
1 fi ‘
o ue
’
,
.
‘ ’
, .
°
( only sing d both . an

‘ ’
.
2 3 2 The interrog ti e p rono n El i ( for w hich the H ind s gi e

“
. a v u u v
the b se a
W ) follows as p recisel y the declension f 3 exce p t o ,
no m . sing e t f i g ; m sing m m f a n
-
a cc . . n u . no . . .
, . .
2 3 3 A n m ber of w . ords follow the p ronomin l declension in

u a
so m e f their i g i fi ti
o o p tion lly ; b t in other senses
s n ca o n s, or a u
,
or
w itho t known r le l p se into the djecti e inflection S ch

u
0
u , a a v . u a re
.
co m p r ti es d s p erl ti es from p re p osition l ste m s

a a v an u W a v a ,
as
‘
low r “ 11 I w t ; t i t chief
e
’
,
‘
oe rlier W es
’
pp r ‘ ’
,
‘
a
’
,
‘
u e
’
,
80 Lesson XI X .
‘
northern { f a n so thern etc O cc sion l forms f the p
’
,
‘
u
’
, . a a o ro
nomin l declension a met with from n mer l djecti es d from are . u a a v ,

an
other w ords h ing some w h t f n mer l ch r cter av W a o a u a a a ,

as
m i h lf etc
‘
‘
f we
’
,
a
’
,
.
2 34 P ec li r i t i s i . th f l ti
u a
p s t The e n e u se o re a ve r on o un , e c.
S nsk rit often p ts the rel ti e cl se before h ntece d ent cl se

a u a v au t e a au ,
d inserts the s bst nti e to w hich the rel ti e refers into the
“
an u a v a v
s me cl se wit h the rel ti e inste d f le ing it in the ntecedent

a au a v , a o av a
cl se I tr sl ting into S nskrit

au . n anrel ti e cl se is to b
a a ,
a a v au e
p l ce d
a either before fter the whole ntecedent cl se ; or a a au
b t u not inserted into the ntecedent cl se is d one i a au , as n
E g li h
n Th s the m o nt in w hich we w y esterd y is ery
s . u ,
“
u a sa a v
high w o l d b in S ns k rit either a t qé ei a zj a} m

”
u e (a a :
it
v a as a w i t h s ui t: “ a n
or :
6 1 m m ; b t m t a
“
u e
fi fi f a i a ?m
i I z etc ccording to the E g l
i h i d iom ,
.
, a n s .
2 35 The rel ti e w ord m y st nd n y w here in its cl se ;

. a v a a a au
th s fill? m
u , 3 the go ds w hose chief is i “
a
”
.
Sometimes rel ti e d emonstr ti e d erbs a v se d eq i lents

or a v a v a re u as u va
o f cert in c se forms of rel ti e

a a d emonstr ti e p rono ns ; th s
-
a v or a v u u ,
as a?
“
w e re .
The re p etition f the rel ti e gi es indefinite me ning

23 6 . o a v v an a
‘
w hosoe er w h te er The s me res lt is m ch m ore commonly
v ,
a v
’
. a u u
a tt ine d by d ding to the rel ti e the interrog ti e p rono n w ith

a a a v a v u ,
( or less ,
s ll y witho t ) u f the
ua
p rticles a fl fl fi g a f fix
,
u one o a
,
'
, , ,
Sometimes the interrog ti e lone is sed w ith these p rticles a v a u a
i n simil r sense Th s ; m m u f a w h te er this wom n

a a . u
“
a v a
rel tes ; eh I re: 311 m m

a
” “
w h te er y one s d is p osition m y “
a v an
’
a
fl 3 7a f e m he gi es to some other ; m “
v one or
”
W 3 ? a n d he t k es fro m one wh te er
“
a no a v
”
.
Lesson XIX .
Vo ca b l
a ry XIX u .
Ve r b s i s p e k ; n me ; in c El sa y , a a au s .
m sit ; in c s p l ce ( d y ti ) m au ke ( written. le a . v ca
'
a a a
)
af
I ! “ drin k ; in c s (p d y y ti ) s p e k i e re d '
au . a a a ,
. . a .
gi e to drink w ter 8 3 ( l t ) en d re
'
v ,
a . sa za e u .
rotect in c s (p y ) m
ld s cceed i c s
’
p ; d t ; au . a z u n au .
p rotect .
( d d bd y t ) p erform cq ire s a z
’
, a u .
fl
”
rejoice ; in c s (p i nd y ) a
t k ill ; c s (g h d t dy ) t
au h . r a z
’
au .
’
a z av e
m k e rejoice p le se
a k ille d ,
a . .
fi f ; in c
ea r s b
( sy
ki d t bb d y d 5 1 c ll ; i au . h a e, a n ca n s . av e
g t a
) terrify e frighten c lled ,
. a .
Sub t s m .
, com p nion hel p er a , .
W n .
, b siness co cern
u ,
n .
i f“ m .
,
n.
p god r .
,
a .
Haw f .
, n.
p r .
Wfi I f - .
,
g it ; ref ge a u .
m m foot leg
.
, n .
, ,
.
5 ? n . mbrell
,
u a .
m ilk
gm n., .
Q a éfl f
‘ ‘
.
,
n .
p r .
,
K r s na ’
s m other
E fiZ é
‘ ‘
e rth f .
, a .
f ?
a ” witho t u ( w . i nstr . or a m ;
Efi p refix to p ro p er n am es f ten
‘
, as ,
o
h the m e ning f mo s
as a
‘
a u
’
,
‘
ho
n o r a bl
e
Ex ercise XIX .
W m i m fi fe fl fi z fi wfi
‘
t a
nfi u fi t fil
fl fi lufi zm mfi ue n
u fa a f a a f cra fi f e a ‘
fl n t f wfl um a fi e m
fi a w fim
P y S k it P im
e rr
fi ifi
, a ns r
a
r er.
m r fi m el m wu
82 Lesson XIX . XX .
m u m W a m fi n fi i éfi a wm u lg w g e
z vr
fl a le t fi t w fiwfi fa fi amn m nfi n i
g a a i
W é m
’
fim m mé fi rzta m w an na
'
"
t c l
m fi W W
‘
zufl le lm i afi a fi aa W H W
wa lqo u Re f u si ng W T WW F I QQ I ne
w
W fi a fim qa lfi fi m t m fi m m g w fi m
The h sb n d f of w ho 6
th a t i
’ 2 1
15 .
(g ) K a lu
y a ( l )a m o en u sa oc ,
( l foom ) R.a m w
e born is c lle d D c t ha
3
1 6 The te cher
as
“
,
a
8
a ara a
7
. . a
"
rejoices t thy d iligence ( bl) 17 W h y (ai m ) s p e kest t h

3
a
1 2
a . . a ou
so ? 1 8 O thers th n w co ld not en d re this s ff ering 1 9 The

. a e u u u . .
te cher te ches
a holy w rit d the l w b ook 20 M y ll
a
”
us -
an a -
s . . a a
8
those k ings who p rotec t th i s bjects ccording to (3 13 p t

7 2 1 6
e r u a
4
, os
p )
os the. l w ( ) b i t i a 2 1 The
3
fr its of
a cc ll.these e v c or o us
g
. . u a
trees sweet 22 M y the glory of llwomen w ho honor th i

a re . . a a , e r
h sb n ds incre se
u a 23 I ,
t his kingdo m the king s p nishment
a . n
’
u
t ifi
err the w ic k ed 24 W hich of the t w o fr its d y wish ? 25 My
es . . u o e .
f ther h d gold gi en to m co w s to thee to th other brother

a a v e, , e
nothing .
L e sso n XX .
D 237f St m s i C s
. t e cl s i
All no n ste m s in
en on o e n on on a n s. u -
conson nts m y w ell b cl ssed together since the p ec li rities

a a e a ,
u a
sho w n by some concern only the stems themsel es d not the v , an
en d ings M sc lines d fe m inines f the s me fin l

. a uinflected an o a a a re
p recisely li k e ; d ne ters p ec li r (
a s lly in t h other
an u a re u a as u ua e
Other th n tho a u
”
. W ith W ,
as with co m p r ti es the a a v ,
a bl ti e is sed
a v u .
M kes re d “
a us a (wfiq g -
‘
c a us
Lesson XX . 83
declensions) only i n the m f ll mbers B t the no .

-
a cc .
-
vo c . o a nu . u
m joritya f conson nt l stem form o S p eci l feminine stem by

a a s a a
a dding i ( ne er WT) to the we k form of the m sc line v a a u .
2 3 8 V ri tions . bet w een stronger d we ker forms

a a , as an a ,
a re
v ery gener l in conson nt l stems either of strong d we k stems

a a a : an a ,
or o f strong mi d d le d w e k est The endings

,
thro gho t the
,
an a . are u u
n or m l ones (I ntro d a .
,
2 3 9 The gener l l w concerning fin l conson nts is

. afollo w s a a a as
1 The m ore s l etymologic lfin ls q g q T a

“ “
. u ua a a a re , , , , ,
H
E R z , ; s p or d,ic q L L
E “ fin ls a are , ,
as a .
2 I gener l only one conson nt f wh te er kind is llo w

. n a , a , o a v , a
ed to st n d t the end of wor d ; i f two or more w o l d ty m

a a a u e o
logic lly occ r there the l st i dro p p ed

a u d g in the l st , a s , an a a a ,
u ntil b t one rem ins u a .
3 Of the non n s l m tes

. on ly the first in e ch series the
-
a a u ,
a ,
non sp ir te s rd is llowed fin l ; the others s rd p

-
a a u ,
da as a u as .
,
an
both son nts reg l rl y con erted into this where er they
a are u a v ,
v
wo ld etymologic lly occ r

u a u .
4 A fin l p l t l beco m es either a ( l often )

°
g a
b a a a
g ;
,
or ,
or e ss
b t
gu i n ery few c ses (awhere it
v re p resents origin l $1
) b a a e
co m es FL
2 40 According to 2 3 9 2. the q of the m m sing m d .
,
o . .
, . an
f is lw ys lost ;
.
,
a d rreg l rities f tre tment f the ste m fi
a an l i u a o a o -
na ,
i n this c se t infreq ent

a , are no u .
2 4 I Before the p d endings

.
m m m d (
j stem a a -
, , , an , a
fin l is tre ted in extern l com b in tion

a a as a a .
2 42 An s p ir te m te is ch nged to its corres p onding non

. a a u a
a s p ir te before nother non n s l m te

a sibil nt ; it st nds
a -
a a u or a a a
u n ltered only before owel or semi owel n s l H enc s ch

a a v v or a a . e u
a m te is do bled by p fi i g its o w n corres p onding non s p ir te

u u re x n -
a a .
243 C s a t s t e m s o f o f m i a d " B
on on n
g 1 2 an e
- ne or
. n
6 , ,
*
6
84 : Lesson XX .
fore o
both s u ffi x a l lil
a and ‘
a\ as stem -
fi n a ls become g ; I i as
stem fi l beco m es 1 -
na . E x m p les ma : m .
,
‘
w in d ; 3 IR ’
f .
,
‘
misfort ne ; E1W u
’
n .,
‘
the w orl d ’
.
Sing . Pl r l
u a .
m | m m | m fia u
A .
aa m m
l nm u
I .
m | m la m n
D .
A b . 3 11 m l m u 1)
A
G
W lm m m HR
El -
u
'
o
a, n
L .
W i sm
-
m" m um m m
n n
F or the 1 inserted in nom .

-
a cc .
p l . ne ter cf
u ,
.
p h a l
a m
‘ ’
,
ma
dh a m ,
'
etc .
roots when fin l son nt s p ir te ( H “a at

2 44 . In a fe w ,
a a a a a
\
,
“
a lso g rep resenting a ) loses its sp ir tion ccord ing to 23 9 3

, a a a .
,
2 42 the initi l son n t conson nt ( 1 3 ) becomes s ir te

L g
“
,
a
p ; a a , ,
or a a
th s § H nomu sing i i i t ; W E i l2g

,
\
,
.
-
vo c . .
-
,
.
245 Ag m t f d jec ti . s I f the s me djecti e q lify

r ee en o a ve . a a v ua
t w o or m ore s bst nti es it will be se d in their combine d n mber ;

u a v ,
u u
if the s bst nti es m sc line u d feminine a the dj w il l be

v a re a u an ,
a .
m sc ; b t i combin tion of m sc or f m s bjects with ne ter

a . u n a a a . e . u u ,
the djecti e will be ne ter

a v u .
86 Lesson XX . XX I .
W W | 8 I W fl § H I H I H€fi 3 mm
3 fi d i fifl m W i e t w a z (g e n ) fa m
‘
31 I l o
aa
i n fi rm? W EH I
‘ C
a mI m m fi srs f t
e a : sl
m fii z sfi fis : a wfi l c l v fi a f s ew t qm w
'
W ea v ers m fa t qa l w fi fi m fi a rm a i r( m
-
W a lqa l m w m m fi zw fi m s l
nd with the M r ts hi com p nions kille d Vr t
14 . I ra , a u as s a ,
ra .
15 W itho t
. com p nion u
p erform
a diffic l t b sinessa no one ca n a u u .
1 6 One ( p
. i p l) sho ld p l nt trees
ex ll the ro d s for the
r ess n . u a on a a ,
s k e f the sh d e 1 7 Those frien ds w ho

a o tr e in m isfort ne
a . . are u u
are h r d to find in the th worl ds 1 8 The gir d le d the s cre d

a r ee . . an a
cord f Ary ns o to be m d e threefol d ( t d l) 19 P t

a a re a n ea . ua . . u
( Q
“
T ) this stone
c a u s. behind the fire 20 The oce is c lle d by . . an a
the p oets the h sb nd f ri ers 2 1 All s bj ects m st be p rotecte d

u a o v . . u u
( i m ) by t
v. h i kings 2 2 Some f these Br
e r a hm ns le rne d i . . o a are a n
the U p nis ds others i n the l w books

a a ,
a -
.
L e s s o n XX I .
s of C s
2 4 6 D e le n i o n
. t st m sc c t d St m s i p l on o n a n - e , on
’
. e n a a
t lsa t 1 F in l E l f
, e c. ; stem re erts
. to the origin l g
a tt r l o a v a u u a
w hen it comes to st n d w ord fi l d before the p d en d ings a as - na ,

an a a -
,
becoming Q when fin l d before i f d before i i 2 F in l a , an , an . . a
S
L is oftenest tre ted ex ctl y li k e i for c ses of otheratre t a a a
ment below 3 I the roots f m w d w the TL is

,
se e . . n
*
,
an ,
tre te d in the s m w y 4 The Q of g b ecomes EL fter Hi

a a e a . .
“
a
cl ssic l S nskri t not m ny root stems

In a se d inde
a a a -
a re u as
p e d ent s nb st nti es ; b t they u freq ently em

a p loyed w
v ith u are u ,
a djecti e or ( p resent) p rtici p i l

v l e fin l ele m ent f m a a va u , as a o a co
p o nd word
u .
Lesson X XI
'
. 87
th s E g 3 1? f
u ,
s p eech word . . .
,
‘
,
’
; q f .
,
‘
illness f .
,
‘
direction p oint of the co m p ss ,
a
’
Sing . Pl r l u a .
ma m m a g urm u W i m l m n
A .
n
1 .
am lw r l fi m u a r fi u a lt fi um f m
L fi a lfi a lfzfi r u W l fi iil lf i
'
fl l
l
I) ua L
fi lfi fi lf zfl u
m lm m l a u
W i m lm u
in l TL f stem reg l rly beco m es the ling l m te

247 . 1 . F a o a u a ua u
(g 2 ) before
or a
t d
g d w hen word fi l F exce p tions “
an , an - na . or ,
2 The fin l f the root stems ( Ta r le ’

24 6 3 ‘
1
“
b H
“
se e
i a 0 o u
-
. .
, , ,
‘
s crifice a d W with others ; d 3 the fin l g of n m ber
’
, an ,
an . a a u
o f roots tre ted li ke lT bo e Th s fai r m ene m y ;

, a re a
‘
a v . u , .
‘ ’
f “ m p l p eo p le th V ai cy c ste fa g m
’
. . f,
‘
( j)
d ’
,
e
‘
a a , .
, .
,
a .
‘
licking ’
.
Sing . Pl r l u a .
m m u " fm uf wa n fa m u
I .
L fif fin fi i fs n W i mg m l u
D l ua .
fi f t lfarf t "
fm lf s m u
2 48 . Bu t
w m .
,
‘
p riest ’
, t ho gh cont ining the root 1 11
u a .
88 Lesson X XI .
ma kes “ 6
5 etc .
; and G EL f
“
.
,
‘
g rl nd
a a
’
,
tho gh cont ining u a
Vfl m
a x’ kes W etc a .
2 4 9 1 No ns h ing the roots g g b rn d mil k ‘ ’ ‘ ’

3g
‘
. . u av , u ,
an , ,
be hostile
‘
with others fin l element d lso E fi m f ’
a g , ,
as a , an a .
( n am e of cert in metre ) ch nge the fin l a

3 into H i d i
t a , a a an .
Th s aiw g g woo d b rning m k es nom

u ,
‘
i ,
‘ -
u
’
,
a .
- vo c . s n
a nqg g f
’
gr nting w ishes m .sing 3 51113 35
,
‘
m a
’
,
no .
-
vo c . .
, a cc . 0 ,
loc p l g g ; W 3 friend betr ying nom

. .
O
sing fi r i
‘ -
a ,
’
.
-
vo c . - .
w or d s with 7 1 bind fin l element w here ’

2 I
‘
g ia t e c.
g . n
g , ,
as a ,
re p resents origin l i ll the 3 becomes 3 d Pt ; th s “ Ta g f a , an u ,

.
,
‘
shoe s n d l nom ,
sing m a
m a instr ,
d ’
.
-
vo c . .
, a cc .
0
,
. u.
0
33 m ,
lo o p l . . “ IQ .
Vo ca b l
a ry XXI u .
V bs er g ( ) let loose 3 u tsr a j

'
ti or
( :
a in c s ( d m y )ti t me ; au t ; r ise ( the. oice ) a a
'
a a ou a v .
com p el ) embr ce
*
.
fi g + I TF( (p ts j
d t ar v a e a .
g g ( d i hy ti ) be hostile
rz ; o ffen d g n a strike t; .
‘ ‘
ou
3 in c s au be r smite
. a . .
3 ( bh d ti t ) be r s p p ort l it
1 u
ra - e a .
, ,
Su b t s m look gl nce ; eye f .

, ,
a .
W m pl p eo
p p.le in m m enem y .
,
92 . r., a .
, .
I n di a .
m m m te rs .
, a .
3 31 f erse f the Rig ed ; i W

.
, v m bee o v a n .
,
.
p l the
. R
, ig e d
m s w eetness v a . n .
,
.
zfi qq
‘
me d icine n f sick ness d ise se

.
, . .
, ,
a .
afi fi q m m p
‘
m m . gre
, t k ing em p eror
720 . r . .
,
a , .
3 3
as
d f w ther roots w hose n s l is not const nt
an a e o ,
a a a
thro gho t their inflection lose it in the p resent sy stem

u u
,
-
.
90 Lesson X XI . XXI I .
r ise ( p t i m ) hi oice 15 Th t
a o . or mong the p riests is
v. s v . . a one a
c lle d h tr who recites the Rig ed 16 A a t k m st w e r

a o ,
v a . . sn a a u a
shoes d g rl nd an d y mbrell
a 1 7 Among
a m y a ,
an ca rr a n u a . .
“
friends Ra m is the strongest th s S p oke Ra n 18 Let

a
”
: u va a . . an
em p eror k ee p hi ss ls in check (an d p rotect ( t n s va a an
ca us
) the eo
p p . le in l
l the e rth 1 9 I the Rig ed occ rs (w a a . . n v a u
pa ss
) the .U snih 20 The f ther s gl nce fell p on m . . a
’
a u e
21 A mong the betr y ers

. f frien d s is n med ( m a p ) a - o - a a ss .
Vi bh i n 22 The seer p r ises I ndr a ni w ith

sa a . erses f th B ig
. a v o e
ve d 23 The em p eror s m ote hi

a . . enemies ( d t l ) s a cc . , a .
,
or oc .
w ith the swor d 24 I the b ttle K rsn w k ille d b y his . . n a a as en
e m ies 25 M y . enemies be tor m ented by dise ses th s

.
“
a o ur a u
s p oke the Br ahm n i nger a n a
L e s so n XX II .
s
25 0 f S t em i
.
I The stems in I c
d
D e le n i o n
{ 3 s o s n ’ an
'
lengthen the o w el before conson nt en dings d in m singv a -

, an no .
-
.
,
d the a f the nom is lost I the no m sing the fin l S “
an o . . n r -
. a
then becomes a ( i g ) n d er conditions req iring s rd or v sa r a u u a u
as fin l ( 9 5 MG)
a Th s fi rs f oice ; 3 s f city
se e , . u ,
.
,
‘
v
’ '
.
,
‘ ’
.
N V hi fi rf i g f i
‘
. .
s 35 I u II
A .
fi rm W n a a 77
St e m s in H [ in fi fi t d f wu
and
a These m sc an
’
. are a .
and ne t onl y ;
u . the corresp on ding feminine is m d e by d ding t ; a a
th s u , Hfi fi fi f
'
They lose their fin l a before conson nt en dings ; a a -
Al m ost an
y no n u
0
in 3 ! m ay for m a p o sse srve

Q
der t e Q
i va i v
Q 0
w i th
L e s o XX I I
s n .
a nd a lso i the m sin g where the m sc lengthens the

n no .
,
a .
co m p ens tion Th s fl fi rfl m a rich . u ,

.
,
n , .
‘ ’
.
M sc l i N t a u n e. eu e r .
Sing l r D l Pl r l Sing l r D l
u a Pl r l
. ua . u a . u a . ua . u a .
A . ElfW
-
K
I .
‘
afifi n
'
m m Q
‘
fi fi IQ - as i n t h e m a sc ulin e
V .
m
25 2 . D e r i va t i ve st e m s in W 2 ( a W , . The stems f this o
di isionv mostly ne ter ; b t there

a re u u are a few m sc lines d a u an
femi nines T heir inflection i ne rly reg l r f

.
( a h K ET b s a u a or , ,
”
e
fore I t § 2 4 l; for the 1

se e p l p 27 bottom of p ge ) M sc 00 . .
,
.
, a . a .
[ d f
an m ] ste m s i e
W lengthen
. the w in w sing ; d the n no . . an
nom p l .ne -
t lso
a cc. lengthen a t or . or 3 before the inserted
u . a
nasl a Th s m min d ; gfa q obl tion ; u ,

n , .
‘ ’ ‘ '
n .,
‘
a
’
m b w n .
, o
Sing l r D l u a . ua .
sfi m l m u rm ?
“ sfm fi t was) "
1 .
m nefi m lu am u m fi wm l
L .
m fi sn sf a f fl l W u w e re“
Pl r l u a .
N A . .
Ha i ti ” fi ffi l wi f e "
1 .
M l m l w e
fi u
L .
or n a zg or g ra zg 1 3
£ 1 71 II or
25 3 .
m m .
( n me f cert
a i m y thic
o l h r cters ) nom a n a c a a : .
sing W W .
, a cc .
W instr m , m ; .
, vo c .
nom pl “ W.
-
a cc. . .
the s ffix ( t ; th s fro m m n strength W

u h ing i u ,
‘ ’
, ,
‘
av
strength st ong S te m s i fi F L d f qfi
, ery r re r
’
. n ' an
’
a re v a .
92 Less on XX I I .
Adjecti e co m p o nds h ing no ns f thi s cl ss fin l

25 4 . v u av u o a as a
m ember ery co m mo n Th s m f or bly minde d ‘ ’

are v . u , av a -
.
Sing l r D l u aPl r l . ua . u a .
n m f n . . . .
N m . “
m 5 m m ) w e ) g w a “ li f e
A m . “T
R
m ‘
long li ed -
v
’
n e w fl i e s) “
s i t l
em °
2 f fl
Vo ca b l
a ry u XX II .
Ve r b : for sa j ya te)
’
h ng on be f stened a , a
Ga xj
sd a ti but often p a ss : sa
.
j yd te
’
on ( as tho ghts w u .
Sub t s “ fi ll I L , bo w o
m f .
,
he enl y n y m p h
av .
m f . i
p p e,
cond t ,
ui
fi g?f .
,
n .
p r A p s.r s
,
an a a , Ur I!
“ n mil k
.
,
.
va ci .
R f .
, city .
fi afi q m . ing
, k .
36 “ m .
,
n .
p ,
r . P u r u r a va s .
fi lg f
‘
.
, v li
oice ; song
( ing ) cre t re .
W filfit m .
, v a u .
W n N .
I N
, Eeye m p .I ndi .
,
n .
, r .
,
a .
m oon
mind
W I !“ m .
,
. n .
, .
W m py .
, F fi fi i s m m inister .
( f st te ) .
,
o a .
W 1 f bowstring .
,
m s crifici l form l text . n .
,
a a u a, .
m light ; st r ; he enly I ! “ n .glor

, y f me a av n ., , a .
bo dy .
a fi uS L m merch nt ‘
.
, a .
m m p ond a “ n g . a e
94 Lesson XXI I XXI I I . .
i is the eldest
a m ong h i brothers ( l 20 The gods li e a s oc. , . v
by the obl tion 2 1 A m erch nt wishes we ltha w rrior. . a a a a
f mea scetic d eli er nce 22 The wo m n s eyes

, an a s ff sed v a . . a
’
are u u
with te rs a .
L e s so n XX III .
c s25 5 C mp ti
. Adj cti s C o m p r ti e
D e le n i o n d . o a ra ve e ve . a a v a
jec t i of p rim
ve sry form tion h e d o ble for m f ste maf m a av a u o or as
c line d ne ter stronger in m ( s lly W ) in the strong

u an u : a u ua ,
c ses
a d w e ker in 1 1K ( s lly m ) there being no
, an a a u ua ,
d istinction of mi dd le d we k est c ses The sing m sc an a a . vo c . . a .
ends in i n The feminine ste m is m de with i fro m the we k

.
-
a
‘
a
stem form Th s m -
better . u , ,
‘ ’°
M as c uli n e. N eu ter .
Sing . D l ua . Pl r l u a . Sing D l . ua . Pl r l u a .
A W .
i n“ n n
stem fl a g} d eclined li k e W
F em . .
, .
2 5 6 St m i Eta t ( . E
m) f ll einto tsw di isions nA those -
or a o v : .
m de with the s ffi x i t
a
( m)
3 being with f w exce
u p tions cti e “
s
, ,
e , a v
p rtici
a p les p resent d f t re ; d
,
B those m de w ith the p an u u an . a os
i
s e ss ve s ffixes t l-q ( 11a ) d W ( or HQ ) They
u i
“
m sc or an
\
. are a .
d ne ter only the fem being for m ed w i th E

“ '
an u , . .
25 7 A P a t i i p le s i . 3 17 6 (
; W
. E g
r
m mc n or . '
: n .
,
‘
li ing v .
Lesson XX I I I .
Ma sc li u n e. N eu t e r.
Sing . D l ua . Pl r l u a . Sing . D l ua . Pl r l u a .
W h ) fifi di m i ii fia f
-
NN a a? v u v ta v
- s er t
A .
M R 3: n
as i n ma sc uli n e.
L . v fia fi r di a m v ii 4a ;
-
The St rong for m f these p rtici p les is obt ine d me

25 8 . o a a
ch i ll y by
a n cac tting ff the fin ,
l from the 3 d p l up res ( o a r . . or
f t) i d
u . t ; th s n W fi fl
. gi es
ac strong .form f p res t p urt ,
'
v o . ac . a .
m we k “ a ;.f a s f a fi lB fi
La d f a rm ; W a i st a m ,
‘
'
an ,
and m ; m u f fi n g w
r e d
m a n ; W W an
“f a m
— d “f au na
r
q an .
those erbs w hich in the 3 d p l t lose the ( f

25 9 . B ut v r . . ac .
‘ ‘
c o
the s l fTfl ( e g the erbs follo w ing the red p lic ting cl ss
u ua as . . v u a a
in the p resent syste m ) lose it lso in the p resent p rtici p le

-
d ,
a a ,
an
h e av d istinctiono of strong d w e k stem Th s from V3 n an a . u , ,
3 d p l p res i d fi rt ( onl stem for ) nom -

t m
r
g g p y n
Et g i t ac a -
. . . . . .
, c
vo c. m g m sc s
m w . m
a . d
w ,
a cc. no -vo c .
-
a cc . u. ,
p m
l . m m g ne t,
m nod
W p l.
fi
-
g fi t vo c .
-
a cc . s
0
. u .
,
u. ,
. .
2 6 0 Only the p resent p rtici p les of erbs f the

. cl ss the a v o a -
a ,
y cl ss d c s ti es in ri bly insert ( i n nom d

' '
a- a ,
an au a v ,
va a c .
-
vo c .
-
a cc . u .
ne t Present p rtici p les of the d cl ss f the root cl ss when the

u . a -
a , o - a
root en d s in m d El ! f t re p rtici p les m y either t ke ,

an u u a ,
a a or
reject it ; th s ne t sing fi n“ d m u , PM ; W u .
-
.
,
u . 01
’
d a fi wi fi or m fi ; m ( p res p rt from m go
' “
‘
u. . a .
,
d aTTfi W WII P rtici p les f ll other erbs d ll other

‘
-
a . or a o a v an a
,
stems in Wi t le e t the 1 i the d e t ; th s i t“ ( i t?

, av ou
“
n u. n u . u ,
“
‘
t
ea root cl ss) d W
’
,
-
a ,
u . .
2 6l The dj gre t t kes i strong c ses the stem

m
‘ ’
. a . a a n a
,
The gr m m ri ns howe er llow these erbs to insert th

a a a , v ,
a v e
in the m p l ter no f the p re ent .

p r-
t ici le
vo c . - a c c .
p . n eu o s a .
96 Le sson XX I I I .
form : nom
" ET“ sing m sc 1 13 11 ( see 23 9 m .
-
. a .
, a cc .
,
vo c
m.
; d ne t l
p n e Other waise. the inflection u . . .
is like th t f p rtici p les a o a .
2 62 The fe m inine of p rtici p les d djecti es in 3 11

.
1 ( a an a v 1 or
i i i ) is lw y s m de w ith i a d the for m is

a l w ys identic l a ,
an a a a
w ith the m d l ne ter no . ua u .
Vo ca b l
a ry u XX III .
Ve b s r 3 + go w y ; ina a
fi g (m
’
a d a ti
) bl me a . c s au . dri e w y v a a .
“ ( 3i 71 shine ; r le u .
N o s ( s b st
un u c lf . an d m m a
ql
‘
f am m
'
.
, “ su n better best
.
; t b t ,
a s n ea . su s .
,
11
m ( p) com ery honor ble s l tion . v a . a va .
m ( p p rt f
3 1
r.
) gi ing a H i t (.ne t H Qo) being existing ; v . u .
,
W f fi bright glistening
, . fi
; m
‘
,
b t goo d m ; ,
as a sc . su s .
,
an as
(ac t ) ill. min ting u f m a( HT fl ) f ithf l w ife

. e .
-
, a u .
*
I f become ( st ss
i
ii
- a
,
.
p p A d . a .
v
p rt
a of . t b t 5 1i to morrow as n ea . su s .
,
3 -
.
being cre t re , f g s rel y indee d

a u . u ,
.
Ex erci se XX III .
’
n vu r rfi l fs m fi qf t a fi fi g mr z l
'
w fm fi m zfi fimm m fi rfi n as n
f a s fi i {gi t finc h 19 1
Wa ve : (a m: p l W a 1 m m a n m
E s peci lly w ido w w ho immol tes herself
a the f ner l
a a on u a
p ile of her h sb n d ; whence Anglo I n d i n tt

u a -
a su e e.
E en tho gh they exist

M “ ”
v u .
a ?! in co m p osition often con eys the ide of i m it tion v a a .

98 Lesson X XI V .
sc li Ma u n e. N e u t er .
Sing l r D l u a . ua . Pl r l u a . Sing l r u a .
N '
'
afl
’
fit fi fi 6m N VA fi m t wi wa i E fia fi a
'
.
‘S
fit a 8
A . sum 7:
I Efi fl fl l i ma m sc
' ' '
.
as i n th e m a uli n e.
L .
W W W
W M
2 64 .
—
A ste m F la wt ( to be c ref ll y disting ishe d from m
r
"
a u u ,
p res p rt t . f 1
3 )
a is freq ently
. sed
ac in res.
p ectf o l d d ress u u u a as
a s bstit te for the p rono n f the second p erson I t is con

u u u o .
t
s rue d w ith the erb in the thir d p erson I t nom sing m sc is
v . s . . a .
“a m ( fem W ) ; d m the contr

. cte d form of its ol d er an , a
H EE L is common excl m tion f ddress y ho ”

vo c . a i l a a o a :
“
ou, s r ,
“
,
d is often do bled
” “
th l ;
er e an u .
2 65 D e i
i ti s t m s i W These m de by the s ffixes
. r va ve e n . are a u
3 M 11 1 d 31
,
1d with
, an or t w excep tions m sc ,
an a re, one o ,
a .
an d ne t onl y The ste m h

u . tri p le form I the strong c ses
. as a . n a
o f the m sc the owel of the s ffix is lengthened to

a . v in th u e
we k est c ses i t is in gener l dro p p ed ; in the mi d dle c ses the

a a a a
fin l 1 is dro p p e d d it is lso lost in the m m sing f ll

a , an a o . . o a
genders I the e ter the nom . n

p l being strong
n u c ses ,
.
-
a cc . .
,
as a ,
lengthen the owe l of the s ffix ; the s m e c ses in the d l ( v u a a ua as
w e k est c ses) lose i t b t this only o p tion ll y After the a

a a u a .
f 1 11 d ER when these receded b conson nt

or
q o p an
y , are a a ,
the at is ret ined in ll the we k est c ses to oi d too gre t

“
a a a a , av a an
cc m l tion f conson nts E x m p les W k ing ; W ‘ ’

a u u a m
o a . a : .
,
W m so l self ; W de otion .
,
‘
u ,
’
n .
,
‘
v
’
.
Prob bly contr cte d from W a a

‘
blessed ’
m loses its fin l a before a a l

lv o w els d an al
l son nt a co n
son nts ; th s fl 3h E133

a u , .
Lesson XX I V
N eu t e r .
Sing l r u a . Pl r l u a . Sing l r u a . D l
ua . Pl r l
u a .
TI “
t u ma
ra “ fi rst
v .
n e w
N a rm
“
A .
L M T
V .
m am m or a s!
v
c l s F in l El
2 66 . Eup h on i
i d q rem in n ltered b
ru e . a , an a u a e
fore initi l s r d conson nts ; b efore son nt s whether owel or c

a u a a , v on
son nt they become res p ecti ely 1 L g EL Before s ls they

a ,
v , , . na a
m y be still f rther
a ssimil ted becoming the n s ls
u ( II R a a ,
a a ,
.
Th s a ft i ng f becomes either m
u ,
or m ‘‘
c ; m 7 1
becomes m or m The l tter m ethod is m ch m ore s l . a u u ua .
I 2 67 Before initi l fin l m te is m de son nt ; d then

g
. a a a u a a an
the 3 m y either re m i nch nged

"
a be con erte d into the a n u a ,

or v so
n nt s p ir te corresp onding to the p receding letter ; th s either

a a a u ,
w as W t ; either
“
. Ra n g m
or or m I . n
p r ctice the l tter m etho d is l m ost in ri bly followed

a a a va a .
hen dent l m te co m es in cont ct with ling l p

W a a u a a ua or a
l t l m te sibil nt the dent l is s ll y ssimil ted becoming

a a u or a , a u ua a a ,
ling l p l t l res p ecti ely Th s ti stk t fro m ti th t ; dj fi d

ua or a a a v . u ,
a z
’
-
s a -
’
z r
inste d f aj a a o r n .
1 00 Lesson XX I V .
Voca b l
a ry u XX IV .
m a eno m ( d de
’
Ver b s . va r fl a ya fl ) "
c u t o ff . scribe p ortr y , a .
in ( r ub, r ub fi s t la g in c s ( u d veya ya tz
)
’
E at ca n s m a rya ya tz
) -
au
o ff , p olish . terrify .
Su b t s m f .
,
border bo nd ry ; ,
u a o ut
a lmi so m l self
.
;,
often u i m ,
s k irts as s
p l reflexi
e e p rono n ;v i g i 3 1
7 m sl yer u killer n en 1 .
,
a , .
ti his etc ; one s w

ve, ,
. Adj
’
o n.
5 5 251 deed ; ceremony ; f te WI F E L long li e d ( ofte se d

n ., a .
- -
v n u
afi t n
‘
o hide skin ; le ther ,

in res p ectf l ddress ) a . u a .
m b irth
n .,
m . gre t m ch so a , so u
i at
’
b n k shore
n., a , fl a wt h w gre t ?h w m ch ?
.
-
o a o u
soci ble a .
W (b h m ) n d
rae otion ’
a m a a
i strong
an m ighty v , , .
s cre d word ( f God ) ; s cred

a o blessed a .
knowledge ; the world s p irit W shining brilli nt -

.
, a .
m ( b h m ra
p i fi H fT W Fan
Q
'
shrew d p r dent a e r so n -
,
u .
c tion of the p receding) m the W i t how m ch

a m ny .
,
u ,
as a .
s p re m e All So l the cre tor m f m h rsh ro gh

u -
u , a .
, .
0
,
a , u .
fa g f p er d ing f ,
. va , ar
re ching ; omni p resent ; mighty a .
E H f 3 11 (p ss p rt of 3 0 ,
.
0 a . a . 7
k illed .
Ad v : .
W m .
,
m eeting enco nter m
, u . co m m onl y .
1 02 Lesson X XV .
L e ss o n XX V .
ce s
2 68 . P e f ec t A c t i P t i c i p l s i arm The
De l n ion . r ve ar e n
“
a cti e p rtici p les f the p erfect tense sy stem

v a q ite p ec li r
o -
a re u u a as
reg r d s the modific tions f the stem I th strong c ses the

a a o . n e a
s ffix is T IE w hich b ecomes m in the m sing m sc

u ,
d no . . a .
,
an
is shortene d to 3 1 in the sing I the we kest c ses the s ffix

“
vo c . . n a a u
is contr cte d into B EL; d in the mi d d le c ses it is ch nge d to

a an a a
Hi t A nion owel if p resent in the strong d mi d d le c ses

. u -v an a ,
d is p p e rs before E S in the w e k est R d ic l d i if p rece d e d

a a
L a . a a an ,
by conson nt become 21 before E SL b t if p rece d e d by more

on e a , ,
u
th na conson nt beco m e a ; w here s r d ic l 3 l w y s b

one a ,
a a a
“
a a e
comes E i before B EL d r dic l 3 3 I Th s f fi fi m fi l

‘
, an a a ,
. u , ,
W5 “ m w ;
W W W
,
The feminine ste m is ,
.
forme d with 2: fro m the we kest stem form ; th s fi fi gfifi

“
a -
u ,
‘
E x m p les
a :
1 f fi i q kno w ing
.
‘ ’
M sc li a N ut n e. eu er .
Sing l r D l u a Pl r l . Sing l r D l Pl r l
ua . u a . u a . ua . u a .
as i n th e m a sc li neu .
t i
mr e
‘
fi fl i nal
2 El.
‘
h ing gone
av
’*
nother form f p erf

A o .
p a rt . of this erb ( m ) m k es the
v a
strong d mi dd le stems W
an
ig and
W ; the we k est form a
is bo e m
as a v , .
Le so s n X XV .
M as c ulin e. N eu ter .
Sing l ar u . D l ua . Pl r l u a . Sing l r D l u a . ua . Pl r l
u a .
N .
A .
1 . 5 11 1 1511
3
fi rm a fa r as i n th e ma sc uline
m fifi m m
’
L m fi q atri u
.
g
V .
2 69 . Ste m s 5 7 1 233 1 The stems 3 1 m dog

“
3
, d
.
1 .
,
‘ ’
, an
w m .
,
n .
,
‘
yo ng h e
u w e kest stems {F t d { 1 5 in
’
,
av as a an
the strong an d middle c ses t h ey follow ( TEF L;

a 5 1 m
“
1 7 , .
F em .
i
{T } and
g a fi or O
fl .
s t m 1 1m
27 0 . Th e e m . genero s ( in the l ter l ng ge
,
‘
u
’
a a ua
al m os t excl si ely n me u v a a o f I n dr ) h strong stem m m

a , as as ,
m id a r w e k est
.
mO
, a . N m sing N W T
o .
31 F m .
,
vo c . 0 . e .
st m W27 I . d y is sed only in the strong

Th e e n .
,
‘
a
’
,
u and
w e kest c ses the mi d d le with the

a m sing
a co m ing fro m m
, ,
no . .
,
L .
i a rsfi t
m or 3 13
or1
3 mfg v ta
272 C mp d wi th Vi i
.
Hi The djecti es for m e d
o o un s or . a v
from this root with p rep ositions d other wor d s q ite irreg l r an are u u a .
Some f them h e only t w stem forms

o strong in mi d
av o -
: a an a
we k in a while others d isting ish from the mid d le in W i t u a
we k est ste n in q before which th e W is contr cted with p

a r , a a re
ce ding (I L) 3 (3 0 into or Hi The fem i m de w ith t or ‘ . . s a
fro m the w e kest (or w e k ) ste m ; th s f fl i fi The p rinci p l

a a u , a
ste m s of this sort follows a re as :

104 Lesson XX V
Strong . Middle . W e a k ( we a k est) .
mi forw rd e stw rd W
‘
a
’
,
‘
a a
’
W“ do w nw rd ‘
a
’
w i
t
“ 3; north w rd ‘
a
’
W
"
b k w d west w rd m
m
’ ‘ ’
W
‘
gac ar ,
a
El
i
‘
lo w ’
fl it
m i
‘
follo w ing ’
m W E I?
f afi i ‘
g i g hori
o n ont ll y z a
’
fa fi a ffi é q m
Voc a b l
a ry XXV u .
Ve r b s 3 ? ( u dg a c c ha
’
rise
ti ) .
1
m W ( a s ta mg a cc h a tz )
’
g o
"
G
ig ( s
pr y )
b a a tz
’
des e n
d own t ( lit ly g home

,
se
’ “
o
u se d of the he enly bodies) av .
W ins tro ble

m .
, p a ,
u .
fi g m lion .
, .
W b thing b th n , . a , a .
g fim m g elle .
, az .
A dj
le rne d st d ie d M , f .
,
O
m] ;
a , u .
er m
g p .
, god T
n. t 11 l a
r .
,
h a ing stoo d ; ,
va s a r . av as n .
t rfi q f sse m bly b t the i m m o ble

g
'
.
,
a su s ,
va .
W B roch ( nholy p l
. ce,fi sfl fi ia three he d ed a a
' ‘
-
a .
in I n di ) a .
3 3 f w ] ( p rt f
m ) bitten , .
O
;
a . o .
m m I ndr .
,W fi lt foresta dwelling
. ‘ -
.
2 31 m
1 y o ng .
; f,
g a fi i nf a.
m ,
knowing u wise le rn ed
. .
, , a .
fa ma i m ri p ening ; recom p ense

.
, .
inserte d irreg l rl y in we kest for m s only

,
u a , a .
irreg l r w) u a .
106 Le son XX VI s .
u re na mi a m . Ge instr M : l
; p nom .
. a ce .
a ah , .
the rest li k e 2 ufa m is declined reg l rly ( like a f fix) . .

,
u a
in co m p osition d w hen me ning lor d m ster ; when me ning , an a

‘
, a
’
a
‘
h sb nd it follo w s G f fi in the follo w ing forms i nst sing W T
u a
’
, : . .
,
d t l a la b l gen W
. I loc U zfi ; a .
-
.
,
.
'
c
‘
2 7 5 The ne ter stems W . ey e W W bone m c rds u

‘ ’
,
‘ ’
,
‘
u
’
,
as“ thigh form only the we k est c ses ; th s W

‘ ’
,
m a a u , . ,
a w fi r or fl ag etc ; the rest of the inflection is m de from cor , . a
resp on d ing stems i f ; th s nom sing Wf fi etc n i u , . . .
27 6 1 Ra fi f god d ess f fort ne m kes m sing m

. . .
,
‘
o u
’
, a no . . .
2 wom n follows mixed d cle nsion ; th s nom sing

.
‘
a
’
, a e u ,
. ,
w f a u lt
, W a cc inst .
m d t fi fi b l ge m
or , a ,
a , a .
-
u. ,
loc f m .
; d W W m m p ; l nom afm . , :
. .
,
a cc
m . or m instr m etc ; gen m ,
.
, . . .
277 1 a l l f w ter only

.
p l ; its. fin l is ch nged to .
g ,
b ‘
a
’
, . a a e
fore i t ; th s m m m instr
u W
, m d
no t b l .
, a cc . ,
.
,
a .
-
a .
El ma gen W loc 3 1
,
1
g 2 f a i . k y m k es nom , . . .
'
s
’
, a .
sing afi q d m afi p l ( sometimes ) W K ; the endings

.
,
a .
the ‘
,
. are
norm l ones b t the root becomes 3 1 before conson nt endings

a , u
“
a -
th s u sing f a“ nom
,
a cc . p fl ag
l instr .
m Not , .
-
a cc. .
,
. .
llthe c ses fo nd i n 3 Stem ?m ( r rely we lth ‘ ’

a a a re u u se . . . a a
sing ( TH W (m etc d f f W W Um l ' “
r
‘
.
; ( ,Ti I ; p , . a .
, ,
.
( 1 21 K ( nom d ( Tfi TQ etc . an
‘
- .
27 8 1
m g m g .m ( from .
m a g c rt dr wing or .
,
‘
a -
a
’
,
i e ) ox
. . strong stem W ? m i d wa g we kest W ;
‘ ’
: ’ .
,
a
m sing The stem ro d

W m W
‘ ’
no . . 2 111 21
1 m , vo c . . . .
,
a ,
m k es la l the strong c ses w i t h irreg l r nom sing m

a ; the a ,
u a . .
corres p on d ing mi d dle c ses m d e from qfw d the we k est a a re a

‘
,
an a
fro m W ; th s sing qw lfl q d t 123 u

p l
, m a cc. .
‘
,
a .
,
a ce . .
,
In the older l ng ge oftener a ua ma sc line u .

Lesson XX VI . 10 7
d t Wm
a .
[ The ste m s m m stirring stic
. k d
“ a n: .
,
-
an
m .
,
e p ithet f I ndr
an s i d to follow N L] o a ,
a re a F
2 7 9 The stem q m
s . m is ery irreg l r The strong .
,
‘
an
’
, v u a .
ste m is m m i d HR we kest 32K Th s sing W W ,

.
, a . u ,
.
, ,
g m etc ,
g m ; d
3 1 11
.
3 3,
3 7 m m
vo c
gm ; p l
.
w
s mi a .
, ,
.
,
33 H q
1K fi fl ag
l
, e tc .
, .
28 0 F the stem W f .
g m or
y be s bstit ted in the .
,
a e
’
,
a u u
c ses w ith owel endings form s from m f ; th s W

a v -
. u ,
or
Q 28 l he rt. does not m ke nm .

,
f ‘
y a
’
, a no .
-
vo c .
-
a cc . o an
n m ber ( excep t in co m p osition ) these being s p p lie d fro m g gfl n

u ,
u .
2 8 2 The stem H
g m . foot becomes m g in strong c ses ; .
,
‘ ’
,
a
an d in com p o n d s in the mid d le c ses lso ; th s nom sing m g

,
u ,
a a u , . .
,
a cc.
m instr Haj etc F rom , fl a g bi p ed sing
.
, .
‘ ’
, a cc . .
tn
gq p m l r instr
, p fa n f g q [
l t . The ste m a rq m foot , . . .
'
.
,
‘
has the com p lete d eclension f stem s ] o a -

.
2 8 3 The root 3 1 sl y fin l m e m ber f com p o nd ‘ ’

. a ,
as a o a u ,
,
beco m es 3 1 in nom sing d loses i t in t h m i d dle c ses . .

,
an s e a
d its a t in the we k est c ses ( b t only O p tion lly i I sin g )

”
an a a u a n c e. .
F rther when 3 1 is lost

u ,
3 i n cont ct w ith L re erts to i t origin l , a F v s a
S ; th s fl a g v m killing Br h n m es nom sing ’

a m k W
‘
t t u , E I .
,
a a , a . .
:
gm instr etc loc m

"
m a a fg
‘
o o
3
‘
a cc . or vo c . °
.
, .
, , .
,
da
W .
3“ etc ; p l w ,
0
ER . . no . a cc. ”
.
2 8 4 The ste m s e both

m .m p d W i “ m p ( .
,
n . r , . an .
,
n . r.
pe r so ni fi t i f the ) ca m k e the
ons m sing in om b t su n ,
a ,
no . .
, u
otherwise do not lengthen the 3 1 ; th s m TI T a a

q u instr u ,
no .
, a cc .
, .
com p o n d wo ds In ltering c se in me m ber so m e u r ,

an a au one
times li g li Q of the nextn following member

ua B t ze s a
“
. u a
g tt r l l bi l in direct combin tion with so m etimes p re ent

u u a or a a a v s
the co m bin tion in the instr fl a w a , as . .

108 Lesson XXV I .
Vo ca b l
a ry u XXVI .
r s Ve b TL (E ‘
tgp ya ti ) be p le sed s tis a or a
a mo e ; in
v ca n s . send ; fi e d, s tisfy s ti te oneself
a or a a .
p t ; h
u n d o er giae v ,
v .
m fa com p l in a .
in c s au .
hide w y conce l
a a ,
a .
h o mo )
W EI m man ( .
an n .
, v o w, oblig tion d ty
a ,
u .
Adj
m f .
, one e y ed -
.
fi d f
notice tho ght m ind
n .
, ,
u , .
3 &] n
1 fo r foote d q dr p ed
u -
,
ua u .
m f d i inity deity .
, v ,
.
m ( w e\
k est m p a .
,
n . r .
,
V e d ic s int
a a . or d ine d fi x e d p erm nent
a , ,
a .
fi g m foot .
, .
fi rs f HT b fi t gr cio s
,
.
”
. en e c en , a u ,
W n p rotection . blessed .
Ex erc ise XXVI .
fi nfi fia m a m m l
mfi tfl fi a fi mfi
'
Hm fi i
q qg n
m am a wfi m a sm la lf u m fi t m um R t
W W I HI Q fl W W W I a lm
'
m uw m lgfi m a a w m t t s m
‘
fi zfi a n e n wfs z urfi w ém uf m l am w nfi
‘
M a fi laa uufi a fi m fi a w a m w
fia t aa l fi i zfi ai gfi fi ét w m a m
’
t qs t fi m
W m fi flsfl fi laa la fl m a é fi fi a a a m w
afim m u I ai m M a r i a m : wa s n ew mfi ta ’
fi réfl fi i : W m m lai l w gfi fi n a r zf é :
1 10 Lesson XXVI I .
er : N m sing m ’ the rest

N eut o .
-
a cc. .
, da .
fi , p l .
Tfl lfi i ;
is li k e the m sc line a u .
287 . a re ?(wa t t )
sc li n Ma u e. F e m i ni n e .
Sing D l . ua . Pl r l u a . D l ua . Pl r l u a .
N .
“
su it a nti
A i t
? n
'
a mi fi ra m
I a a
g r W 3: 1a
1
D wgfi W e
li b -
W WW W
G was W W
L wa ft “ w as 3:
C\\l
N e t r : Nom u e sing i t“ d 3 m p l W ; the rest .

-
a cc . .
, a .
; .
0\ 6\
li k e m sc The fin l
a .f is nch nge ble (cf I6 I) a o u a a . .
28 8 There is defecti e p ronomin l ste m

. w hic h i a v a s
a ccentless d hence sed onl y in sit tions w here n o e mp h si

,
an u ua a s
f lls p on it The only forms

a u the follo w ing Sing
. m are : . a ce . .
m n na,
g f m m
.
; instr m fi n , f 1mm . D . .
, n .
, , . . u. a ce .
m 1137 f fi gen t m Pl c e m
h
.
q, ; .1 ,
m fn .
a,
‘
11 1 1 1 .
,
00 . .
, .
, n .
, . . a . . 1 3 ,
n W fil f W E
. These forms m y be se d onl y when the
,
. a u
p erson or o b ject to which they refer h lre dy been in d ic ted by as a a a
a form of ? “ or I I 5; Th s a fi fl W WW ? w . u ,
.
m a n this h re“
d the t of p oetry ; te ch
one him gr mm r as a ar a a a
”
28 9 P s t P ss i P t i c i p l i a a By the s ffix a ‘
. a a ve ar e n or . u o r,
i n co m p r ti el y sm ll n m ber f erbs t is for m ed d i

a a a v a u o v ,
“
i ,
rec tly f rom the root of the erb d nconnected with y tense v
,
an u an
stem erb l djecti e c lled the p st p ssi e p rtici p le The

, a v a a v a a a v a .
fem ends lw ys in 3 11 W hen this p rtici p le is m de fro m

. a a 0 . a a
tr nsiti e erbs it q lifies so m ething h ing end re d the ctio

a v v ,
ua as av u a n
exp ressed by the erb ; th s a d tt gi en ; W kt s p ok en v u ,

a a ,
’
‘
v
’
u
'
a,
‘ ’
.
W hen m de fro m intr nsiti or e ter erb th m p '
a an a ve n u v ,
e sa e ar
Lesson XXVI I . 1 11
ti c i p l
e has no p ssi e b t only i ndefinite p st sense ; th s era
a v ,
u an a ,
u , ,
‘
gone ’
been ; a f tIa f llen
,
‘ ’ -
,
‘
a
’
2 9 0 This p rtici p le is often

. sed djecti e Very m
a u as an a v . co
m on ly lso it ,
s p palies the p l ce
,
f finite erb u when some form a o a v ,
o f be or elis to be s p p lied ; th s H 1 13 he is gone ;

‘ ’
,
u u , :
“ ”
W T ra m by m letter w w ritten The ne ter is

; “ ”
I e a as . u
freq ently sed

u b t ti u ; th s m gift ; g ?“ milk
a s a su s an ve u ,
‘
a
’
d lso So m etimes it h p resent i g i fi

‘
an a m ti as no en ac on zs . as a s n ca
tion p rtic l rly when m de fro m ne ter erbs ; th s f a n ( from

, a u a a u v u ,
m ) 1 often st nding ‘
a
’
2 9 l A W i th s ffi x "T [lg] The s ffix f is t ken by n mber ‘ '
. . u . u c a a u
o f roots Th s . u
1 C ert in roots in WT
. ad in i d owels ; th s WT or , an an u - v u ,
i i} swell be f t b n on Wither ’
fi ; gr h
’
‘
n ,
d g a ; E T ,
van a ;
‘
a a
’
,
‘ ’
,
f a destroy m ; 3 1 or fi g s w ell
‘ ’ ‘ ’ ‘
’
t
”
i i
3
, n , cu ,
2 The roots in
. ri ble a ; ( so c lle d T roots) w hich before va a -
a -
,
the s ffix becomes {1 or W

u in the p res p s ; th s » as
”
. a s u ,
fi
( s) r Elfin g M , ; l (
g 115
1 ) fill 33 5 ,
‘ ’
,
3 A f w roots en d ing in E ( w hich beco m es 1 before the

. e
L L
th s “a ; bre k “I t ; “ fi t bend an ; Fra t sink I F:
u ,
‘
a
’
,
(
‘ ’
,
“ “
‘ ’
,
( ti be sick‘
( a t : f i a fe r f
’
a c,t Also e t w others \
‘
a
’
,
. on or o
w hich exhibit g tt r l before the 7 T G I L tt ch a t ] ; W a u u a :

‘
a a
’
,
\
‘ ’
cut up ,
an .
n m ber f roots so m e
4 . A u o ,
of the m ery co m mon in g v ,
( w hich beco m es Q before a ) Hg

‘
:
“
,
—
Ha ; ( fa Hg m 0 fi rq ,
‘ ’
cut ,
2 92 . Some fe w v erbs m ke do ble for m s ; th s

a u u , H s
‘
‘
h sten a
’
i td
‘
or
w ; f ag ‘
c q ire fa a m
a u
’
,
or .
o monest exce p tions m fro m G TE: t ;

C m .
‘
ea
’
li tfl
“
-
fro m
Hg ; W fro m $13 rejoice ; W fro m ( g weep "
‘ ’ “
‘ ’
; W
fro m W s p e k ; fi f gfl fro m fi g know ‘
a
’
’
‘ ’
.
1 12 Lesson XXVI I .
Voca b l
a ry XXVII u .
r s a ksa ya ti
)
'
Ve b W ( bb e a t.
a m (up éksa te) neglect .

W \
bre k a .
2
? f a ( o i ki r d tz
)
‘
sc tter
a . 3 11 enjoy .
W WEI ( den — d ti )
“
luff (p a r i bb a va
'
ti ) des p ise
a va a z
g z ya
i
i - .
.
des p ise .
W ( jj )
m d a tz sin k .
“ + VQ , in c s au .
g \
“
a in c s au .
(
yOJ a
y t i a
) yoke ,
p rono nce u , s a y. h rness

a .
EH 3 13 descend .
EF L ( g )
Z a a tz
'
a tt ch ; h ng cling
a a , ,
3 g ( u t td m
)
tz emerge come ,
a d here .
o ut . Hg settle down ; (si d )

a tz si t ,
he
ffl ‘
or W T (Pyéya te) beco m e sto t o erco m e exh ste d u v ,

au .
or fa t .
Su b t s m m .
,
w edding ,
ma rri ge a .
wfi g fi
’
v
‘
m . da n om. p r .
,
the mfit m .
,
illness .
( the
A cvi n s I ndi n A ég fi p ) a t xo oz .
W m w l k d .
“
a an co n
ers tion ; cond ct f life h

v a
”
u o ,
o
g i t-
I m .
, n . o gh
, p l u .
ser nce va .
{ t
f m .
,
ch in g rl nd a , a a .
Adj
( rt f 2 f i l) red ced de m p a . o
’
‘
u ,
fl t
i f h nger .
,
u y d ; r
. ined ca e u .
w r}
e e li f e f holiness
n. , i e m f g re
o t strong iolent ,
. . a , ,
v .
religi o s st d entship t fi d ( p rt f lfi ) f t
‘
u u . a . o a .
W m e lti m e m e l
n .
, m a -
st d y ing s
,
cred know a . u a
m p V.e d,
c p erson
n. ge le d ge ;r , a
. m b t i Br a hm n a . as . su s .
,
a
st dent u .
a (p )
n r t b ndoned ; w nting a a a a
in ; d so m eti m es w instr an so . .
,
W m c q isition g in
.
,
a witho t
u , a . u
’
1 14 Lesson XXVI I I .
ci pl
e is m a de by dding the s ffi x a to the b e root ; th s
a u ar u , a m
from 311 ; ffi fTl fro m fi t ; f fi fl from fi lm;
- from E?( '
or
i
‘
-
d fro m
the root d in conson nt other th n 35 Pt [ q
294 . If en a a a , ,
t , ,
th ordin r y r les of e p honic combin tion p p ly

e a u follows u a a , as
1 F in l i t d a
.
t become a
Q ; th s f q ai from f
an
“ ; g m u ,
‘
fro m W from E S L .
2 F in l 3
1 becomes
. i
t ftera w hich ls o fter r dic l ,
a ,
as a a a a
fin l EL Q becomes 3 ; th s gg fro m m ; f i g from f ag Egg

a ,
u ,
“
.
“
d t g m d e from { S d d { g from fl a contr r

an
i A L are a
t y an an , a
t 1 It
o
? m k es.
2 g ; d Ha
l H g a an , .
3 F in l becomes d I d the follo w ing i t b

g
“
L L
“
q . a E ; , an ,
an e
comes th s 33 from 32 1 W fro m F I Et u ,

“
,
- .
4 F in l
g is tre
. ted in rio
a s w y s ccor d ing to its his
a va u a ,
a
t i l l e
o r ca Sometimes {I com b ines w ith Ft to form 5 before
va u . a .
,
which sho t o w els ( excep t Q ) r lengthened ; th s m e fro m

v are u ,
m g fl ag from f a g Q 3 fro m £ 5 ;
, from 15 3 ; b t Egg fro m ,
u
E
gg H g forms.
m “
b W here g e p resents origin l ET the

. m .
“
r a
‘
\
,
co
bin tion is TE] ; th s m from K g ; f at“: from fi g ; g m from

a u ,
gg
‘
The root
.
Hg forms lso 67
3 where g p re rese n ts a
“
origin l i t m k es 7 13 a , a .
2 95 The root b efore a s lly h i t we k est form if there

. u ua as s a ,
is y where in the er b l s ystem d istinction f strong d we k

an v a a o an a
forms Th s 1 A p en ltim te s l is dro p p e d ; e g a re? fro m

. u : . u a na a . .
,
31
3 ; a s fro m a
fl ; a m from
“
E R ( or H R) m
; from m .
2 R oots which
. bbre i te d in the w e k forms f the p erfect
are a v a a o
s ff e the s me bbre i tion here ; e g Gi g i from W 3 3 from a q

u r a a v a . .
, ,
“
g g f m
m g i g f
ro m a g ; { g f m W ,
( the s me form fromro
( R ) ro
\
a ,
fa g from 6 111 ; fig from W 3 F in l WT is we k ene d to E

‘
‘
. . a a
i lfi a from I “ sing t fi fl fro m 1 12" drink ; to i f g ra fro m

‘ ’ ‘ ’ ’
‘ ’ '
n , n
m a f ?
! fro.m m p t ( wit h ti lso ch nged to g) fi za fro m ‘
u
’
a a ,
Lesson XX VI I I . 1 15
WT
‘
m e s re
a u
’
, and a fe w others . 4 . A fin l a is lost fter a t in
a a
1 m , m 2 ( from , W an,
“
(a d li k ewise fin l R in 75 3
an a ,
aa ,1 13 a m
g (
a from , v ,
‘ '
5 I sol ted c ses

.
131g a a a re
fro m a mt ; from g}a p l y \

‘
a
’
.
29 6 More irreg l r . the follo w ing u a a re
1 Some roots i W m k e p rtici p les in w fi i ; th s Q M

'
. n a a u ,
W W 3 1 7 1 { TE L m a m from EEK etc

“
, , 1 , , , .
2 am fl d ( EL m ke R i n a etc
“
.
, ,
an a .
3 The root l l gi e forms from the eri ti e form

a ( d
'‘ ‘ ’
.
g ? , v , va v
Q ) The
. contr cted form a is w i d el y fo nd in
a com p osition u ,
esp eci lly w ith p rep ositions ; th s m or W Fa g t fi g etc

a u , ,
“
-
r or ,
.
2 97 1 1 W i th i. o w el . The s ffix w ith Q un on in the -v u , or
for m Ta is reg l rly se d w ith the deri ti e erb stems in

, u a u va v v -
se
con d y conj g tion

ar lso often w ith roots f deri ti e ch r cter
u a , a o va v a a
( like fi a f gg ) d t
\
infreq
, ent y
l with origin , l roots
an no u a .
2 98 W hen { a is d d e d to c s ti e
. d denomin ti e erb a au a v an a v v
stems the s yll bles 3 12 ; d ro p p e d ; th s a

fig p ss p rt fi f t fi ; are u , ,
a . a .
'
'
W m i t
,e ; a s F i fi f a ; 1
1 m W fi l c s, p ss p rt -
, ca n s .
,
au . a . a .
m ; 31 7 , ca us mafi
”
a , a rra n
2 99 . A m on g the origin l roots t king a a
{ a m a
y be noticed th e
following
Tet
‘
f lla
’
, a tri a ; a t, r
g fi m ; as
‘
d w ell ’
, s f em;
“ -
mt ,
s tart; m thirst gfi m ; rfi rs t f a t e t
‘
; i s i fs t ; H g
’
. ,
-
c ,
-
c ,
W E H g m k es .
i f } lie m k es a fi m a
‘ ’
a .
3 00 A few roots form this p rtici p l e either with

. w itho t a or u
the xili ry I ; th s I T?! d W a f m 31g

au a u , an
‘
ro .
3 0 l The gr mm ri ns reckon
.
p rtici p les f the a form tion a a as a o na -
a
a few d eri ti e djecti es co m ing fro m roots which d t m k e

va v a v ,
o no a
a reg l r p rtici p le ; s ch
u a
a m b rnt
a m
( ) ; thin h g u a re
‘
u
’ ‘ ’
,
‘
a
g rda
’
11g ri p (W ) ; W dry ( 3 50 ; gig exp nded ‘
e
’ ‘ ’ 3 1 ‘
a
’
1 16 Lesson XXVI I I .
3 02 . Pa st Ac ti ve Pa r t i ci p le
m ( ro m the in or fl awU -
. F
p ast p ss p rt is ma de by d.ding the paossessi e s ffix

.
W ( f a , a v u .
afi ) second ry deri ti e h ing the m e ning d constr ction

, a a va v av a an u
o f p at t cti e p rtici
er e c
p le ; th s i m
5 nafi ma a zt v a u , ,
T- .
3 03 This p rtici p le is lmost

. lw ys sed p re d ic ti el y d a a a a u a v , an
gener ll y witho t xp resse d co p l i

a w ith the l e f pu e u a , . e .
,
va u o a er
son l p erfect form Th s Fri f a ifw

a -
n h seen . u ,
" ‘ '
c
“
o one as
m e ; or with o p l
”
W , m m tho ( f m )Ch st come u a,
“
u e a
i nto gre t misery This p rtici p le co m es to be m de e en fro m ”

a . a a v
i ntr nsiti es ; th s HT I maTfi

a v h h gone u ,
- “
s e as
”
.
Vo ca b l
a ry u XXVIII .
Ve r b s 3g
3 ( mzi kya ti
) be conf sed or d ed u az
fi
r
”! in c s au .
( p r ai t ci r a ya
‘
ti ) de or st p id u .
c e i ve .
”
( E
L W besiege .
e q ip u one II (p r a r dka ti ) gro w p u .
self m (p m gd ti ) p enetr te
’
. II ra a ,
ti
g
h
t f él
-
m in c s au .
( vydp d d dya ti ) enter .
k ill . in c s au .
( p r a va r tdya ti )
lz
w
"
( p a d ya te)
l
'
flee . contin e u .
2 enjoy t fm wq rem a in o er s r i e
‘
3 K 3 ,
ea .
\
v ,
u v v .
111 + UR honor bestre w

“
.
Et a t: .
S b st u
citi en L fit
'
m .
,
z .
W m end ; i l t.l st
, m m p l ce n oc .
,
a a . .
, a a .
W p Delhi 213n 3 . m ,
Gree n k b
. rb ri n r .
, . .
, , a a a .
a t m .
,
W a ss. m j ck l .
,
a a .
33 1 f c e .
, fi fi
av f fifi m soldier
. .
,
.
am beh ior life n .

fi a
, t r m y av ,
. n .
, a .
22 3 11 13 1 m m p m m ele
.
p h
,
n t no . r. .
, a .
A q i root fro m go m w y ua s - ‘ ’ ‘
a a
’
.
118 Lesson XX I X .
A a ] : To ncom p o nded roots is dded the s ffix E T

3 05 . . u u a u .
I t is s lly d ded directly to the root b t sometimes with the

u ua a , u
v owel interp osed W ith reg rd to the f . d to the form a u se o an
of root before it this form tion closely grees with th t f the ,

a a a o
p rtici
a p le in a or a A fin l root conson nt is tre ted before
“
. a -
a a as
a . Roots which m k the p st p ss p rt in a gener lly reject 1 : a e a a . a . a
before E T .
Ex m p l s 1 Wi th t i s rt d m m ra m fi a t g m
“
a e . . ou n e e , , , ,
f g m from Q T fg a lfrom 1 m p l ce ( cf d from ‘ ’

“ '‘
, a . an
3 7 W , T from { T ( cf a ) fl a t from B a r t fro m fl i

t.
’ ,
fl
“
a n from 1
3 1
5 ; 1 1m from m m an from m f i rT rr fro m -
o
—
, ,
fi d ; i fik l T from 5 ( cf fi ll fro ; g g r fro m

e
‘ ’
) m
E ( f
i
l m )
‘
‘
n s .
, o .
g b 3
a 3 1 fro m r m {g r from w a
r ( cf § 2 95
W , from fi e
v .
,
“
W from E li g m 1 fro m ,
2 W i th i nser t d f a fi{a r fro m lf a g kno w V FW fro m ‘ ’

‘
e -
.
,
f fro f fi( m ) W
cf fro cf
’
d ll m g (
‘
w m
‘
'
‘
aa fl a l a T
2
22
q H
'
e ,
.
, .
3 )
Some erbs m ke both forms ; th s from lgi either ta
3 06 . v a u ,
fi rm m en ; from a n either H fi i fl or W W
' '
or c
3 0 7 C s ti es d denomin ti es in W
. au m k 3 1m ; th s
a v an a v a e u ,
31 M .e n ; a s 711 3 5
1 1 61 1 ; E m
l W . ,
3 08 B a R oots in com p osition with p re p ositions (

. . . some or
times w ith elements f other k in ds d erbs no ns) t k e th o ,

as a v or u a e
s ffix fl before w hich is ne er inserte d A root which en ds in

u
‘ ‘
,
v .
3 09 m .
Eli R oots p rt en d
in s in a rtr and w hose p a ss . a .
-
form this g d i i ta l; th s ana 3 6 1 B t s ch m roots

er nn n
“
u ,
c -
,
0 . u u a -
( not roots ) m
a n-
y p reser e the n s l ; th s 1 11 3 F ina l c h nge v a a u
,
0 . a a
ble a becomes i t HTS ; th s fi fi fl fi F in l3 11 rem ins

l i
‘
a or u , , . a a
u n ltered ; th s m
a So m roots sho w we k for m be fore
u ,
. e a a
Lesson XXI X . 1 19
this s u ffi X ; th s u , Ri ta .
W ; t h a t (I I -
W ) fro m tr ai t; W
331 from a rty3
g g ; m fro
“
m F a q g
- -
‘
S IO C s ls . d deno m in ti es in W
au a reject those s y ll bles ;
an a v a
th s a sh r a m m ud ; wa t e r ; m um ; m m ; stra tu m
u ,
( m sfi )-
W B ,
t if the root ends in single consonu nt d a a an
encloses short 3 ! w hich is not lengthened in the c ti e then a us a v ,
the ger nd f the c s ends in W to d isting ish it from the

u o au .
,
u
ger n d f the sim p le erb ; th s Era m ger W

u o ; v wa u ,
-
,
. c a u sx
W a fi r ge s 4 1 m m
' - -
,
n
3l l The ger nd . bsol ti e i sed gener lly logic l d

u or a u v s u a as a a
junc t to the s bject of cl se I t denotes

u ction ccom p y
a n ing au . an a a a
or ( s lly) p receding th t which is signified by the erb f the

u ua a v o
cl se (I the l ter l ng ge it is t lw ys confine d to the

au . n a a ua no a a
g ramm ti l s abject f the

ca cl se u dj nct ) I t h o th s i au as a n a u . as u v r
tua lly the l e f i n d eclin

va u ble p rtici p le o
p resent an p st q l a a ,
or a , ua
i fy i g the ctor whose ction it describes

n a a .
Th s Hg w as?3 11 i sta r a re" ta gs 7 13 2 h i g he rd

u ,
“
av n a
this h ing b ndoned the go t h ing b thed he went to his

,
av a a a ,
av a ,
o w ho se
n u
3 I2 The ger nds . f so m e erbs h e not m ch m ore th n

u o v av u a
p pre osition l l e ; th s m a h ing

va u t ken i e withu li k e
,
‘
av a
’
,
. .
Gree k l fiw éxw ; Ha n h ing rele sed i e witho t exce p t

ta
'
v
,
’
v
"
av a
’
, . . u
’
,
’
.
3 IS Before l l ger n d s m y be sed the p ri

. a ti e W or w ;u a u va v
th s W
u ,
witho t h ing recei ed ; W 3 1 1 w itho t h ing u av v
” “
u av
s m m oned
u .
”
Voca b l
a ry u XX IX .
Ve r b s Wm a cq ire tt in re ch
u ,
a a , a .
W fi t (n ya sga ti )
’
entr st ( to u u go forth ; d i e .
one s c re ) ’
a .
Of co rse the b l t i often best rendered by rel ti e

u a so u ve s a r e a v
cl ses or e e by cl ses coordin te with the p rinci p l cl se

au , v n au a a au .
1 20 Lesson X XI X .
§ + Wfi 1 p u t the he d at a , ap W ictory
m .
,
v .
p oint as r ler o er
u v f mis f ort ne .
,
u .
W I] (p l ti ) mo e
r a ca a
'
v on W m wing ;. s i d e
, p rt y , a .
ma rch .
“ Eli m frog .
,
.
fi fl (
‘ ‘
c
) consider
c i n taig a ti . Elg fl f
'
p C eylon
.
,
n . r ., .
totter f ll “I t m hero
’
q (y t )
c a oa e ,
a . .
, .
t ke C f 3 I2 W m e ns d e ice
{ T
“
l a . . . n ., a ,
v .
5 11 + 3 1 p m l y or p l on a a ce .
fi g m bridge dike .
, , .
a f-
i
‘
TQ ( i n y ti ) bring t n r
'
a a o an
{W m p mon k e y k ing
.
,
n . r .
,
a -
.
end d etermine settle

, ,
.
m ;( a m
3 5)
3 m fire no .
0 .
,
.
“5 11+ f a ( i bh dj ti t ) distrib te v a ,
-
e u .
3 11 + I l(p dj ti ) w nder forth ;

r a vr a a 3]n is gree ble d a a .
le e one s home to become

av
’
a res p onsi b le tr stworth y ,
u .
w n d ering scetic
a a .
w d both u .
, .
S b st u fig
"
f , little
. sm ll ,
a .
am m l n d esign fi a t f d il y reg l r
“
a
p .
,
a ,
.
, .
, u a .
m bringing n .
,
. the he d on a .
aifi z m m on k e y .
,
.
Pr ep o s . :
afift t m
‘
ele p h nt
‘‘
c .
,
a .
n fa (p o s tp o s .
, wi th a ce .
) a g inst
a .
Ex erc ise XX IX .
fi mfi mfi fi u i fi m t h : " at "
11
2 ?
afir w
i
m fi e
r n 3 3um m ! Ef f m 1 : 3 s a n ti w
a r fi rm fi r
‘
mim m u u rfi rg t g t m fi r a m W W ? wa s
m a m m a t g m fita t 3 m m H m : R u m m a
’
fw fi f a é a g mt fi m m z t s l m r m
’
a
fi s mfwfii z u fi fi r m wfift fi a a g t a gi n fw u v fi r v
’
ls l g rei a fi m m g
’
a m sfl a fi m m z lu l m
afl m m ww m fi fi a z ré t w m
W W W w if e W m m u ls l s fi fii g fi é
1 22 Lesson XXX .
a
fi n ls
a
,
H
i f
,
“
c , q a nd
a rem in nch nged before
a
W u a ; th s u , fl a
g
,
W 3 “ wa s ; m a ri an s a s , fi rst ; as ,
W ; m
‘
c rse w ; 3 “ d well a lga
u
’
,
Other fin ls ch nge d ‘ ’
, . a a re a
a ccor d ing to the r les gi en in Lesson XX VI I I f the con u v or
v ersion f fin l conson nts before the p rtici p i ls ffix 3 Th s

o a a a a u . u ,
“ I , wa s ; wa s n ew e m Ref s
a n , ( ne w ; w
a e
si g n ? y a m fiq
‘
n et , si gn ; gr a a ga fi a tg m
“
, ; . .
m t G a ga , ; fi g,
“
fi ga ; 3 3 , am ; as a g a . l ; 7t
e . agq .
in l g becomes i t d fin l R a ; th s fi f
F a
g W ; a g, an a , u , ,
‘
k no w
W ( lso
’
,
W ) ; W W a , .
3 16 Th e di g .
3 31 w i t h (ei t h f m ( 33n ) i t ken

n by n e or s a
roots in fin l long 3 ? d the root I f} w ith f w other o w el

a an , a e v
roots ; by the m jority f roots in conson nts ; d b y erbs of the a o a an v
secon d ry conj g tions Th s 3g “f a y ; t a m y ; h e

a u a . u , ,
'
H iram ; a r e Eff ae fi m
r r ( f . , c .
3 I7 C s ti es d denomin ti es in we: h e m
. au a v thean a v av ,
root being tre ted in the p resent ; th s i t s W a ; Hive

as u ,
'
W ; as W a rm ,
.
3l 8 Some roots in conson nts insert

. reject t p le s re ; a or a a u
th s 113 1 m fi m I n ga
u , , The root i t?m k es 3 13W or
”
. a .
3 I9 The r les f the f 1 i n the infiniti e gree closel y

‘
. u or u se o v a
w ith those go erning its in the form tion f the f t re d

v u se a o s- u u an
of the m g ti
no in 3 en a en s ’
3 20 U s f th i fi i ti
. The chief
es o f the infiniti e is e n n ve . u se o v
as eq i lent to u va cc s ti e the object f erb es p eci lly

an a u a v , as o a v , a
f the erbs { ra be ble be worthy h e the right

d W
?
‘ ’ ‘ ’ ‘
o
g v a ,
an ,
av
The increme n ts f EB sometimes d inste d f o are an a o
at d
m
an ; es p eci ll y where d iffic lt co m b in tion of conson nts a a u a a
is th s oi de d
u av .
I ll the tense s y stems d in deri tion the root H

n a
§ an va
-
, ,
\
exhibits often the ddl i nste d of the g p strengthening vf

'
n a a e- .
Lesson XXX .
or p ower ; th s m fi rfi I fi ffif a he is ble to tell

’
u ,
‘ “
a
”
,
aw n( z the p rince o ght to he r it W é is often th s se d w ith

- “ ” ‘ ‘
u a . u u
V
the infiniti e to ex p ress res p ectf l eq est entre ty

v in the
a u r u or a ,
as
l s t x m p le The infiniti e is lso often fo nd w ith erbs f

a e a . v a u v o
m otion d with those me ning d esire ho p e notice k no w ‘ ’ ‘ ’ ‘ ‘ ’

,
an a , , ,
an d th li k e e .
S 2 I B t often t h . infiniti e h
u c se l e not cc s ti e e v as a a -
va u a u a v .
Th s d ti e l e Ra ff1 WW
u , a a v there is food to t i e
va u : - “
ea
”
. .
“
for e ting ; geniti e l e “ i f W 3 1: c p ble f going
a
”
a v va u : 1 “
a a o
”
.
E en v constr ction
a o m in ti e is t n k no w n
u as n a v no u .
3 22 I cert in connections the infiniti e h

. n a q i p ssi e v as a uas -
a v
f orce Th s ai m t a q: beg n to be m de ; fi it is
j
O
. u ,
g W 71 TT “
u a
” - “
not fit to be he rd This is es p eci lly freq ent long w ith the a .

”
a u a
ssi e forms th s 3 m he c nnot b ndon ”

p a v f 3 1
6 5 ; 3 1 3 7 7 7 o u ,
“
a a a ,
b twl
u
il ; a a n ? he c n n ot be b n d oned ; lfi“
m t
a ? “ a a
” ‘'
“
the t w o men be b ro ght hither ca n u .
”
323 F t P ss i P t i c i p l
. u ure Ge d i e C ert in d eri
a ve ar e, or
'
r un v . a v
a ti ve djecti es mostl y econ d ry h e c q ired

a v , l e q ite s a , av a u a va u u
li k e th t f the L tin ger n d i e ; th s

a o ( from
a
i n) t be doneu v u ,
‘
o
’
,
f i
a c end They mu s.
y b m d e fro m e ery erb Th ordin ry a e a v v . e a
s ffixes
u three 2 1 fl a t d w ill
a re : , ,
an .
3 24 A S f fi x a Before this s ffix fin l r dic l 3 ” b }

. . u a . u a a a e
comes Q ; th s fro m ‘
m u 51 21 b , Other fin l owels so m e , . . a v
times em in nch nged so m eti m es h e the g z

r a u a en the
,
av u za or ev
v r dd hi strengthening ; d Q often d i ii l w y s tre ted before an ar e a

-
an , a a ,
1] asbefore o w el ; th s fro m fa 3 a d Elisa ; fro m lfl fi t :

a v u , , an ,
d W ; fro m W d m m ; fro m a r e}; from vi E531 ; from

g fi
an an 3
, , ,
.
3
1, m ar I few . inst nces c short
. n owel a dds a before a ,
a v a
the s ffix ; th su
W 3
u 7 5 ( i i
, ) d Medi l 3 1 rem ins . . a a
The origin l l e f this s ffix is i H ence the con ersio a va u o u a . v n
f Q to fi l d of i f} to i t before i
l
“
t
o
i an .
1 2 4: Lesson XXX .
nch nged in
u a cl ss f words d i le gthened in nother
one a o , an s n a
cl ss ; th s 31 8 fi st w b t m a t (vi g ) W
a u , (W )
.
r
. . u ,
I niti l
e. m edi l i a d r owels
or someti m es nch nged
a ,
u , an -
v are u a ,
sometimes h e the g p strengthening ; th s i s ] 113 gi t; 3 31

av u a -
u , , , ,
aw m f The roo t m a m k es fi rm A for m W ( fro m

,
. . a .
the defecti e root w ) is ssigne d to g t arr Gri t m kes 3 11W

v a
“
i .
“
-
”
an d M g C s ti es d deno m in ti.es in W . tre ted au a v an a v a re a as
i the p resent b t o m it the s y ll bles W ; th s a

n ,
t u a u , ,
3 25 B S f fi x fl at This is second ry djecti e deri ti e “
. . u . a a a v va v
from the i fi i ti l no n in 31 H ence both reg rds the form f

n n va u .
, as a o
root d the or o m ission f t the r les

an u sethe s me f o , u are a as or
the form tion of the infiniti e th s W E I Elm a fa a a {Ef fl

a v u , ,
“
, t
f wf fi q [Q M ] Gener ll y r dic l o w el
3 26 . O Su fi x.
'
. a a a v s
w ill be fo n d g n ted before this s ffix ; c s ti es d d m i

u u a u au a v an en o n
ati es in are:
v tre ted i the p resent s ystem witho t the
"
are a as n -
, u
syll bles 3 m ; th s W wrfi fi a g ra ms:

'
a ai
u ,
The ger n d i es in a s : common in the im p erson l p

3 27 . u v are a as
i e constr ction described in Lesson X d not seldom h e

s v u ,
an av a
p rel y f t re sense ; th s 3 31 a m m m “f el t { ER with th t B

-
u u u u a
,
tho sh lt be h p py
u a a
”
a ry
Voca b l u XXX .
Ve r b s 2l
n Elél( a va g dl
‘
za te d
) i e n der
v u
i t ? h e the right etc

av ,
.
( a ce
) .
( cf ( t dp a tz, te) b rn ( tr d
'
.
an: -
u . an
m finish tt in in ; i s er
“
S ITE k -
, a a .
p a n
p ffa ss . u ,
§ + wv ~
m p a
y . do p en nce a .
7 m: wfi t
‘
-
v isit Efl fa rr nge ord in order
,
‘ '
a a , a , .
a ttend .
T L ( gtg ti ) d nce n
‘
a a .
126 Lesson x x x x x xr . .
14 .The m idens se ted the m sel es ( p p t ) in the g rden to

a a v a ss . ar . a
bind wre ths 1 5 Tr e friends a b 1e to s e from m isfort ne

. . u are a ~
av u .
1 6 The d
. ghters c me (p p t ) to b w before thei r p rents
au a a ss. ar . o a .
17 H w is the d elic te bo dy f this f ir

. o c p ble of en d ring a o a on e a a u
p en nce ? a 1 8 Y m st beco m e schol . r ( W ou

u
d f u a a u se an c .
§ l
77 ) 1 9 Y . m st bring .bo t to cross
ou the ri er 2 0 W h u a a v . . o
is ble to stop the m ighty wind ? 2 1 The gentle m en ( m )

a . u se
are to re d this letter 22 H ing finished the Ved he went on

a . . av a ,
to st dy the other sciences

u .
L e sso n XXX I .
3 28 . N u m er a l s . Ca r d i n a ls : 1135 1 , g 2, fi t 3 , i r r 4,
i g
“
113 5,
“ l 6 , a }: 7 , 7 13 9,
3 11 1 0
1
m 1 1, 33 31 1 2 ,
“ ii i ?! 1 4, “3
3 31 1 5 , 51m m?« a n : 1 7
1 ,
m u “ ,
m 1 9, rm 20 .
m am 2 1, m a 2 2, etc .
fi m r
3 0, a m fi fl q 40 W , i t 5 0 , Ef 00, “ fit 7 0 , a ma
’
fa s o , a s fa 9 0, a ?
! 1 00 .
rm or
3 n a 2 0 0 .
m 1 0 0 0,
f a n g s; 3 or or “ i;
W f 21000000 0 0
EHHEH
‘
,
.
3 29 The n m b ers bet w een the e en tens

. u m de by p v are a re
fi i g the ni t n m b er to the ten ; th s qa fa a f a 2 5 B t note

’
x n u -
u u , . u
d 9 2 either faste n
m 11 42 5 2 6 2 7 2
—
113 5 1 3 3 t 11 ,
no ,
.
, , ,
an ,
fi mt
‘
3 13 etc
or; 4 3 — 7 3 d 9 3 either
0
, f a 2121 3 5
.
11 etc ; , an ,
o or 0
.
4 8 —7 8 d 9 8 either a g am m etc 9 6 i a f a “ “ ’
an o or o . s .
, , ,
3 3 0 There other w ys f ex p ressing the n mbers between

. a re a o u
the tens Th s 1 By the . f the dj W

u : d eficient. in com u se o a .
‘ ’
,
p osition ; e g M FR 20 .less . i e This s ge is ‘

. . u a
not common excep t for the ni nes Sometimes Q fl i is left ff d .

‘
o , an
W W etc h e the s me l e 2 By the dj m ,

. av or a va u . . a .
W m ore lso
‘
in co m p osition ’
; e
, g w a a fa ( ls o . .
, a
s te m H i fa) 9 8
a .
Le sson XXX I . l2 7
The s me m etho d s
33l . sed to f m th dd n um bers a are u or . e o
a bo e 100 Th s Ham d a w n W M 1 0 8 n s t fi m u a a w é
v . u ,
-
,
'
a m t mm 1 07 .
3 32 . I n fl e cti o n o f ca r di n al . s 1 .
”
( is decline
i ii d li k e q é t , a
§ 23 | some (p cert
l : in .
‘ ’
,
‘
a The d l does not occ r ua u .
m so m eti m es m e ns cert i ; a
‘
a a n
’
or e en n
v i ndefinite
‘
a ,
a
’
,
as an
a rticle .
2 g ( d l only}is q ite reg l r ; th s

. m ua v m a u u a u , no .
-
a cc .
-
oc . .
, ,
n
3; W WK ,
3 f a is in m sc
. d ne t ne rly reg l r ; the fer h the a . an u . a u a n . as
stem f a g Th s nom m m . m fi x nom n u ,

. .
, a cc . .
,
.
-
a cc. .
fi fm; instr f a fi qa d t bl m g m .
m loc fa g ,
a .
-
a .
, en .
,
. .
F m e nom. : {HE EL instr m d t

. b l fa “
-
g
a cc gen . .
,
a .
-
a .
,
.
ta m loc ta g . .
4 i
f}? . h W K in t g ; the fem stem isasw a g s ro n c a se s . .
Th s u m m fl an ( q
,
no m W ; nom.
am fi ;.
-
, a cc. . .
-
a cc. u.
nstr W K etc F m nstr etc w

Q
m
c
i . m . e . no .
-
a c c. ,
i .
,
.
, ,
“ EM M W W , 3 3 123
( 5 These n mbers h e no distinction f gender The y u av o .
are inflected with some irreg l rity p l r ls Th s u a as u a . u
5 , 7 . 9. 1 0 a s , na fi n t , wa s , 3 1m fla g Ha , a s .
3
. .
,
a , and com p o nds of 3 31 simil rl y d ecline du ,

are a .
follows 3 3 W W qw a W
as : , ,
E
gg
8 fl ? m y follow I ra or be declined th s wi
a ,
u : t “ I f“ ,
” 41K , M ,
W e
2 0, 3 0 , etc m .
, fi m etc , .
,
are declined r eg l rl y u a as
fe m . ste m s in lln mbers ,

a u .
1 0 0, 1 000 .
317 1 a nd
m a re declined reg l rly u a as ne t u .
ste m s in ,
al
l n mbers
u .
333 . Co n st ti o f m e ls 1 The w ords fro m 1 to

r uc n o nu ra . .
a re u sed as a djecti es greeing in c se ( d in gender if p ossible )

v ,
a a an ,
1 28 Lesson XXX I .
with the no ns 2 The n m er ls bo e 1 9 u s lly tre te d

. . u a a v are u ua a as
no ns either t king the m bered no n

u ,
d e p endent geniti e
a nu u as a v ,
or st n d ing in the ing in p p osition with it ; th s m m

a s . a u ,
“ fm h ndred fe le sl es W m i si x t
“ ” “
or F : m ; a uy a av n
t m ns
au u
”
.
3 34 Or di n a ls. mam “ ‘
fi r st ’
fi fi q gai } fla w
'
.
, z , n , a g e , ,
T3 , W m m
, m , m , , ( to 1 9 th, the s me a as the
c r din ls b t decline d like 3 3 raw
“
a a ,
u Fa n 2 oth ; , or
fi g f x
a “ or 3 0 th etc Note lso m m il , . a or ,
m fi ufm
a w a i t taff mu 1 9 th The shorter f r m s ( m et )
s
-
e ,
. o e
are by f the commoner ar .
3 35 W W . d
T i m m k e , their fem in the an a .
rest in 31 Occ sion l for m s f the p rono m in l declension

,
“
. a a o a a re
m t with from the first three ; b t the

e s l declension f no ns u u ua o u
i the norm l
s f ordin ls a lso
a one or a .
336 N m l d e b
. 1 H m
au
: once er a ; fi g twice
a v r; m s. .
‘ ’ ‘ ’
‘
thrice ; W fo r times ; a m
’ ‘
113 3 1“ ufi times ; ’
or
‘
ve
’
an d with M
so on,
m 2 W O in w y ; or 0 . .
‘
o ne a
’
W i t “ in t w
or w y s ; f a i n or 3
3
‘
W a fi é l T 5 3
o 13 “B ET a
’ 2
,
‘
t
or
“ a n e w — 3 m by ; . b y h n d re d s etc one o ne
’ ‘
u
’
,
.
Voca b l
a ry u XXX I .
Ve b r s w in c s au .
( bkoj a ya ti )
'
feed .
3 55
1 + a n; ( sa rh ka l y
a a
'
ti ) p t
u to fa t i + Wfi ] ( a bhi si ii c a
'
ti ) noint a
gether , a dd . as k ing .
an “ wfi r pa ss ( f ti m e)
o .
a+a g m ~ = cite , m ention .
W U a
’
l
p i)
a f s p e k ch t
a , a .
Sub t s W m n ., n .
p r . a city .
a i S
r EQ
- m . the fo rth V ed
,
u a .
N form s no or d in l a .
1 30 Lesson XXX I XXX I I ‘
. .
Ri k erses 1 3 K r s n is the el d est f i brothers 14 Arj n

-
v . . a o s x . . u a
is the third mong the fi P a nd s 15 Some thin k t h ere a ve a va . .
a re eight t f m rri ge others i (m d l f t 2 d

so r s o a a ,
s x o e a er n
t i S
sen en c e k it b ) 1 6 T w ent
n
y se en t w ent
a ns r y eight l n r a o ve . .
-
v or - u a
m nsionsa m entione d in stronomy 1 7 One sho ld consecr te

are a . . u a
a Bra hm n in hi eighth ye r K t i y in hi e le enth V a i cy

a s a , a sa r a s v ,
a a
in hi twelfth 1 8 T w gre t lights shine in the k y 1 9 The

'
s . . o a s . .
te cher h ing t ght the fifth Ri k erse recite d the sixth

a , av au -
v , .
20 Ca k y m
. i B d dh die d in the eightieth y e r of h i
a un g ( if )
l u a a s a e e .
21 Sometimes 33 gods
. reck one d in the V e d someti m es 3 333 are a , .
L e s so n XXX II .
r s f Adj ct i
3 37 . Deri ti e djec ti es h ing
Co m p a i on o e ve s. va v a v av
com p r ti e d s p erl ti e me ning

a a v an often d m ore origin
u a v a or , an
a lly merel y intensi e l e

, a m de either ( A ) d irectly from v va u are a .
roots ( by p rim ry d eri tion ) ( B ) fro m other deri ti e

a m va ,
or . va v o r co
p o n d stems
u
( y
b secon d r y d eri tion ) a va .
3 3 8 A The s ffixes f p rim ry d eri tio the

. .
N f u o a va n are or
com p r ti e d a f a the s p erl ti e The root before them is

v ,
an or u a v .
a ccente d d s ll y strengthened by g n ( if c p ble f it)

, an u ua u a a a o ,
or
sometimes by n s li tion p rolong tion I cl ssic l S ns k rit a a za or a . n a a a
f w s ch form tions
e u in ; d these tt ch themsel es i n
a are u se an a a v
m e ning mostl y to other djecti es from the s me root which see m

a a v a ,
t obe their corres p on d ing p ositi es I p rt ho w e er they v . n a , v , are
connecte d w ith w or d s nrel te d to them in d eri tion u a va .
3 3 9 Th s fi lfi q d fi fq ( / f t) tt ch themsel es ‘
to
q .
g j u fi an t a a v
fa n q ick ; 3 13 “ d fi ft y ( V to
’
W
‘
3
u an
‘
bro d ; tum a d W W
’
worse d w orst to the s b st an ,
‘ ’
an
‘ ’
,
u .
m u ; qfi qq d q g to 11g skilf l ; t ra m d m to ‘ ’
'
an u an
,
Lesson XXX I I . 131
i t s vr ;
“
t m and a ft-rs , to a re a or
m ; mu m and
W e to ( mg .
The follo w ing

3 40 . ex m p les f rtifici l connections a re a o a a
wfi a afi ne r 3 m 3 m ; a re : little w he n a fe s
‘ ’ ‘ ’ “
a , . . .
c
( b t lso
u a m a fl i rt
“
s ) ; 1m he y m m a f
, t e r RT E ? ‘
av
’
, .
‘
long m ’
m f w ; W E I p r ise w orth y , good {fra g

‘
a
’
,
‘ ’
,
, better i t? b t ; fi m d e r am 3 m; a g m ch sla g ‘
cs
’ ‘
a
’
, ,
' ‘
u
’
, ,
U fi m;
i W yo ng i n fl a t e t i re s ;
‘
a s ld
u e s t a te
’
at.
‘
o
’
. .
“
f fig em u Q
‘
. d $218 corres p ond sometimes to m g

-
an or m g ,
sometimes to 33 .
3 4 l The ste m s in inflecte d li k e or d in ry d jecti e

{ 3 1 a a v s
. a re
i i t
n w ith the ,
fem i n =; fl ; those i 2“ h e p ec li r d . n
“
av a u a e
l i
c en s o n with strong ste m in m
, ad fem h a} for ,
an .
,
w hich 25 5 So lso m d i “
“
i
se e . a an .
3 42 B The s ffixes f second ry d eri tion at d 6m

“
. . u o a va are an
They of lmost nrestricte d

a re a Th t form of stem is s lly u u se . a u ua
t k en w hich p p e rs before
a initi l co nson nt f c se ending
a a an a a o a a -
.
Ste m s i n fi g l w y s nch nge d ; fin l {a d m becom

a re a a u a a an e
{Q d
W fte
an which the i t of
, the as ffix becomes
r
g u .
Th s rm fi rem enc a w£a t“ W w as ; f ar - °

u , . , ,
,
31K f e as t sm
”
» ,
So m e stems which
3 43 . s bst nti es r ther th n djecti es a re u a v a a a v
a refo nd t form deri ti es f com p rison ; th s W W most

u o va v o a u ,
‘
m otherl y most m nl w most li e ele h nt

W
’ ’
y , a n k p
‘
a
’
,
‘
an a .
3 44 C m p i s o f Ad r b s Ad erbs
. o com p re d b y d ding
ar n o ve . v are a a
the s ffixes i n the forms m g d m ; th s g wel l ( I d

u an u ,
‘ ’
,
“ ‘
w ,
sa w t
st ct i
3 45 W ith .co m p r ti e ( d sometimes with
Co n ru on . a a a v an
other w ords se d in simil r w y) the b l ti e is the reg l r

u a a a a a v u a
constr ction ; th s W u T HQ : fi en fi d ghter is d e rer

u ,
‘ “
a au a
h i m th n m m intellect lone ’
t o ; n f f
a a 3 a a i so n
” “
a s
V
9
1 32 Lesson XXX I I .
stro ger th n force After the s p erl ti e eith er geniti e loc ti e

n a
”
. u a v v or a v
m y be a se d The com p r ti e often h t h force f strength

u . a a v as e o a
ene d s p erl ti e ; th s m m most honor ble

u a v u ,
‘
a
’
Vo ca b l
a ry u XXXII .
Su b t s fi fi g m .
,
n .
p the
r I.n d,
s -
u .
W 5 m .
,
one o f b nd of celes W
a a m .
,
d r nk rd
u a .
ti l singers
a ,
a G n dh r a En a a va .
r m .
,
w inter .
m
{ a .
,
n .
p r. Adj
W n .
,
r nning co rseu , u .
W little sm ll ; , a as n. su bst .
,
(1
m m the world s p irit
.
,
-
. tom a .
m m .
,
d eli er nce s l tion
v a ,
a va .
m swift .
fi fi qfi
‘ ‘
f .
,
n .
p r.
m f {T n} s ch
i ,
.
,
u .
Efi g et l ; iron
‘ ‘
n .
, m a .
m f 3 ” d, old .
0 an .
W m crow .
, .
a f fifl : bi d ing being a ,
.
g a m m s y stem f p h i l a a o o so p h
y .
I d ecl n
“m m f .
,
n .
p r. a m ti m
“
i
so fe if es n sen se o .
Ex erc ise XXX II .
si ts? m m tum was f a m

‘
a uto l
’
w s fi mfi § m fi "
a ufi fi n na n
“
a a E
x l : t :
m m a% : m h sfi gv fifi a a m lw as
t ra um a 1 a na me?m zii o ft nfixi t 8 I a t?fi s m i

“
m
i mfia m fi fi fisw
'
? r en Earn s :
fi a
e vam vi a lu l
U f m mmfi m m rfi sfi t 1 1 33 1 11 5 2 1 3 3 w ith Q ! t ra
fi fi m fi fi rfi fi t z a s f a fi fisvm a fit W e mfi ne
m é na
we rfi ia fi l ‘
g fi sm m m m c an :
“
win sm w i ru i e : m i fi
“ '
’
a rt 3 13 W : o n ur
si m I m as. m fi
‘
t ufu fizs r ej “ fla g
'
tu n so a a sr
“
si
m u as u
Tr nsl te a a as tho gh geniti e

u v .
Lesson XXXI I I .
an ncom p o nded st te wo ld be connected by

u u a E g u
33 . .
“ T
M d one d ‘
n d one ; aa fl m an é m fi m : go d s u d G ’ ‘ ‘
an a n
dh a r va s d men The members f s ch com p o nd m y b i

an
’
. o u a u a o v
o us l y be f y n mber
o t w o
an m ore u ,
or .
I I D t er m i
. ti e om p o nds f w hich the former m e m ber i
na ve c u ,
o s
t
sv n a c ti ll y de p en
ca d en t the l tter its dete r mining on q li a , as or ua
fy i g n dj nct being either

a u o n limiting it in c se rel tion
: a n u a a -
a ,
or an djecti e a d erb d escribi g it

v or Th s m y be d istin
an a v n . u a
g i
u s h d e t w b c l sses o A D su p d -
t d aB D sc i p t i: e com. e en en , an . e r v ,
p o nu d s ; their di fference is t bsol te no a u .
E x m p les a f d e p en d ents wf m fi m
are : rm y f enemies ;
o ,
’ ‘
a o
’
0m w ter for th feet ; m a m d e with h n d s ; of

” ‘ ’ ‘ ’
a e a a
d escri p ti es 31 3 1 “ v gre t k ing fi lfl m 3 5 3 2) d e r frien d ;

,
‘
a ,
‘
a
’
g ia n b d l y d one
‘
a
’
.
3 48 The ch . c er f com p o nds f cl sses I d I I

ara t o u o a . an as
p rts
a of s p eech is determined b y their
,
fin l me m b er d they a ,
an a re
c p ble f being resol ed into eq i lent p hr ses by gi ing the

a a o v u va a v
ro
p p er in d e p en d ent for m d form l me ns f connection to an e ch a a o a
mem b er B t this is not tr e of the thir d cl ss which ccor dingl y

. u u a ,
a
is more f n d ment lly d istinct from them th n they from e ch

u a a a a
other .
3 49 I I I S co d r y Ad j c t i
. . com p o n ds the l e f w hich
e n a e ve u ,
va u o
is t gi en by sim p le resol tion into t heir com p onent p rts b t

no v a u a ,
u
which tho gh h ing fin l member no n

,
u av themsel es d
as a a u ,
are v a
j t
ec i ve s These . g in f t w b cla sses a A P ssess i
a re como o su -
a : . o ve
o n s which no n com o n s the rece ing cl ss A

“
p u d , p d f
a re p d u -
( I I u o a . .
or w ith the i d e f h ing dd e d t rning them from no ns a o

‘
av
’
a ,
u u
into djecti es ; d B com p o n ds in w hich the seco d mem b er is

a v an . u n
This cl ss f com p o n d s is f co m p r ti el y recent d e el

a o u o a a v v
o p m e n t ; onl y the othe r t w c mmon in others f the rel te d o are o o a
tong e u s .
Lesson XXXI I I . 135
a no n s y nt ctic ll y dep en d ent the first n mel y 1 P r ti c i p i l

u a a on : a , . a a
com p o n d s ( only V e d ic) f p resent p rtici p le w ith its follo w ing

u ,
o a a
object ; d 2 P p i ti l com p o nds f p rep osition d f l

an . ro os ona u , o a an o
lo w ing no n This w hole b cl ss B is com p r ti el y sm ll

u . su - a a a v a .
E x m p les Erf fi fl p ossessing hero rmy ; 1 15 1t h ing ‘ ’ ‘

a : a -
a av
d esire f p rogeny o W excessi e ‘

v
’
.
3 5 0 The djecti e com p o nds

. li ke sim p le djecti es some
a v u a r e, a v ,
times sed es p eci ll y in the ne ter

u ,
bstr ct d collecti e
a u ,
as a a an v
n o ns ; d in the cc s ti e
u an d erbs O t of these ses h e
a u a v as a v . u u av
gro w n p p rent cl sses of com p o n d s reck one d d n me d s ch

a a a u ,
an a as u
by th H ind gr mm ri ns
e u a a a .
3 5 l A com p o n d m y lik e
. sim p le wor d become member
u a , a ,
a
i
n nother com p o n d d
a in d efinitely The n l y sis f
u , an so on . a a o a
com p o n d ( exce p t co p l ti es) of wh te er length m st be m d e

u u a v , a v , u a
by series f bisections Th the d e p en d ent com p o n d

a o . us u
d one in re io s existence i first di isi b le into d ’
3 3 , p a v
$ 3 u , s v an
the d escri p ti e asa mt then this into i ts t w elements

v T- , o .
35 2 E ph i c m b i n at i
. i co m p
n ds
on c The fin l f ste m
o on n oun . a o a
i co m bine d with the initi l of nother stem in co m p osition ccording

s a a a
t the gener l r les for

o t r l combin tion
a B t
u ex e n a a . u :
1 F in l {
q. d W fa
p rior m ember becomean
{ t
i d E S
L o a an
before s rd g tt r ls dent ls d l bi ls ; th s m
u u u a ,
a , an a a u , .
2 F in l W . f p rior m ember
a often re m ins o nch geda d er a u an un
simil r circ mst nces

a u a .
3 After fin l fig initi lQ often beco m es ling l “ “
.
3 a , , an a ua .
4 Prono ns gener lly t ke the ste m for m

. u f the ne ter ; f a a -
o u or
the p erson l p rono ns oftenest sed Hg d E ? in the sin g

a u a re u an
“
3 1m d i the p l
g g g
"
on an n .
5 F W e . in the p rior
or m ember f descri p ti e d p osse s o v an s
i vecom p o n ds is sed 313 1 u , u .
6 A c se form in th p rior member is

. a -
t ery r re e no v a .
1 36 Lesson XXX I I I .
35 3 cl sses f com p o nds cert in ch nges f fin l

. In al
l a o u ,
a a o a are
li ble to p p e r in the concl ding member ; gener lly they h e the

a a a u a av
e ff ect f tr nsferring the com p o nd

o a whole to the ad eclension u as a -
:
Th s 1 A stem in m often dro p s the fin l 31

u : . in W ag a ,
as O
,
W
,
N ki
i m 2
,
A 0
i is ch nge d to W in
.
33
2 1 . o or a ,
as 0
,
O
N 3 An
.
3 is dd ed fter fin l conson nt sometimes e en
. a a a a a ,
”
a fter o w el or d i p hthong in 3 13 ( W ) 1 13 (1 h )
an u -v a , as 0
,
.
The sep r te cl sses of com p o n d s wil l w be t k en p

a a a u no a u .
( P rt I I ) a .
354 . I . COp u la t i ve c m p ds T w o
o ou n . or ore no ns m ch
m u u
less often djecti es a v ,

an d once t w ice or a d erbs
v h ing av a co
or d in te constr ction
a u ,
as tho gh joined by
u an d ’
,
so m etimes m
a re co
bi d into df
’
ne mp a co o un
3 5 5 The no n co m p o nds f ll
. reg rds their i fl ti form u -
u a , as a n ec ve ,
into two cl sses a :
A The com p o nd h the gen d er d declension f i t fi n l

. u as an o s a
mem ber d is in n mber d l , an

p l r l ccor d ing to i t u a ua or u a ,
a s
logic l l e denoting either two

a va u more th n t w in di i d l
as , or a o ,
v ua
things E x m p les .
Efi fg fl é f rice d b rley ; ( m a i
a a re
‘ ’ ‘
an a
’
Wi R a m d Krs n ; w : go ts d shee p ; a tw fa
' ‘ ’ ‘ ’
a an a a an
W Br a hm ns K s t i y
fi
V i ey d Qfi d ; filfl lfli l
o ’
a , a r a s, a as an ra s
3 5 2 6) f ther
’
,d ‘
a an so n .
B The com p o n d witho t reg rd to the n mber d enoted

. u , u a u or
to the gen d er of its constit ents b ecomes ne ter sing l r collecti e u , a u u a v
(so c -
lled
a m a h a d d ) Th s
sa
W an h n d d footra ;
-
va n va . u ,
‘
a an
’
G fiw sn k e d ichne mo ; m ‘
a 3 5 3 3) m an u n
’
,
‘
u
brell d sho ; i mam

a an 3 5 3 2) d y d night
e
’
,
‘
a a n
’
.
3 5 6 The l ter l ng ge p reser es se er l d l com b in tions

. a a ua v v a ua a
This cl ss i c lle d by the H in d s d d a co p le ; b t s a u va n va ,

‘
u
’
u a
d d
va n f djecti es the y do not recogni e
va o a v z .
p rior member st nds in y p ossible c se rel tion

a Th s mm an a -
a . u ,
‘
gone to the ill ge ; ag fé g Ve d k no w ing ; v a f a qxfi a ’ ‘
a -
’
‘
p rotecte d b y O i ; 21? ?n “a E )D R ! goo d
va f the’
O W S
‘
Ol
‘
C
’
Q fi fi rfl
Q f llen from- the k y ; HW
‘
a H Q W more mo b ile th s
’ ‘
a n
w es ; fiqm E TWI I) best f Br ahm ns ;

’ ‘ ’
’
av o a
W a g ? coo k e d in p t ‘
a o
’
.
3 6 l C om p o n d s f this sort h ing

. fi n l member the b re
u o av as a a
root sometimes mo dified in form d if i t end origin l ly ,

an ,
a
in short owel gener l ly w ith

a v dd e d i t ,
ery n mero s a an a a re v u u :
th s w a g bo e
u , ( E m
l st nad ing in the
v w gon (
“ ‘
a a
’
or
si m p l y i the ‘
H a ll on the he d ; m
n onl y born ‘
a
’ “ -
W 3 5 2 G) forest d welling g fi , q I firm ‘

in b tle ; I ra -
’ ‘
at
’
f HGl born in the he rt ( i

‘
a
’
. 0 .
3 6 2 B D escr i p t i c m p d s I this d i isio f the deter

. . ve o ou n . n v n o
mi ti
na the p rior member st n d s to the other in no d istinct c se
ve s , a a
rel tion b t q lifies it djecti el y or d er bi lly ccor d ing th

a ,
u ua a v a v a , a as e
fin l mem b er is no n
a djecti e Th s fi rqa q u35 3 Fl
or a m a v . u , ,
‘
well d one ; W -
e il doing ’ ‘
v - ’
The co m p o n ds f no n l e c nnot wel l be se p r ted in u o u -

va u a a a
t re tment fro m those f djecti e

a l e o a v -
va u .
3 6 3 The sim p lest c se is th t in w hich

. no n fin l member a a a u as a
is p recede d by q lify ing djecti e p rior member Th s 3 5 a ua a v as . u ,
m SEQ ? ! W t) bl c k horse ; W m gre t m I nste d

‘ ’ ‘ ’
a a an . a
o f djecti e the p rior member is i

an a v ,
f w c ses no n sed n a e a a u u
a
pp osition ll y or with q i d
a jecti e l e ; th s m f fi i p riesta ua s -
a v va u u ,
‘
s ge ; ( Ta fi k ing s ge
a
’ ‘
‘ -
a
’
.
3 64 Sometimes com p o nds f this sort ex p ress

. com p rison ; u o a a
th s m m bl ck
u , th nder clo d ( cf co l b l ck etc )
‘
a as a u -
u
’
.
‘
a -
a
’
,
.
R e erse d fierce tiger ’ ’

o
‘ ‘
m m
v
H a n n a t g
, ; an- 1 er ,
1 . e ., a an as a
Liter ll y tiger w hich is not tiger fter ll b t m

a , a a a a , u a an.
Or p erh p s better tiger f (or mong) men ( so W hitney)

,
a ,
‘
o a
’
.
Lesson XXX I I I . 1 39
“ fa g
‘
foot lot s
-
u
’
, i e .
.
‘
a foot lo el y v as a
lot s u
’
.
d erbi l words m ost com m onl y sed

3 65 . Th e parior v a u as
m embers f descri p ti e com p o n d s q lify ing the other member

o v u ,
ua
,
a re the erb l p refixes v d the w or d s of dire ction

a an
rel te d to them ; li k e w ise the insep r ble p refixes W

a i t p ri a a or va
ti e 3 well
v ,
ill etc These
‘
co m bine d with no ns ( in
’
,
‘ ’
,
. a re u
q i djecti
ua s l l e) wel l w ith djecti es Th W
-
a va
‘
va t u as as a v .
s
u s, no
done ; wufi lg a not schol r ; wa s} misfort ne ; wf fi fl

’ ‘
a a
’ ‘
u
’ '
m ore th n god ; WW I excee d ingly f ; fi f e[3 1a excessi

‘ ’ ’ “ ‘
-
a a ar ve
fe r ; qfi mfi O p p osing side
a
’ ‘ ‘
.
’
Voca b l
a ry u XXXIII .
dj ya tz, t e) be
’
Ve r b s : ( L ? (
“
E i t anar -
W com p lete HR . e oted to inclined to

d v ,
gq + fi t st tion p l ce a ,
a ,
a pp oint E F L lI.
t go w y ( jo rney
-
) a a on a u .
Su b t s . W? n ,
ste p . p l cea
m an s; m i ky a r, s t
o ri m .
,
n p r
W m hermit ge a
m f q een 1 ,
u
f ch se
El
l m .
,
n. p r .
W .
,
a .
W m .
,
boy p rince ,
.
“
a m f m rch jo rn ey ; s pp ort
.
,
a , u u .
m f .
,
g m e s p ort
a ,
. i f“ m r ce f mily .
,
a ,
a .
f a a ai
' '
m .
,
o r n a m en t
'
( f t
o en
3 a m m st te f ff irs ; news .
,
a o a a .
b thing p l ce ; p l ce f
n , . a -
a a o W T f fe m le frien d .
,
a .
p ilgrim ge a .
W m hos p it lity .
, a .
f a fifi i fi ai} f
’
the threefold
n A dj
O
'
.
,
world .
m f ,
.
c
a n, s it ble
u a .
w m p 5
9
1 5.1 1,
fn . r.
“
, .
“
m ,
dop ted
a .
W m p nther .
,
a .
m é f in the m nner
,
f m i . ne r ; t b t a o ,
. a a s n eu . su s .
,
s it ble f the G n dh r s
or u a icinity ne rness p resence
o r, a a va . v , a , .
fg w f 3 11 he
,
enl y di ine
.
0
Ad ,
av , v .
~
v. :
W f h m n , E
.
U e rlier for m erly u a . a , .
Ex e rc ise XXXIII .
? i W W F W 3
"
m m m fi W
-
: ct:
c a g
“
g a u
fi a i v vm v a a a $3 3 1 n f a ga fi f a au f a rfi M a ir?
’ ’ "
um um : a I m a? W fl m fi sfi e tfi fi r ’
fi u a fi fim m é ’ ”
fi m m
‘
sa f e av m a z s a s f ve r nc a n
‘
m m fim ls l w e: w
’
afi afi fi gm
fi fi i i
’
F m f m f
-
W W
'
“ { a H a g n 7 fl
l n a a a B a r ( 1
‘
e 3
v v
arfi vfi e zlu la m m rfi ém mfi fl ffi e fi am g fw
i f sm 7 m: m fi e fi a r a m m fm ft m ga ra g
( F or m c o mp o u n ds o f w o r ds j o i n ed by hyp h en s) .
hen he h d seen her brilli nt

7 . W p p t ) with di
a ,
a r es . ar .
v ine be ty -
tho gh (( a ) more tb h m n the he rt f the
au ,
as u -
an -
u a ,
a o
k ing s ge w -
incline d ( p
a
p t ) to w r d her
as 8 There p on a ss . ar . a . . u ,
h ing le rne d th t h ( ) w th d ghter f A p s r s

av a a s e a cc . as e au -
o a n- a a
he m rrie d her by the g a n dh r ceremony (fi lm ) s it b le for

a a va -
u a -
K s t iy a r 9 D t fter d w elling ery m ny d y s d nights

a s. . u s sa n a, a v a a -
an -
in the hermit ge b n done d Q k t la d ret rne d to his w a ,

a a a un a an u -
o n
city 1 0 After w r ds when K n h d finishe d his p ilgrim ge

. . a ,
a va a a ,
d ret rne d to the hermit ge le rning (f a ) the news f his

4 l
an u
g a a o
- -
,
d ghter s m rri ge he sent her into the p resence f D

’ 2 3
au -
a a t ,
- - -
o -
u s sa n a .
1 1 The ro y ls ge t first d iso w ne d ( W T E I L Q J

. a -
C k a t l
a w h a -
GT a un a en
h w
s e m to the i ty ; b t t l st he
a s co e
z-
p t -
m a 7 fi ) -
c
l
u a a ar x °
\
her i the p l ce f the fi t q een 12 I the co rse f tim

a - -
a
3-
o - -
rs
1-
u
2
. . n u o e
To eng ge in the a sp ort of h nting u

”
; of . below , 3 75 , 3 .
1 42 Lesson XXX I V .
A P ss ssi c m p d s The p ossessi es

3 7I . . o d t mi
e ve o oun . v are e er n
a ti e com p o n ds to w hich
v gi en both u djecti e inflection are v an a v
( j
as st sho w n )
u d lso d jecti e me ning f k ind
, best an a an a v a o a
d efined by d d ing h ing to the me ning f the d etermin ti e ‘ ’

a av a o a v .
Th s the d e p en d ent am
u ,
be ty f g d b ecomes the n .
,
‘
au o a o
’
’
,
p ossessi e 23 6 t h 3 11 m f v h ing h be t y f g d ; 0
,
. . n .
,
‘
av t e au o a o
’
the descri p ti e fi m 3 m long m beco m es the p ossessi e

v .
,
‘
ar
’
,
v
m f n h ing long . .
‘
av
3 72 De p en d en t com p o nds
. by com p rison t often th s u are, a ,
no u
t rned into p ossessi es B t p ossessi el y sed d escri p ti es

u v . u v u v a re
extremely freq ent d rio s ; d some hin ds f combin tion u an va u an o a
which r re in p rop er d escri p ti es

a re a ery common p v a re v as os
s e ssi ve s .
An djecti e p rior m ember t k es the m sc line stem

3 73 . a v as a a u
form e en tho gh referring t feminine no n in the fin l member ;

,
v u o a u a
th s Q ua m fi ( fro m 3 11 151 ) p ossessing be tif l wi fe

u ,
‘
a au u
’
.
3 7 4 As p rior members . fo n d are u
1 A djecti es p ro p er ; th s W f other form 2 P rti

’
. v u ,
o . . a
c i p l ; th s m
es w hose mother is sl i
u ,
3 N mer ls ; ‘
a n
’
. . u a
a
th s a gfi q fo r f ced ; fi fi tfi a three e y e d
u ,
‘
4 N o ns
u -
a
’ ‘ - ’
. . u
with q i r dj ti l l e ; th s f m g fi gol d h n d e d E
ua s a ec va va u u ,
‘ -
a
’
. s
p i
ec ally common is the f no n p rior me m ber to q lify u se o a u as ua
the other p p osition ll y by w y

a f eq i lence These m y a ,
or a o u va . a
well be c lle d p p si ti l p ss ss i es Th s W 1“ h ing

a a o on a o e v . u ,
‘
av
“
Krs n me ; éfi w
a
”
ash ing men w ho na heroes ; ’ ‘
Q
‘
av are
’
‘
Efl t fl
‘
fl q i g s p ies ‘
e y es ; m
‘
ans nh ing thee m as
’ ‘
av as es
senger 5 A d er b i l elements ( es p eci lly inse p r b le p refixes ) ;

’
. . v a a a a
This cl ss f com p o nds is c lle d by the n a o u a a ti es b h i h ;

v a u vr
’
the n me is ex m p le f the cl ss m e ning h

a an a o a , a
‘
av ing m ch rice u
’
.
The p ossessi e m y gener lly in ccente d texts v a a ,

a ,
be d isting ishe d u
fro m the origin l determin ti e by di ff erence of a a v a accent .

Lesson XXX IV . 1 43 ‘
th s u , endless ; W3? chil d less ; 1333 with excellent

W
‘ ’ ‘ ’
1 ‘
sons a
; g r qfi
’
i l
l s ored The ssoci ti e‘
p refix a (
- less often
av
’
. a a v
U 3 ) is t re te d li k e djecti e element ; th s m
a f li k e for m
an a v u ,
‘
o
Hg? am orwith h ing one s

v
‘
long w ith ;
a so n or
‘
av
’
so n a one
’
W ( G + Q
W n ) f or ble 6
‘
O rdin ry erb l p .
‘
av a
’
. . a
.
v a re
fi x es ; th s m a n f wi de f me ; mg limbless ; fi rst-1
u ,
‘
o a
’ ‘ ’
‘
p o w erless ; m with p lifte
’
d f ce 7 Ordin r y d erbs
‘
; u a
’
. . a a v
th s { g fi rfl w ith mind d irecte d hither

u ,
‘ ’
.
3 75 C ert in words . ery freq ent in the com p o nds mentioned

a ,
v u u
a t 3 74 4 h e i p rt w on p ec li r p p lic tion
, , av n a a u a a a .
1 Th s w ith .
m beginning
u
( or the deri ti es W
‘ ’
va v or
i nf “ ) m de com p o n d s signify ing the p erson

a re a thing de u or
s ig t d long w ith others

na e a s ch p erson thing t t u a or e c e er a .
Th s 2m I N u , : the gods h ing I n d r fi t i e th ‘

av a as rs
’
, . .
‘
e
gods I n d r etc O ften the q lify ing no n is o m itte d ; th s

a ,
.
’
ua u u ,
ma m a ri ff ? food d rin k etc 2 W ords li k e 1

°
vi an)
- ’
(
‘
33 a , ,
. .
a re se d in the s me w y t d enote cco mp niment ; chiefly d

u a a ,
o a a a
ve r b i lly 3
a The no n.
w e } o bject p p.r ose is se d t t h u
‘ ’
,
‘
u
’
,
u a e
en d of com p o n d oftenest
a ne t s bst ( u instr ,
as a u . u . a cc . or . or
to signify for the s k e of ‘

d the li k e ; th s
{ E m }
il a for ’
,
an u ,
‘
D m y nti s s k e ; m e} for bed ( See belo w

a a a
’
a
’ ‘
a
’
.
,
4 fl a t (
. ne t s bst ) often me ns other in p ossessi es ; th s
as u . u . a
‘ ’
v u ,
2 m m ? nother region n
(.lit, th ‘
t wahich h di ff erence f
’
.
‘
a as a o
osition
376
pp l p ossessi
. es Inthe fin l m ember
a if it d a v ,
a
,
o
sign te p rt f the bo dy sometimes signifies the p rt to which

a a a o ,
a
belongs wh t is design te d by the p rior member th t

a in a : a on or
w hich it is Th s n fi nfi lq with nec k l ce neck S ch com

. u
’ '
‘
a on
’
. u
p o nds u com m onest with words

are m e ning h nd ; t h s a ffl lnfiq a a u ,
‘
with swor d in h nd ; E 113 “ with cl b in b nd a
’ ‘
u a
’
.
3 77 The p ossessi es . not lw ys sed with t h si m p l v a re a a u e e

1 44 . Lesson XXX I V .
l e f q li fying djecti e Often they h e p regn nt sense

va u o ua a v . av a a ,
d become the eq i lents f de p en d ent cl ses ; the h ing ‘ ’

an u va o au or av
im p lie d in the m becomes bo t eq i lent to h ing a u u va o ur

‘
av
’
as a
sign of p st ction Th s m g efi a a p ossessing tt ined d

a a . u ,
'
‘
a a a o
lescence i b ing re che d ”

dolescen e ; W W W
’ ‘
, . e . av a a c
‘
with nst d ie d book s i e one who h neglected st dy 7 mm
u u
’
,
. .
‘
as u
‘
w hose bre th is gone i e lifeless ; m g cg to whom de th a
’
,
. .
‘ ’ ‘'
‘
a
18 come ne r a
’
.
3 78 B C m p n d s wi th g. d fi lm mbe . o ou o ve r n e na e r.
1 P t i c i p i l com p o n d s excl si el y V e d ic
. ar a u ,
u v .
2 P p s i ti . ] com p o n d s Th s m y con eniently be c lled

re o on s u . u a v a
t hose com p o n d s in w hich the p rior m ember is p rticle

u with tr a a ue
re
p p osition l l e d the fin l m ember no
a n go erned by
va u it , an a a u v .
Th s W T? l sting o er night ; Efra i n ? bey ond m e s re

u ,
‘
a v
’ ‘
a u
’
,
; Erh ard} next the

0
‘ ’ ’
w
e x c e ss e
‘
ear .
379 j ect i c m p d s
. Ad s d d e b s C o m p o nd ve o ou n a s n oun an a v r . u
a djecti es li k e sim ple ones

v freel y sed s b st nti ely
, b ,
are u u a v as a "
t t
s rac s a n d collecti es es p eci ll y in the ne ter d less often i v ,
a u , an n
the feminine ; d they lso m ch se d d erbi ll y p rtic l rly

an are a u u a v a , a u a
in the sing ne ter

a ce . . u .
3 8 0 The s bst nti ely . se d p ossessi e com p o nds h ing u a v u v u av a
n mer l p rior m ember with some f the strictly djecti e m

u a as ,
o a v co
p o n d
u s tre te d by the H in d s
,
a re se p r te cl ss d c lled
a u as a a a a ,
an a
d y E x m p les f s ch n mer l bstr cts d collecti es

’
ua n a o u u a a a an v a re :
fa g “ the three ges ; fa zfi a fl

n .
,
‘
s p ce f three le g es a
’
n .
,
‘
a o a u
’
.
F eminines of li k e occ r in the l ter l ng ge ; th s fi éfi afi u se u a a ua u

‘ ‘
( by the si d e of 3 5 the three w orl d s 0 ‘ ’

.
3 8 l Those d er b i lly se d cc s ti es of second r y djecti

. a v a u a u a v a a ve
The n me is s m p le of the cl ss d me ns of two cow a a a a , an a

‘
s
’
( s id
a to be sed in the sense of worth two u
‘
1 46 Lesson XXX I V
t fifl
'
m .
, fish . j nct re 3 7 6 u u ,
m n .
,
chest bre st , a .
ug s k ille d .
av g
“
m .
,
bo r a .
m f “ in y o ng . .
.
u .
33 7 " f .
, p in a .
I d ec l n . :
E ng m .
,
ten don ; bo w string W EI then t here p on
.
,
u .
Adj Hg ( d ) therefore a v. a ce . .
f .
0
3 11 , b l meless f lt
a am so long ; often merely
,
au
less . d o n e, d o c h .
Wi f ai a ,
f
. f or ble ;
av a as m an as long a s, w hile ; as soon
n ea t:
f or su bst .
, av . a s.
w r
a f inner
, ; t El sse.er ti e p rticle ; gi es to a s n eu a v a v a v
b t
su s the interior mi d d le ; the p resent the force f
.
, ,
o an
inter l d i ff rence ; occ sion historic l tense

va ,
e a ,
a .
Ex er cise XXX IV .
a avi a n 3
'
’
f t 13m i f
'
an
a T v t t ca a u
-
a
wra gvurfm l
m 1 u n fi t R e in u ea
33 11
re man? W : a f a a u fa wI a a $ 2 1 an d mi?
55
“
a w n: a I a s:
“
33 u u fim (p res .
p a rt ) u é a finm fi we r
'
i
’
q a a n m m
am 3 m a a rs s u i u a
g
u rr .
71
=
'
a fi : I 8 lf uu fi z m elt firm fa sn m fi § g fi i m i ma m m
'
’ ’
a
‘
f Z Ffi TC Efir -{T “E m it wa rm I u I a m a nd 6 mm :
w e: sfi xm am m 113 : t. a n ti wa fm w
- ”
r a
a
a
fi lfi fl a t h a la m us! “ nso 1 a r e a m u n m fi r mu e a s ter
fi fi m mm ua fi laa lm w m a a m
un m fi u as l W m fi tfia ra “ $3 125 m 6 13
m mi u : use ! a re s Elfi n ta m? a ug men t?sti mu

-
“E
fz fi wam é tfl fire ma
‘
as la t sfi z n : n at! u
n a
‘
16 . Those who h e d one e il m st

- -
av - -
v u do p en nce twel e d
a ys v -
a ,
Lesso XXXI V XXXV n . . 147
si d ys
x- a th ree d ys 1 7 P fi
,
or I ndr s friend m rrie d the
-
a . . ur r a va s , a
’ -
, a
m oon f ce d f ltless limbe d A p s r s U ei 18 B h rg k h ”

-
a au -
a a r va . . u a ce a
i sit te d (
s ua
3 a ) the N rm d a 19 There st n d son the long a a . . a
a r m e d bro d cheste d k ing f the A ng s s w ord i b nd 20 The

, a - -
o - -
a ,
-
n- a . .
p th
a f k
-
noow le d ge -
is better th n the p th f works 2 1 I the a a -o -
. . n-
O p inion f the ncient seers ( p d i 1

-
o - -
i t )
a whose h -
c n 00. or ns r . o n e- -
us
b n d is de d m y choose second t p le s re 22 Lo e is bo diless

a - -
a a a a -
a u . . v ,
fi h i his b nner ; the oets The Br hm n s ’

an db e a r s- a -
y s p
-
23 n- a - a so sa . . a
d ghter S i t a by n me i lot s ey ed 24 The k ing ltho gh

au ,
- -
a
”
,
s u -
.
’
.
,
a u
( w fi l) m ny w i ed is chil
a d less 2 5 The
-
l qv t p ndit
, h . . e o uen
M
a as
a rri ed w ith his schol rs 2G W ith p t d f ( W E ) Cat k

v - -
a . .
-
u ur n e o
a ce a a
p r ys a for r in w ter a - a .
L es so n XXX V .
383 s j g t i f Ve bs P s t
. F i r t Co n I th i u a on o r . r e en n s
conj g tion the O p t ti e t the 2 d sing i m

u a t d the 3 d a v ac .
,
n . v. ac .
, an r
p l m i.d forme d other

.
,w ise th n in
are the conj g tion a a -
u a
3 8 4 St g f ms The forms in w hich the ste m ss mes its

. r on or . a u
strong for m these the three p ersons sing f the p res d

are : . o . an
im p f i di . t ll first p ersons f the i m

n e . t d m id
ac . d, a o v. , ac . an .
,
an
the 3 d sing i m r t All other forms f the p resent syste m

. v. ac . o
are we k a .
385 E di g s F the m iddle endings fl W7 1 d m

. n n . or , 1 , an
a re s bstit ted 3 a a m d m ; d fter re d p lic ted stem s

u u ,
“
en an a u a
( d
an f w others )a W fi l E ra d
e
W s bstit ted for t h . ,
an are u u e
Second ry a fem in Q a dj . c p ds .
,
.
“
.
De p p d . s kcilled in s p eech
,
“ ”
.
F or com p rehensi e ie w f the w ys f for m ing the p resent

a v v o a o .
stems o f v erbs following this gener l conj g tion I ntro d ction a u a , se e u ,
78 .
1 48 Lesson XXXV .
a cti e endings wfi a W
v d an The 2 d sing i m , ’ an n . v.
often t k es the ending fg fi x Other w ise the en dings

a the or . are
s me in the conj g tion

a as a -
u a .
3 8 6 Op t t i m d si g
. The sign f the p t t is 1 11 yet
a ve o e- n. o o . ac .
,
with secon d ry en dings ; b t W is the en ding in the 3 d pl d

a u r .
, an
m is d ro p p e d before it ; th s u ,
3 8 7 P r se t p ti c i p le m i d dl
. e I the first conj g tion this
n ar e. n u a
p rtici
a p le is m d e with the s ffix W [ m]
3 1a before w hich the u ,
stem t k es the s me for m before the 3 d p l p res ind The fem

a a as r . . . .
is lw y s in W
a a .
ss I V A
3 8 8 Cla .cl ss The p resent stem is m d e b y d d ing
. : nu- a .
-
a a
to the root the sy ll b le E! [g n ] in strong forms fi a m 5 nu u ,

‘
[Eh
‘
The 3 f the cl ss sign m y be
“
dro pp e
o d before 3 d a -
a
\
an
q f the l
o t d d l t p l en d
s ings exce p tu w hen
. the root
an en d s s .
,
in conson nt ; d the 3 before o w el en ding becomes EL or

a a a n
‘
a v -
Bad ccord ing it is p rece ded by

a by t w
as conson nts one or o a .
The en ding fg f the 2 d sing i m is d ro p p e d if the root end

o n . . v.
in o w el
a v .
3 8 9 I Ro t s i owels g p ress
. . o n v .
‘ ’
.
I di c ti n a ve .
Acti e Mid dle

v . .
’ ’ ’ ’
sa n a v a s su n u m a s su n ve su n u va he su n u m d h e
2 .
gra m ga
r m ga s!
$3 3 F fi i 33 3
'
su n u th d s su n u th d su n u sa s u n v a th e su n u dh e é
g a r?
’ ’ ’
su n o ti
’
su n va n ti
’
su n u ta s su n a te su n va te su n va te
The forms EE K ,
g a
“
a l , g a
’
é , fi mfi , ltern ti e
are a a v w h it
those gi en bo e for v a v 1 st d a . a nd l
p , . and occ r oftener
u .
150 L sson XXXV
e .
I m p er a t i ve .
1 .
WW m en t: m a ma mm ? w e re ? WW ?
3 31.
m i? w ere s tra w W m am tr
am
Pa r ti c i p le .
f a mp ed a n i n a f “ SIT
g 3
3 1
“
3 11 7
“
.
. .
,
The other forms f this tense follo w the model f g o o

”
3 9 l 1 The root he r contr cts to before the cl ss ‘ ’

g .
3 .
, a ,
a 3 a
sign forming 3m gn } d 3m g am strong d we k ste m ;

,
3 u an
“
5 r as an a
2 d mg
n m t
3gs ; 2 d d d t.
i t” i
W etc
v. a c . u a . 1n . ac . or
,
.
2 The root $1 shortens its owel in the p resent syste m

. v -
.
Voca b l
a ry u XXXV .
V e bs :
r i
i w /
w n d ti , dbu n u te )
'
sh ke a .
w ( ) cq ire obt
a c n u té in 1
3 0 3 3 7 ;a n té)
u d,
a . 7 0 1 v zu c o ve r , s u r r o u n .
m obt in 3 ” co r etc
a ve ,
m ( dp dti r rel y p d t ) n w O p en
a nu e
'
ao .
q ire re ch
u ,
a fi t ex p l in m nifest
. a a , a .
+ 3 13 n or m re ch
, , a n sh t , a . u .
f a ( i dt i té) g ther mg ( k be ble

’
dt i )
“
c n z, p
c nu a . a a n a .
+ 11 W t g ther or g (; r zd ti pm té) he r
, a . z ,
u a .
+ fiflt f a fi q d eci d e con E! ( tr p é t tn té) sc tter stre w

’
or ,
s z, s zu a
, ,
.
l de e u .
a n sc tter a .
3g 11 rge fi g ( h i d t ) sen d u on . n z
‘
3 ( d d t i ) intr
un b rn feel p in g +u
, m w y . t,
d l d t0 bui g b k ,
a ra z ra r n ac .
d istress ; t
or
p in distress r., a or
( a cc .
)
mm: doork eep er

m .
, .
q
'
m pl p
. cert in de m
. ons
,
n . r .
, a .
W m m ight p o w er.
, , .
XXX V . 15 1
N f 3 lT meritorio s hol y ,
.
°
,
u , ,
s p icio s au u .
(
‘
H m t ste .feeling
,
a “ TE L sh
,
ring . a .
m g; m Br a h m n i n the.
m ,
f m a entr ncing gree a ,
.
0
,
a ,
a
thir d p erio d f his life o .
f a n m B ahm n .
,
r a .
“ a:
E m so n d ; noise
.
,; word u .
Adj . :
“
ai r, f
.
“
Q T, n e w.
Ex ercise XXXV .
3 3 15 6 11433? I
’
mm ffi at f ai th 3
W W 3 figs : “ M au r i ti an n so u
W m
'
m m m m fi é W fi T
' '
z t a sts a l lU lE fl
WW W a ilW 1 W W W 3 3 1 m m a n
ag e r {a
l fa
fi t rt ezzs wi m 8 I m i ner a w e a n ti : a ? van 7 1W
- “
-
s
5 15 m m fi f wé fi ti ta n 3 m : ( an ? El
a n a ? a f e m ur
i m
’
t
qfl m fi m m l é lfi s fi f m an aem a : fi tfi g a n i m e l
n ew ? f em ? w i m m a g i i fqa w m m?fi tfi fi te w mg
3m m a t am t; “ W fl w fi m fi fl z le lm a
fi a
“
me w: a w ait 5 1
3m u so u
11 ing entere d the tem p le f the w h i p f lGF IHFU
. Ha v o ors u
V is n we he rd the
u e ntr ncing (W song f the y o ng
a ea r -
a -
o - -
u
women ( a ?! t d f q d) 1 2 Listen to th i word f de

u se a en o a . . s o a
vote d (f fi g p p t ) frien d 1 3 The g ee dy (w p p t)

, a ss . ar . . . r ,
a ss. ar ,
wh o lw ys g thering riches ne er tt in the enjoy men t of

are a a a ,
v a a
ln fi n f
. o
g .
The instr i sometimes sed to ex p ress the m edi . s u um, or sp ce a
or dist nce ro d tr ersed

a or a ,
av .
15 2 Lesson XXXV XXXVI . .
the m 14 By t stef l well com p osed p oems y m y tt in glory

. . a u ,
-
e a a a
i n the ten regions f th w ld (W ) 15 Q k t la m y est tho o e or . . a un a ,

a u
get (i m ) h sb n d worthy f thee 16 M y tw brothers d eter

u. a u a -o -
. .
-
o-
mine d t tr el to Ben res 17 M y the king s sword bring grief to

o av a . . a
’ -
im p )
t the heurts.f the wi
ores f his
o enemies 1 8 C lo
.
d s a -
o - -
v -
o - -
. . u
co er the ky 1 9 Let the doork eep er close the door

v s . . .
L e s s o n XXXVI .
s Cl ss I V B cl ss Th f w roots ( onl y six )

‘
3 92 . Ve r b . a . . u- a . e e
f this b cl ss d lre dy in ( e x cep t n of id

“
i
‘'
o su -
a en a a c o ne , ,
co ns
er ab l irreg l rity
e d so dd only 3
u a cl ss sign The i an a as a -
.
,
n
fl tiec is q ite th t f the cl ss the 3 being g n ted in the

on u a o n u- a ,
“
u a
strong form s d drop p ed ( o p tion lly b t in f ct ne rly lw y s )

,
an a ,
u a a a a
before EL d R of 1 t d l d p l r l an s ua an u a .
3 93 Th s a t stretch m kes W WW a fi f fi etc ; l t ‘ ’

‘ ‘
. u i , ,
a . s
, ,
d am (
a am ) st p l a m t ( a m ) ; m i d Ha was
or , cr , ,
a mg etc ll li k e owel root f the cl ss

“ -
, . a a v o n u- a .
3 94 The root m k e m k es the strong stem affi we k

.
‘
a
’
,
a ,
a
“ 5 the cl ss sign 3 is lw y s d ro
a
pp ed before
-
1 d q in l t a a an s
d d l t pl d lso before of the cti e Th s

q t
a. an s an a o
.
p
,
. a v . u
I n di c a t i ve.
Acti e v . Mi ddle
agate i
Ef fie 353
w
a n
r-
“
W pm m gm?
I m p er f e t c .
m s? was ré
-
a s s ta
. s tafi fia W W su
m
“ fl it W m eta m
15 4 Lesson XXXVI .
a n d so -
’
,
from b oth djecti es a v and no ns
u . Th s u , f 31W
el -
f .
,
fl fi afi
‘
n . the r n k f K t
,
‘
a o a s a r i ya
’
.
Voc a b l
a ry u XXXVI .
V er b s “I “ ma ke kno w n ,
or v isi
i n ku r u te ) d o , m a k
'
e . ble .
a ll do e il to h r m
v , a
( g en., + m 3 95 ) p rep re a ,
a dorn ;
l
oc .
, or consecr te a .
a m p re p re a ,
a d orn .
fl t
i ksa zzu té) w o nd u .
WTfHQ
( )
‘
stretch ex
a vi ska r o ti
’
m ke a Hi ,
k no w n exhi b it ,
ten d p erform ( s crifice ) . a a .
+ 3 11 do goo d to benefit (g + 3 17 c se b ring b o t , en .

, ,
au ,
a u .
n s p re d b ro d a a a
hi d e ; bl m e find f lt g i t (d d y ti ) be d fi l d a ,
au s a e e .
w ith 1 41 (m té) thin k consider anu , .
E t a p t t the he d u a a .
Hf ?! p y recom p ense ; p nish a ,

u
( a c e . r ei , g en., da t . or l
o c p ar a
.
) .
S ub t s a n m .
,
f ltau .
Wfi i gfif a fl ; m .
, p riest of cer a fi fi f .
, con d ct u of
t in k ind
a .
p olitics .
W m .
,p rogeny d ing
escen d nt 3 13
31
3 m ,
a . .
,
k .
wfi i m m p l n ; ie w ; O p inion £3 1 7 13
”
kitchen a v n .
, .
H iq flesh ‘ ‘
n .
, .
m s lt n a
—
. .
,
a nf d f ch rm gr ce
‘
o .
, a rm S p ice
a ,
a . n .
, .
“ E EK m stonishment 5 13 m m . tr
,
d e
a . .
, a .
3 g1 lfi q cert in‘
s crifice a “ m n d.o bt
, a a a .
.
.
,
u .
ah a n me tribe coo k
—
f
1?
m m
.
,
a o a . .
,
.
f a t a f r aid f eil .
, v .
Le sson XXX VI .
Add W de r ,
f . a .
w 1,
i t- f
blin d .
“
m ,
. El i f 3 11 wrong f lse
i fi al ,
.
0
, ,
a .
W f 3 11 necess ry 31 f a t goo d ro er “
3
0 3
, .
,
a .
, p .
p , ,
.
”
a f 3 11
“
,
knowing
.
0
,
.
Ea f 3 11 re,
d y .
0
,
a .
N
J? enjo y ing .
Ex erc i se XXX VI .
”
a 38 3 31 W ’
s wa f er W i tt n as n
m i {a t a t a t; W l
”
fla
“
t il
m a ta rfi r w fi r fi a m
‘
m
’
a : " as "
8 ery y e r A g i h t m m st p erform the C a t m a y

. Ev -
a an n o r u ur s a
9 M yest tho
. a O G t K i g p rotect t h y k ing duom b fi t ti g
,
rea ~
n , ,
en e n
th y friends d h rming th y enemies 1 0 Br a hm ns find f lt

an a . . a au
with the tr d e i lt 1 1 W h t th d idst ( m i d ) th t distresses

a -
n o
sa . . a en ,
a
thy frien d s e en w 1 2 M y I recom p ense him (d t ) who h

v no . . a a . as
d one me ser ice 1 3 By the co m m n d of the gre t king consecr te

a v . . a a -
a
the fo r p rinces ccording t the l w (fi fi J

u 14 T h a o a -
, . e
C a l ky u uheld s w y ( W i n) in A h i l p at k 247 ye rs
as a na a a a a .
1 5 B y the ch rm f her f ce the lot s ey e d ecli p ses fl i t e e

.
- -
a
( ?) - o - -
a u -
v n
the moon 1 6 I f one consecr tes schol r te ches h i m m ke

. . a a. a , a , a s
Poss p d cf 374 5 . c , .
, .
15 6 Lesson XXX VI XXX VI I . .
him hol y then this beco m es his chil d

,
1 7 The king
o ne .
of the K li n g s wo nde d his ene m y in the bre st with

- -
a a u rrow a an a .
L e ss o n XXXV II .
3 99
V . e rbs . n it- cl s
The cl ss sig is in the strong for ma s. a -
n s
the s y ll ble 7 11 mi [m p d] ccente d which is d de d to the root ;

a ,
a ,
a
in the w e k forms it is fi t 7 [fi
a b t before initi l owel a
71 u an a v
of en d ing the f i f VII m [qfi m] d is p p e rs ltogether

an o
”
a a a .
4 0 0 Th s Efl b y strong stem afi qn h i p d we k aifi fi

’
‘ ’ a
. u u : r ,
,
k i i ( before
r n owel m k i z) a v ,
r
'
a .
I d i c ti n a ve .
Acti e v .
I m p er f e t . c
W e °
fm
mad ma n W e “ fl a re .
wi a
’
a fi fi a m w he n
I m p e r a t i ve .
1 .
afi m fi r
2 .
W e
3 m t
g W a rn m e W m
Op t a t i ve .
W E
etc .
Pa r ti ci p le .
fi l m, f .
”
an
40 I The ending f the 2md sing i m

. o . v. a c t . is f g ne er fi x;
,
v
an d there no ex m p les f its omission

ar e a o . Bu t roots of this cl ss a
15 8 Lesson XXX VI I .
I m p e r a t i ve Op t a t i ve .
mfir w
m w m m
3 .
mg mam ma .
m m m m m a s;
Pa r t m a c f . .
m or m ifi-
‘
Voca b l
a ry u XXXVII .
Ve r b s 3“ ( ap l
a v a te
'
) drench .
2“ ( a pn dti ) ea t .
an ( ba d lmdtz
,
’
ba dlmzté)
'‘
bin d ;
afi
'
‘
c tch ; join ; com p ose
kr i zzi te ) bu y
' '
. a .
w ( g t h d t ) string
ra together ; i nn
( b b t
zi ) gle m gl nce a a , a .
co m p os e . 1 “ ( m an) me s re a u .
a? g r k z i té ) t k e sei e fi m ; wor
z k cre te a ,
z .
,
a .
fi x hold restr in check a : (m i ti ) ste l rob

‘
“
,
a , . t u sn c a ,
.
Hf?! t k e recei e 2 ( W ) fi l q ste l ‘

a
g ; ,
v . a .
fi (l j d d
' ‘
ti j a inté) k no w ,2
3 ( m n t é lso y ti . v
’
i : a va r a
’
a ,
-
te)
Wi t llo w p ermit a c hoose ,

. .
2m ( p dti ) p rotect f a x v i rem in o er . a v .
31 ( p sp a ti ) mu k e incre se ’
a
! ( tm a ta tr a i t é ; lso a or
“
s
’
z, s se e a in
gro w . V oc b XXX V) stre w a . .
2 (p dti p i té) cle n ( d i ) b the

1
1 a t
“
.
un , t un a . sn a .
Lfi ( p i p dti t delight ; remo e

‘
r ,
g p a n ac .
,
v v .
m i d rejoice .
, .
Su b st crescent W f .
,
.
m m gest re f res p ect Ej fi lf w or k ( liter ry)

.
, a u o .
,
a .
f l greeting 3 3m m tre s re ; tre s ry

” 5
u . . a u a u .
,
(
“
a t f w ish .
, W m m oment ; time
. .
, n .
, .
m m rise i nfi r m gol d . n .
, .
The t w h nds ho llowed d o p ened d r ised to o a an , an a
forehe d a .
Lesson XXXV I I . 15 9
m a e on m .
,
m d m f T f height ele tion
.
; hig h g
-
.
, ,
va
m m sn k e .
, p osition
a . .
a? le ding ro p e cord
n .
,
a Adj
-
, .
. :
Hm
“
27 8 ) m stirring stick E lma ? f to d y .

,
-
.
”
o -
a .
m ffi ai right j st
‘
,
u .
i n m s crifici
.
,
l p ost a n e ar ( P rt f M tg) kindly d i
a . a o s
m forehe d n , .
p ose d a . .
lél t (
'
d ) m car s itor bride .

,
u ,
groo m .
2 ér( ( d ) m
‘
v choice p ri ilege
ra Ad : .
, ,
v , v.
f or av .
W before in the p resence ,
fi n m p sn k e daemon . f ( g )
w r. m , a a -
o . e .
who s p p orts the e rth u a .
Ex ercise XXX VII .
« str a w 3 5 3 m: “ a i m s
i re n : I
f a gi ti efi vr W W
'
a i r it a s n
“
f a é fi w am w g m ze ta m a fi a
g ra d ( W $ a
"
e 1 u an n
“ te a m a rm ) W a i t “ a t : 3?
w t !s
en
wa g lmva 1 3
a g 3 3 ( j ta a fi
E fi
—cr u a n Q at
-
a r Emmi ”
“
m fi a fi gi a wt fifa fi fi m m sfi m m a l m m w a t gmd
fi f a fit afi m t m?! " 8 u a s W ge rm ?? m
aei m n u n W t fi a 1 m m m a fi a fi st r am
’
a
'
p
w m ?m fi t a vn
fi ’
w ni fi e fw é m s s es
‘
u u
i
w m m f a m fi rr u e W i t
'
ere a an n p t e
9 . Allo w me to g o n o w. 10 . T k e these jewels w hich I h e

a av
it the s ffix a ?! ( sometimes a )

W h m d e djecti es fro m u a re a a v
a d erbs es p eci ll y
v f time ; th s I l
, a ncien t m 1 ! e
a rly o u ,
‘
a
’
,
‘
a
’
,
a ma f the m orrow ’
“
l o .
1 60 Lesson XXX VI I XXX VI I I . .
gi en
v
(p y o u Let the gre t p
a ss.oet w e e (M 11 . a av ,
i i i ) erse w re th f wor d p e rls

a. v -
1 2 E er y d y t w
a o - a . v -
a o
thie es robbed the king s tre s ry 1 3 H w ho recei es (p t )

v
’
a u . . e v ar
gifts from e ery one is p oll te d v 34 T h eC re tor forme d u . a
the w orl d by his will ( g m ) lone 1 5 Bet k e thy self ( an ) f a . . a or
s l tion t the gods p rotection 1 6 Let k ings restr in the w ic k ed

a va o
’
. . a
b y p nishments u 17 W w Ra m s d ghter coming t

. . e sa a
’
au ou
( p r es .
p t ) f the ho se
ar 1 8 Let
. the bri
o d egroo m gr s p the m i d u . . a a
en s h n d before the fire 19 An Ary n m st not t

’
a . . a u ea an
other s le ings (v i f“ p p t
’
av t i g) 20 One m st -
,
a ss . ar ,
n eu . s n . . u
b the d ily in nconfine d ( p t f m f i t

a a w ter 2 1 M y the
u ar . ro a . . a
three e y e d g d the gre t lor d

-
ow hose forehe d is d orned
,
a - -
a - -
a
with the crescent p rotect y

- -
, ou .
L e ss o n XXXVIII .
4 07 . Ve r boots en d ing in i —o w el
s . Ro o t - cl ss o
a , c nt
’
d .
*
R an v
or owel ( exce p t VK g ) ch nge these into ( a; d 3 1

a n u -
v
‘
o
’
a an
before o w el en dings i we k forms w hen not g n te d

v -
n a , u a .
4 0 8 R oot go ( t b t se d in m i d w ith the p re p =a ffix

.
‘ ’
ac .
,
u u . . :
‘
g o er
o f oneself
v i e re p e torle rn re d ; the then b ’
, . .
‘
a , a ,
a
’
e
comes bo e ) as a v .
I di c t i n a ve .
Acti e Mi ddle v . .
a rts {W W m ww m
m
’ ’
J fit -
a r tr
- m ifi r m i tw a fish
“
A n mber of roots belonging to this cl ss ccent the root

u a a
’
syll b le thro gho t in w e k wel l in strong form s —excep t

a u u , a as as
of co rse in the im p erfect

u .
Lesson XXXVI I I
Act g a i t f a rfin M id g m
Pa r t i c i p le . . : , .
o -
. : .
4 I2 The root
3 y t k es.the nion o w el { fter the root 2
‘
sa
’
,
a u -
v
J
a
when strengthene d before the initi l conson nt of en d ing Th s ,

a a an .
*
u
I d i c ti e n a v .
Acti e Mi d d le v . .
1 .
s ati re a as
l 33m as ?
m ? ’
’
2 .
a atfi r i n a a in ?
t ari a
3 .
a qtfi t
' ‘
33 rd g a fi fl { a sa f e g rab
I mp e f r ect Act . . : w at t , war4h

-
, W 3“ ; wi a
‘
etc ; .
pl W.
W . M id . : wgfi , a i m etc ; . 3rd p l .

wi t“ .
I m p e r a t i ve . Act . : 5
“
3 ,
3
31 , a m ; 3 3 13 etc .
; 3rd p l .
M id 3 3g
-
a e e tc
g v
j . . : 3 ,
.
Act W
Op t a ti ve . . : etc . M id
33 3 3
P r t i c i p l Act W a e. . :
C
M id . :
g en i r
‘
4l 3 E m p h ti c P . a r on ou n . The i fl t d p ronomin l w or d un n ee e a
W signifies self w ‘ ’
,
‘
o n self I t i oftenest se d
’
. nomin s u as a
ati e long with wor d s

v , a of ll p ersons d n m b ers ; b t not
a an u u
sel d o m i t rep resents othe r c ses lso

a a .
ula ry XXXVIII Voca b .
V bs er I t ex p l in te ch ; nno nce a , a a u .
( ) g
é t i o .
f a ex p l in t a ,
e c .
wfi x ( dh i té) re p e t re d Q ( i t i ) y scre m “
a a a ,
a . r t cr , a .
am go w y d ep rt fa scre m a a ,
a .
“
a .
a ff i x p p ro ch a x
fi ( c té ) lie slee
a p . o , .
m N f h l
y b d i ) Q efi x lie
o slee p e a ve n o es .
‘
a on
3 ? rise ( f he enl y b o d ies ) b ring forth be r

o av .
,
a .
B q p p ro ch n bring forth
‘
a a . .
b t té) s p e k st te ( t e i li ) r ise
g
rz a sa a
y p , ,
a . s r .
S p eci l irreg l rities in this erb

a
occ sion lly met with
a u a v are a a ,
s ch a rt T a i flf g Some f the er b s in 3
u as -
llowed to b
,
'
. o v
‘
are a e
in flecte d li k e 3T b t forms m d e r re ,
u so a are a .
Lesson XXXVI I I .
Su b t s
fa r-
1 m ”
n .
p r .
, a n mea o f B u d dh a
fi g lf
‘‘
.
,
tong e u .
£15 13 6 ma n '
pr .
m logic m .
,
.
W flo w er
n .
, m f W T l ment ble .
, .
°
,
a a .
w m q estion .
, 3 fl f =
t 1 m king
u doing .
° a ,
.
m sense nders t nd ng
n Ad
.
, ,
u a i .
v
W m k illing m rder .
, m below down , u .
, ,
o n
3 i
3m n : m p gro nd .
,
n . r. u .
W m com p nion ; a f .
,
a O
‘ ‘
.
Ex ercise XXXVIII .
W e re ti re m e n ts m e
m e di a w ag W e me an u a t. u
W fi tt est W m a r
’
as ha m w m m a afi a na n a s t e:
2 64) { f a u s u a lts W W I EI W e m i tte r: I a r e m n a nt
i m fi m amm
'
? m fig s w
“
93 a v a n a a am fi fi r n 8 n
3
a m fa fi fi e a i fw fi fm m t
’
a fa g fi t : n u u w e re
as e ra tfi rfa s ilt? s ta r t
’
M a a fi; u t. n e t tin g f“
‘ “ -
t ur
wfvfi m h: ta mm i t a g ar? u w:
'
( n e n a u se e sa
“
a n rs
f e a s t? w e W WE
“
B RET: “ at nQ n I G HT: T[Ti

-
m i W a re z
a fa r
—
fi t n so u
1 1 The three wi es of D c
. th bore fo r sons 12 Ra m v a ara a u . . a
an d L k m n followed by S i t a w ent
a s into the forest
a a , - -
, .
1 3 W o m en whose h sb nds
. de d m st slee p i m onths -
u a -
a r e- a u s x .
o n
the gro n d 14 A witness st ting yth i g other th wh t w

u . . a an n -
an- a -
as
s een he rd i t be p nished (f t p
-
ar- p t
a
) 15 All g ilt s o u u . a ss. ar . . . u
dep rts from

a wh h done p en nce 16 One m st not look o n e- o- a s- -
a . . u
“
11
1 64 Lesson XXX VI I I XXX I X . .
a t ) the
(n rising
-
i the setting
fi 1
x
7 W h y h st t h o come or su n . . a u
( a f ar i ) t m y hose with w ife d with chil d

o ren
-
? 18 Pr ise
- u -
an -
.
“
a
V r n a th s the go ds ddresse d O h c p wh w bo n d to
u a
”
: u a una e a o as u
the s crifici l p os t 19 Al w y s s p e k the tr th 20 I kingless

a a . . a a u . . n a
l n d the rich do t slee p in p e ce

a no a
L e s so n XXX I X .
4 I4 Ve r bcl ss c t d R t s di g i c s ts
. s . Ro o t - a , on
’
. oo en n n on o n a n .
The en d ings f the 2 md d 3 d sing im p f t o gener l ly d ro p p e d an r . . ac . are a ,
d the res lting root fi l tre te d di g t the s lr les f

‘
an u -
na a a c co r n o u ua u or
fi l na s Cf
f
2 3 9 242 B t root ending in d ent l m te so m e
.
, . u a a a u
times d ro p s this fin l m te inste d f th dde d i t in th secon d a u a o e a e
p erson ; d the other h n

and root ,
stem ending
on in a some a ,
a or
times d ro p s this a inste d f the dde d i t in the third p erson a o a
in either c se est blishing the ordin ry rel tion f a d Q i

a a a a o an n
t h secon d
e d third p ersons an .
4l 5 R oots in q d E s bstit te for those letters befor

.
L Q an u u e
it Q ; d K ( w hich then b ecomes d l before i x Th s

l
“
‘-
, an an . u
\ ,
W S p e k ‘
a f a r fi f h q faffi ( onl y these
’
three
: for m s se d) ,
“
t “
,
‘
u .
4 I 6 R oot Fra k now ( t only ) ‘
g .
,
ac .
I d i ti n I m p f ct
ca ve . er e .
1 .
fe m fi rm we en i n erf s “
af a r
3m é a or sk n i W
'
2 .
f a w n fi rs t al M e
fi ts : f at Tm f are fi e a ffirm
- -
3 .
m m ; 3 35m
‘ ’
I m vo z él fi t
fl f f 3 fifi fl t. f
“
a a at-ri
a ; . , ,
f a? fi fi ) o Op t “ fi lfl l‘l ,
e tc '
the inflection f t with fin l conson nt f this cl ss d

In o roo s a a , o a an
the re d p lic ting d n s l cl sses e p ho nic r les fi d ery f

u a an a a a ,
u u n v re
q ent p p lic tion The st d ent is therefore d ise d t this p oin t

u a a . u a v a
t
o re d c ref ll y th e chief r les f e p honic ch nge in W hitney s
a a u u o u a
’
Gr mm r a 1 3 9—23 2 ( the t w o l rger si es of p rint)

a ,
a z .
1 66 Lesson XXX I X .
h
42 2 r le .inserts before
1 en
. d ings beginning ,
‘
u
’
with a d q; th s 2 d sing Q fi ffi an 2 EF L w ish i in u , n .

‘
. .
’
s
we k forms contr cte d to E R ; th s 3 d p l B fl ffi

a a u ,
r . . .
42 3
1K
3 3 b cle n . h g dd l in the strong forms ,
‘
ru
’
,
‘
a
’
as v
'
'
n ,
an d O p tion lly lso in w e k forms w hen the en d ings begin with

a a a a
vo w el I the tre tment f tb root fi l this erb follo w s the

. n a o e -
na v
roots in t Th s i d 3 d sing m fi d i gm p l {Fifi fl

i . u ,
n . r .
,
a .
,
.
-
or
e
w a rm .
Voca b l
a ry u XXX IX .
Ve r b s u wi p e o f .
Q R ( i sza)
“
r le o w n (w g m ) u ,
. e .
( “L a n: ( a
p a m dlmé ti )
'
do
W ( sg ) +ca3 11 rel te
’
; c ll neme a a , a . wrong .
a n ex p l in ( w ish
'
a .
a“ va i)
sz .
f“ ( d sti d sté) h te lfi l now consi der

' '
( vét tz ; véd a
) k
'
ve
g
,
vz a . .
,
I I h te extremel y 31 f e; smite
“
a .
+ fi .
i k
t 5 ( m é s ti ) b w i p e r ru , .
fa kill .
+ 3 11: wi p e w y ff a a , o .
Sub t s 3 41
mm gr mm r n , . a a .
i )? m .
,
lip .
3 11 3 m p R ishi .
,
n . r .
, a .
fi t] m .
,
dec a
y ,
destr ction u .
£ 35 1 f hesit tion .
,
a .
m n , e e.
y .
Q
‘
é m
’
p n me . f
, i
n . r .
,
a a o a .
gi
g conq
m eror
.
,
u .
E FI
“
J le rning
n .
,
a .
3 211 f com
“
p ssion
. it
p y
,
a , .
Hfi m cre tion a .
m u m d estr ction .
,
u .
f Q fi T f con d ition existence .
, ,
.
3 13 m p n . me,
of G i n . r .
, a a va .
Adj . :
t ra m s cre d text ; s p ell ch rm

, a ,
a .
3 15 1 , f .
“
HT, bl m eworthya ,
c ul
I n] ! m w tch ( f the night)

.
,
a o .
pa hl e.
3 ? condn ct.
,
u .
Less on XXXI X .
Exerci se XXX IX .
W m
'
a zfi fi m am fl éfi t a fi am
fi fe W e s w a n t u as u
efi a u se ?g w f
‘
m fé
am ‘ r fi u a: u
— u a u 1 18?{ Fri
gi n ti W i w
g a m m a : fi re m
a n ? 313 m a n uf swfii wfi i f i l
i Hi m m
’
'
: "
fi fw m
'
fir a . n f m fi m ug
l fl rfi s un s 1 8 i t
m fi f e vi a a t ?f m a fi fi rfi fi éa m n u n af t s als a a ft a r
'
W i lm a? w fi rfi r m fa a wi s h “ : w a s]: f a g : u a n
fu a u : ue u vi i a t ri a “ é mafi a " r
io u w m afi t fi i
fi afzm § 3 74, 6) a s ?”
“
W m u as n
e r the words f the le rne d m w ho exp l ins (p
12 . H a o a an a r e s.
p t
ar
) the science
. f gr mm r 1 3
-
Kno w t h t Ra mo -
iathe a . . a a s
so n f mo s in the three w orl d s f D c tb

, a u d the conq eror
- -
,
o a a ra a, an u
o f Ra n lord f L nk a 14 H ing si p p ed (Err Q R) w ter

va a, -
o -
a . . av -
a
thrice wi p es the li p s twice ; ccor ding to others

,
one 1 5 Tw a ,
o n ce .
H
. o
w rriors smote (wfi i gfl ) with rro w s the king f the A fi g w h

a -
a -
o - - a s, o
h d m r d ered their com p nions

a u 1 6 Kill witho t hesit tion e e a . . u a v n
( W fi l) te cher w ho a
pp ro ches ( pa t p p t ) in order toakil l a as . a ss. ar .
y ou. 1 7 W h y dost tho consider (f a g ) me

.
Cfi d th g h know u a ra , ou
ing (W g ) m y le rning d con d c t ? 1 8 Do not h te the sons

er . a -
an -
u . a
o f P a nd
-
1 9 The women wh u . sons w d e d h ing l m ente d
. ose - -
er e - a , av a
gre tly wi p ed the te rs fro m their eyes 20 Tho O Lord r les t

a , a . . u, ,
u
o er bi p eds d q dr p e ds (g m )
v an ua u e .
efers to f lse w itness before co rt An ntr th wher

R a a u . u u e
s m l l be sts ( shee p etc )

a concerne d in ol es th e d estr ctio
a , . are , v v u n
o f fi ncestors ; w here c ttl

ve a concerned f ten etc a e a re , o ,
.
1 68 Lesso n XL .
L e ss o n XL .
424 . Ve r b s . Ro o t - la c ss , c o n t ’
d. m
‘
sit
’
I n di e .
we . we , w e ; w e re e tc . ; m e . an
y . w e . I mp f .
a r ts . W K , m a c . I m v. mi w est m ,
et P e . ar t
W ( niq e ) u u .
42 5 The root m . co m m nd s bstit tes in th e we k ,

a u u a
forms with conson nt endings the we kened ste m wi ll; th s a -

a u ,
i di
n sing m f g etc ; d fm
e. . etc ; b t 3 d p l m . a. . u r . .
I mpf 3 1m m
. : 3 1m g m ; m etc,; b t 3 d p l ,
“
. u r .
m I m 2 d sing
.
m fi q ; 3 d l
:
p 3111 15
v. n .
‘
r .
4 2 6 The extremely common root

. be ( t loses i t ‘ ’
ac . s
v o w el m we k forms e x cep t w hen p rotected by the gment Th

a ,
au . e
2 d sing i m
n is Q fi x; in the 2 d sing indic
. v .
a is o m itted n . . one
in the 2 d d 3 d sing i m p f i is inserted before the ending

n an r . . .
Th s u
I di c t i n I m p f ect
a ve . er .
1 . sa fe r e ra a re W a re :
2 . a rts e m ta su m m a m
3 .
I m p e r a t i ve .
1 .
w fir we re 3 mm Op t . : a rm etc ; 3 d p l gm . r . .
2 .
uf a g m Q1
“
Pa r t . : W e
f m i} . .
3 .
a s m as
oots i g ( exce p t fa g d g g) co m bine g with i t

427 . R n an
‘
u
; d
q into
an
3 d then lengthen p receding 3 1 ,a ; befor
an ,
”
e
K g 1
becomes q ; i 2 d d 3 d sing im p f t ( w here t h n n an r . . ac . e
en dings dropp e d) th g bec o m es z Th f a g lick ( t

are e
‘
. us ,
‘ ’
ac .
an d I mp f t W W W a g ; m .
mac . : , , ,
O r
m ( i m im f
p ) or v
.
, .
See 4 I4 Wfl li i s id to be sed 2 d p ers lso . s a u in n . a .

1 70 Lesson XL .
i i i; —
n fa (p r a vi c a l
a ti
'
) m o e
v rm 8 111 pp ro ch
“
a a .
stir i t ) comm n d go ern

m (p s e a , v .
f ag ( g )
d é dh z
‘
sme r a .
3
3K bre the a .
( d og dhi , d ug d h é) mil k 3 111 bre the gentl y

' “ “ “
i f! or a
gig . ,
HT
EL
O
f
‘‘
v l sh t ( the u re i e v v .
ey es ) . f t
e be
’
confi d ent tr st ,
u
( w g en . .
( i w ee p . or 10 0 .
f
o p er s .
)
fa g ( l
é dh z, l
i dh é)
‘
lick .
Q 1 a g
i‘
( u tti s h a t ti ) a rise .
3 13 lick .
Sub t s “
G a
i l m .
,
sho l d er u .
“ W m .
,
enjoyment .
Ad j
35 “ h ir
m .
,
a .
fit ‘
E firm ,
resol tef .
,
u .
m gift generosity
n .
, ,
.
f gm
i f 3 fl 3 shre w d s,
k ille d .
°
, .
3 1 6 11 f girl m iden .
, ,
a .
E mm i 3 1 right ro
p p er .
0
, ,
.
3
1 “ m cl b p estle .
, n .
,
u , .
m f Q T c reless ,
.
“
,
a .
( fi a t b loo d n .
, .
I d ec l n
s crifice a g e rl y in the morning

‘ ' ‘
ai r n .
,
a . I ll a ,
.
i
G ra i l m p the n . r .
,
su n god 322114; gre tly m ch a ,
u .
‘
‘
S it r theav a su n .
1
Ex erc ise XL .
f a r-
(a ,
ii f a fa ym
v a t ?an g em;
a ah em fim g ri m
'
1 13 1
3
“
.
an t
213 m ; 3
m 1?a t
—
5 11 E11 1 1 7 117-
m u rm ur: ufi rw f m r e 1 611
f 7 '
1: 11 a c 11
fin d a s ? 15 5 53 rm
g ‘
w a
s )
! ( ra i s i m fi x m fi r ns :
fi mg rrct 11 9 11 fi va rfi m fig a f w fi rf a g f m n s n wa
f é i w m fix m f a ng: 13s E lq
"
a d 11 a 11
‘
a n n -
After H g the initi l , a {t of Q" an d

w is d ro p p e d ; th s u ,
3 m m for W Q TfiR .
Lesson XL . XL I . 171
re fr a i n? fi fsm fa sa i fi: M m
‘ '
W 11 8 11 g e
n a r rate magm as S a r e m
t - ne w 53 1
1 1 11 4 11
15
W t
fi rt W ite r fw fi qfi fi
'
a u 11 a vfi vu u s 11 W
fi ufi i fa m fi mg m 1
‘
as: a
g g e mi ne : a s} a g a z 1 c u
m m 11 ( rea m 3
”
n e e si s : 3 1 Gi raff e 11 e
“
: 11 v
ll L . ong
the gre t king go ern the e rth ccording to
m ay a -
v a a
lw
a .1 2 Th w mighty k ing N l by n me ( n n )
. er e as a f , a a a i , so n o
Vi 1 3 The lion s ti ted with the blood

r a se n a . . f the sl in g elle , a a - - - -o - -
a -
az ,
lick e d hi m o th w ith hi tong e 14 Let the ho sehol d er y to

s u s u . . u sa
the g est w here di dst tho slee p d ring the night ? 15 The
u :
“
u u
”
.
cowherd mil k ed th co w s w ice d il y 16 The b y be ten by e t a . . o , a
h i f ther we p t bitterly
s a ,
1 7 W hose d ghter t tho . au ar u,
girl ? 1 8 Kno w th t th t by which tho li est

. d the whole
a a u v ,
an
worl d li es i the worl d s p irit 1 9 H ing risen in the m ornin g

v ,
s -
. . av a ,
re erence the
v
(W ) 20 I f y d t p r ise
su n R a m ther . . ou o no a a , e
w ill b no s l tion for y

e ( m i p
a va ou u se , n r es .
L e s so n XLI .
43 0 Ve r bs. Re d u p li
. ss This cl ss for m s the p resent c a ti n g Cla . a
ste m b y p red p lic tion to the root “

fi i g re x n a u a .
4 SI The r les go erning the re d p lic tion

. u follo w s v u a are a s
1 The conson nt
. f t h red p lic ting s y ll ble is i n gener l
a o e u a a a
the first conson nt of the root ; th s W B t ( )

a u ,
. u ,
a a n o n -a s
p ir te is
a bstit ted for s p ir
sute ; d ( b) p lut l for g t r l an a a an a a a a a u tu a
Only sm ll p r p ortio f the roots f this cl ss ret in the

a a e n o o a a
a ccent the root s yll b le in the strong forms I the gre t m

o n -
a . n a a
jor i ty the ccent

,
is the red p lic tion
a both in the strong for m s on u a ,
an d in those we k for m s whose ending be g i with owels

a s n v .
172 Lesson XLI .
or
3; th s m e m ; fius g f s
, f s g i
; t fi ns)
. ; () if the root , ,
0
begi with si b il nt followed by non n s l m te the l tter is

n a a a -
a a u ,
a
rep e ted ( with obser nce f ) t the sibil a nt ; th s E n N T

a va o a ,
no u , ,
2 A long . o w el is shortened i the re d p lic ting s yll ble ;

v n u a a
d 33 is re p l ced by I ; th s Q T T d i n bo e ; af t f a i fi ;
“
-
{ {
" a u an a v
an , ,
43 2 The p resent ste m g t the root owel in the strong

.
- una es -
v
for m s ; th s f a i fi strong f a fi ; f a i l strong f a i rs

'
u , , , .
4 3 3 The erb f this cl ss lose the 1 fro m the endings f

‘
. v s o a o
the 3 d p l in the cti e w el l i the m i d dle ; d i t h 3 d 151

r . a v as as n an n e .
im p f t l w y s t k e 3 K before which fi l r dic l o wel h s

. ac . a a a , a na a a v a
swi m ; th s s temm u ,
4 34 Ro t 3 be r c rry F 2 d d 3 d sing im p f t ’
2. o , a , a . or n an r . . ac .
,
o f. 22 , 4 I4
l .
I n di c a t i ve .
1 .
f i rm fa ?
a fi u fii
i
’
3 -f a u fi fi m fa f a gs f arm s
I m p er f e t c .
m uta n t s
2 3 1fm r s tra n es t s ta ge W m s te m
“
g g
l
ia is e :
I mp e r a t i ve.
L f mm fi n f a un a fem ( m
-
fa n ? fi rm s ? fi lm s ?
fe i gn fi n ge r f HH W TR
tange n t f a wn te am s; fs m a m
Op t a et . : Fa ti m a etc ; mi d farm etc
“
. . . . : .
Pa r t . a et. :
q fi H
l Ffi ; m i d : .
te a m .
43 5 . Th e roots l l,
g
‘
gi e
‘
d 1111
‘
v
’
,
an ,
‘
p lose their
ut r
’
di
,
a
c a lv o w el ia the we ak forms le ing the we,

av a k stems
{g d 21
{ an .
1 74 Lesson XL I .
fi i ffi fi g} before conson nt en d ings fi rq

a nd d fi r before
‘
g a an
-
,
vo w el en dings ; th s 3 d p ersons i di fi n fifi fi rfl fi fi m fi
-
u ,
r n e.
‘
,
‘ ‘
,
’
43 9 3 p o r s crifice (.t d m k es the

“
2 d sing
‘
u , a
’
ac . an
“
a n .
3 d p ersons im p f
im
s s
v fi.
i ; W m 3 1W W r , .
4 40 1 afi fe r m y shorten i t
. o w el in w e k forms ;
.
‘
,
‘
a
’
a s v a
th s f ami n e f a fi rm f e w
u , fi fi n mt 2 f r b or .
or . .
,
‘
e
ash med a ch nges its we k stem fa ? t fa i “ before

’
a a o
r
vowel en d i ngs ; th s i di 3 d p ersons fi i fa fi fi ta q fa

-
u ,
n e. r ,
’
,
Voca b l
a ry XLI u .
t on ; (m i d) t ke recei e i n pu a ,
v .
1 1 ( dada li d t t ) gi e + F1 rr nge or d in
’ ‘
3 a a
a e v . c ,
a .
,
I ! entr st HQ nite p t together ; l y

u .
u ,
u a on.
1 211 ( d adh a ti d h tt ) p t p l ce 1 3 1 ( j d h a ti ) q it b d l
’
, g t u e u ,
a .
u ,
a an o n, ne ec .
Fi fi !
“
close sh t if (
} j i h t ) be sh med ,
u .
re z
'
a a .
Su b t s formed th e bl tion c stom ry

a u u a
3 1313 1 s fety ; feeling of s fety

n .
, a a . at the en d of religio s p p il ge u u a .
wi lt m d emon .
, Ad j .
ensf a f obl tion

-
a s f.
s,
d i ine a .
,
.
a
,
v .
31 n m p ra f fl e
.
,
f a enx cellent
.
re m rk r. ; .
“
, , a
1 1 1 ?m
6
g elle .
,
ble az . a .
fa ? p ossessions
n we . lth
, Ad : ,
a .
v.
i s m rest rem .in d

,
er a mn t.e ,
enin g , a . a v .
m m .
, one who h a s p er
Ex erc ise XLl .
fi fi ufi efi sfi fi m fi r m fe n so u
Less o n XL I . XL I I .
1 1 31 1
m n se n ai
"
2 121 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 131 1: 1
f a fii m h m vfi im fi e sta as 11
“
as v
11
21 : 1 1 5 113 1211 9 12 1 H ara re m a da m a fa wfi r e

a 3 1 1 11 11 f a fi f a 11 1 11 e m m a fi wm fi wa s a rmC
wra 11 a 11 a 3 a usi f an s 1?
-
n sfii W a nd ( s ati re 11 a 11
ii i m
E m a s m a m m fa
fi fi m 11 3 11 w w f sm s n m fi
d 1113 11
1
2 3
611 3 111 111 3 1 f a rm
3 a n W t1 11 fi 1 s1i a1s
“
11
fii ( vo c sin s f
ii i fii wra t h fi i fi i s wi m " £ 11 1 13 11 61 1 111
N W vrri 115 )1 11
1 1 1? v
1
‘
W e 11 s 11 a s su m m -
g
m i
f t rcn u e fiw qfi fi a s f am
e w e 11 e a rn e 11 11 3311
211 111 ( p a rt a ce p k ) $3 1 s fi m f a g wi t h : m
s .
a m 11 c 11
m fw fi i 1 1 g 11 1 1 1 n a w 11 gre w 11 so 11
6
-
Let the A dh y p o r the s crifici l o ff erings into the

11 . va r us u a a
fire 1 2 The seers ord i forty s cr ments in the l w book

. . a n a a a - s
a f
( g )a 1 3 D e .th entr sted his sons to
. V i th schol
a rs
ar a a u as s a as a .
14 Meeting w om n in the forest one sho l d y to her Sister “

. a a ,
u sa : ,
be t fr id 1 5 Let S at k c rry ( w e r) g rl nd d
no a a . a n a a a a a a a ,
an an
u mbrell d shoes 16 One who t k es p t ) roots fr its gr in

a -
an -
. . a ar .
-
u -
or - a
fro m str nge fi ld is t be p nished 1 7 Let the t w doorkee p ers

a a -
e ,
o u . . o
close the door 1 8 Do not neglect the te cher s comm nd 1 9 The

. . a
’
a . .
roy l s ge who w ore m ch j ewelry shone ( Fa HT) with gre t

a -
a ,
u ,
“
-
a
brilli ncy li k e the

a 2 0 The schol rs w ho h
, e not le rned su n . . a -
av - -
a
th i lessons
e r- sh med before their te cher ( are a a a a ce . or
L e sso n X L II .
r s N s l cl ss A ll roots f this cl ss end in

44 I . Ve b . a a a . o a con
son nts As cl ss sign they i nsert n s l before the fin l con

a . a -
a a a a
W ith
the s ffix W f forme d djecti es signify ing u , . are a v
‘
m de com p osed consisting f
a or I the secon d line b o r o
’
. n ,
‘
ca r
the n me m erely i e
a not in re lity s ch
’
,
. . are a u .
1 76 Lesson XL I I .
son nt nles
a ,
be there lre dy ( in Hi ) ; this s l is
u s one a a as na a
ad p te d to the conson nt exce p t in the strong forms where it is

a a , ,
ex p n d e d to the syll ble I [m] w hich be rs the ccent

a a
‘'
v
,
a a .
44 2 The combin tion f the fin l r dic l conson nts with

. a o a a a a
those f the p erson l en dings is in ccor d nce with the r les l

o a a a u a
re dy gi en f the root d re d p lic ting cl sses

a v or an u a a .
44 3 Th s join strong stem we k ‘ ’

3 k
3
.
; u ,
1
gi a ’
I di c t i n a ve .
A cti e v .Mid dle .
a “ s
se m as
"
t a 1
11 11 11
I mp e f e t. r c
I mp e r a t i ve .
W 31 531 1
$
135 313
W
Op t . a ct. :
m etc ; mi d
g a “ ! etc . . :
g
.
Pa r t . tac
g a
. a : f g a Ffi ; mi d
W \
1
. . : .
R oot obstr ct strong stem we k

444
W
‘ ’
.
; ( an t u , a
I di c t i e n a v .
Acti e v . Middle .
w i fe 31 w e v?
“
1 1“ “a 113 1
’
m fg fe m a% W s
nste d f g qa m W
I a d the li k e it is llowed
o , ,
an ,
a
( d
an more s l ) to w rite Mu
W t
ua lso W fl w , e a ,
e ,
inste d of ( 3 K etc ; in e ch c se omitting the conson nt i m

a 1 . a a a
m e d i tely following the n s l

a a a .
l7 8 Lesson XLI I .
Su b t s W wr t ng o p yin g
n .
, i i ,
C .
W con
Tf d iti on. st,
te ,
M
a t .
f sn a i v m t h H im al y .
, e a a s .
m f d w n ;
.
,
lso p ersonifie
a d a
U s s the D w n
a , a .
m m m thorn ; enem
.
,y i n? s it b le f K t i y .
“
u a or sa r a s.
m g m bite mo thf l I a d omest c

“
l
,
u u . i .
Hf m f m nf or ble C\
,
.
0
,
u av a .
g “ f W T s p len d id be tif l “
,
.
, , au u ,
excellent .
3 3 m rel ti e
3 a v .
Ex e rcise X LII .
W va n? g fi i w fi t a s s 1 1
Ra m a
‘
s1
-
1
tes ts =
1 th s ?
i
11 as 11
a mt m fi fi s {1111 211 111 1
£1 W
mi W
111311 a m
m a 11 a s 11
fi n a f s a a $1 fi 1 fl fi a a é aa m 1
m fi fi
' ’
fi s fi a fi m fi m a m n 3 8 11
3 1 W $
”
7 1 7 11 11 11 wa s m a fi a ? f e as ts 1 16 11 111 1 11 ”
.
farm 1 11
1 s Sfi a w fi a i
l
a s w as ( 1 3 1 1
51n 3 1
1 3 1 11
a m a fi a 3 fi 1 m fl a fifi r i i r fi s t
’
’ '
F ETTW W 11 Q 1lw
‘
mafi a 11 3 11 ( i M m : WW
W
“
:
513
f 3
s m fi W E fi 11 8 11 m a fi a a r a w a m
a s s m fi a m i a fi f s a fii ( a m fi v s th
i fi fi jfl a a u 1 1
W m ffi fi u g a n a e m i a 3 1
13 3 1
1 11 a
“
n a t u ri s m .
fi r a y a : 8 11 11 11 15 11 a s? n f a afi r f a f a fi i f a a f a m isfi t
s m ar t? 1 1 m s 19 1 3 1 3 111123
1 fa g : 11 so 11
11 After J y i nh h d long besiege d G i i g
. a as he d estro y e d
a a r na a ra ,
The ntece d ent f this rel ti e is the s bject of Ela m

a o a v u
Tr nsl te tho gh d t e
a a as u a iv .
L esson XLI I I
'
( a)
11 it An at sceticl st
sh
a ll t on
. ly 2 40 mo
12 thf
. l s in a a ea u u a
month Kin d le the fi ; t br nches f fire w ood

'
13
“
. re ou a or
(M ) ; mil k the co w s ; grind g in th s s i d p riest ra

”
: u a on e
to a nother ly i the morning 1 4 The te cher entr sted (fa g a l)

ea r n . . a u -
the schol rs w ith the co p y ing f the boo k s ( p d

a
'
1 5 The o c , .
mo nt inu g a H i m -
t ran checks the
e co rse f the clo d s
a va n u o u
w ith its exc e d ingly high p e ks 16 The d oers f right ( 3m)

e -
a . .
-
o - 0
a re h p p y in H e en enj y ing the fr its f th w orks 1 7 A

a av ,
o u -o -
’
at r - . .
k ing w ho h conq ere d foreign re l m m st not extermin te

as u a a u a
the ro y l f mil y 1 8 Ary ns m st k in d le the d omestic fi t the

a -
a . . a u - re a
ti m e f the w e dd ing 1 9 W o m en p o nded the rice w ith p estles

-
o - -
. . u .
L e ss o n X L III .
447 . s Ver b s . Pe r f ect

I the l ter l ng ge the p erfect Sy t e m
- . n a a ua
s y stem com p r ses onl y in d ic ti e m ode d p rtici p le e ch

i an a v an a a ,
a
both cti e d mi ddle I t form tion i s essenti lly li k e in ll

a v an . s a a a a
v erbs ; its ch r cteristics l d pla i ti ; 2 distinction f strong

a are : . re u ca on . o
an d we k forms ; 3 en d ings i some res p ects p ec li r ; 4 the f

a . n u a . re
q en t
u f the nion o w e l
u se o u -
v
44 8 R e d p li c t i. 1 I niti l conson nts

u red p lic ted
a on . . a a are u a ac
cor d ing to the r les gi en in Less X L I for the re d p lic ted p

u v . u a re
sent stem -
.
2 Medi l . d fin l o w els short a d longan re p resented by a v ,

an ,
are
the corres p on d ing short owel di p hthongs by their secon d element ; v ,
b t a ( Q I ) is re p resented l w y s b y i t ne er b y in th
”
u or a a ,
v as e
red p lic te d p resent stem Th s M W ; Q T HQ I ; m

u a -
. u , , , ,
f a fi lfl s fia f s fia g m 6 11 11
4 1 3 31
3 . I niti l a El
,
followed by single conson nt becomes WT a a ,
( thro gh ll n) ;
u G
a -fi th s mg m g
u , ,
.
4 I niti l. a and 3 follow the s m e n logy ; b t i n the strong

‘ a a a u
180 Lesson XLI I I .
forms where the root o w el is g n te d the red p lic ting owel is

,
-
v u a ,
u a v
p rotected fro m combin tion b y the insertion f a a th s a o or u ,
( I t strong p erfect stem m ( y ) i we k i (

n i e “
- -
as a . . 1
'
strong ( ) we k W ( ) u - v -o c , a u -uc .
5 R oots beginning w ith o w els long b y n t re

.
p osition d v a u or o
no t in gener l m k e the or d in r y p erfect s y stema b t a inste d a -

, u u se a
a p eri p hr stic form tio ( see below

a
) B t m is exce p tiona n . u an ,
m k ing the const nt p erfect stem 3 111 ;

a d fe w roots with initi l
a -
an a a
EH show the nom lo s re d p lic tion m i n the p f t fi e

3] or a a u u a er ec .
44 9 S t g d w k f ms
. I the t hree p ersons sing t
r on an ea or . n . ac :
the root syll ble is ccented d exhibits s lly stronger form

-
a a ,
an u ua a .
As reg r ds the strengthening

a
1 I roots w ith medi l o w els long by n t re

. n
p osition a v a u or ,
an d in those with initi l 3 B the d i ff erence f strong d we k for m a o an a s
does t p p e r e x cep t in ccented texts

no a a , a .
2 Me d i l
. d initi l owels g n ted if p ossible i n the
a an a v a re u a , ,
stro g forms ; th s fi g w W
n fa fi g ; { no w i i u , , .
, s . .
“
, 3 .
W w ah e
-
; W w a r 44 8
1 .
, s .
,
3 Me d i l 3 1 before
. single fin l conson nt is i ddh i d in the
a a a a vr e
3 d p ers d O p tion ll y in the l t ; th s from in l t sing

r .
, an
W a s u , ,
s .
either one ]; or wo rst in 2 d qui p in 3 d m ,

n ,
r .
4 A fin l o w e l t kes either g z ami d / in the l t p erson

°
. a v a u za or 11 s ,
g z in the 2 d
u za d dbi in the 3 d ; th s fro m fln ,
i n l t fi t?
vr r u , ,
s or
F615 ,
2n d ra s , sr a fi fi
45 0 . The root li m k irreg l rly the p erfect ste m a 1 i, d
“
c a e s, u a ,
-
an
a d ds H a
before o w el en ding a v -
.
4SI . Some roots inste d of strengthening the owel in the , a v
The gr mm ri ns p rescribe ( d o btless f lsel y ) this d pli

a a a u a re u
c tion for ll erbs beginning with w fl followed by m ore th

a a v or an
one conson nt a .
182 Lesson XL I I I .
da . 1 .
f a fa fié ,
2 .
W .
3 .
f a w ei ;
’
p 1 2 .
f a ra fi .
3 .
fa fa fic .
} Sing fa m fi reman f a rmm f a éfiw

-
2 . an : Ac t . : . 1 . e: or a or ,
3 .
fa afira ; da . 1 .
fa fa fa a . 2 W
E IR ; p l 1 .
fa
45 6 I I . . Ro o t s in 3 or 31
“
follo w the mo del f th o e l

a st -
mention e d .
Th s u ,
g : Ac t . : S ing . 1 .
fi ng er or
3 2 1 3 ,
2 .
gg
‘
m( no t
g g f
'
sm
§ 45 3 , du L ii , 2 3
w
“
see .
lga .
gg g q
a , .
fl a a
t
c
Ac t . : da .
gg f a a etc ‘
45 7 . is irreg l r in the p erfect u a .

( C f .
Acti e v . Mi ddle .
3 a ma s n a gs ; W E 3 315 ! 3 1 3 1 3
45 8 . I II . Ro o t s m ag .
( se c
§ 45 3 ,
1 s tars a m s ga a
my 11 31 sa
ga s a s“?
sa
ga s at
31 11
-
a i r«11 a s a ga E11 1 1 1 111
lso i i (2 23 choose 2 The other roots in

So a , ,
‘ ’
. .
a m ak e the
first p ersons th s from 3 m W I 3 6 1 3 u : , or , , afi a a ;
the fin l 13 be p rece d ed b y more th n

45 9 . If conson nt a
“
1 a one a ,
the form tion is follo w s fi g 1 W

a am 2 B a ri as : , . or
“
, .
,
3 m .
; d e m (a W
f ar etc the a s being
u g
. n te d
-
, , . u a .
460 I V R t i WT ( i cl d ing those w ritten by the

. . ti es oo s n n u na v
with Q i a h ) These t k e i f) i l t d 3 d sing t ; d

‘ ‘
or or . a n s an r . ac . an
the i n is los t before o w el en d ings d E 1 1 m

“
v -
an . .
’
1 i fi fi m ? a m
r M
-
a.
n a x61
a a
f
2
a fi m fl f fl 0 11 3 a fi m
“
.
a v atar
as a
a at
v s asa a s a w? a ?
f ar
2 .
351 , a nd si m il r roots m k e the i r we k forms fro m the
a ,
a a
Les son XL I I I . l8 3
sim p l er root for m s t fi -

‘
, 3
"
etc .
; a nd
3 1 m a kes its strong for m s lso a
from 3 ; th s $3 3 u ,
or 3 31 3 etc .
B Roots i n fi na l c onso na nts

. .
46 l I . . W i th m e d i a l vo we l c a p a ble of g u z
z a .
1 .
fl ag : Ac t : Sing . l .
fa fi g fl
‘
.
fafi q , 3 .
f m ; du .
fi fti
f ga etc ‘
.
p l . fa fi q fl etc . Mid . : fa fi i g etc . So from Fi g
2
.
Fi rfi g etc from i or m
3 g p 1
33 3 2 f
a
« ;
- . . : .
1
,
.
re ;
da .
g g fi
‘
la etc .
4 62 . II . W i th i n i t i a l vo w lc e a p a ble of g u na .
1 .
( a : Sing . 1 .
( i ts ,
2 .
( i ms a , 3 .
( a s ; du . 1 .
{f a dr
-
,
2 .
i n
si t
s , 3 .
{ cr
ay
z p l 1 . .
i f“ , 2 .
i s, 3 .
{HQ 2 . aga r
B éfi a
‘ ‘
etc . 3 . The root ‘

g lso follo
o w’
s this,
le a forming ru ,
{W etc .
, 3 rd .
p l .
m . 4
W m .kes ( see § 4 4 8 5 ) W E a ,
‘
4 63 . III . W i th i n i t i a l i t .
w , 3e etc .
; al g ,
m etc . B ut m ( origin ll y a f r)
a a
mak es m ai n etc . 44 8 ,
4 64 . I V W i t h m ed i a la t
. .
1 am. : Ac t . : sing . or a ren a , 2 a rmfi r st, 3.

-
“
.
1
mm
1 ;
d u a m fi qa . etc M i d a wai t etc . . : .
Th s ll s ch roots beginning with more th n

u a conson nt u a o ne a ,
or w ith s p ir te g tt r l m te g
an a a , a u u a u ,
or .
465 2 R oots in ge ner l h ing me d i l 5 ! before single "
. . a av a a
fin l conson nt d beginning lso with single conson nt w hich

a a ,
an a a a
is r e p e te d nch nge d in the red p lic tion i e t

a s p ir te
u a u a . . no an a a ,
a g tt r l or g contr ct w ith the red p lic tion into

u u a ,
s yll ble a u a one a ,
w ith Q its o w el in the w e k forms ; d this is llo w e d lso

”
as v ,
a an a a
in 2 d sing t w hen the nion owel is t ken Th s Ufl

n . ac . u -
v a . u , .
8 . 12 m? a nd
m , w 3? .
Se er l roots not h ing the form here d efine d

v a av a re s id to a
u ndergo the s me contr ction m o t of them o p tion lly a a ,

s a .
184 Lesson XL I I I .
h ta w 3 3 3 K in fi rs t? ’
fi ffl i a
‘
W . fia i i x
ert in roots beginning with at ( lso

4 66 . 3 C . a with a y ) ca a one a
d en d ing i n conson nt re d p lic te with the sy ll ble 3 (the ”
an o ne a ,
u a a
one root j st mentioned with f ) d bbre i te the a ( a ) of the

u , ,
an a v a
root to B in w e k forms The y tre te d li k e roots w ith a . a re a
initi l 3 a § 4 6 3 ) b t ret in the f l l root form in th e strong u a u
p ersons These roots

. 3 1 fi g Q H 3 11 W d w ell d a re , , ,
1
,
‘ ’
, an
g
er ; lso a Th s fl Act sing m W 2 a a
u ,
: . . 1 . or ,
.
“
éf w
‘
- B a ffi n 3 W 3 ; d
or 3 51 3 ? ( i ) etc M. i d B i fi etc u. u uc- - -
va . .
‘
f la
t Act sing : 1 { 213 1 .
2 {W ( m . 3 ( .
m a ; or . or , .
d a
{ .
F3 13 etc M i d { s} etc . .
i
.
4 67 4 Se er l roots which h
. . e m e d i l 3 between single
v a av a
conson nts b t c nnot follow the r le f 4 65 d ro p t the a t

a ,
u a u o ,
ou
from the we k forms These roots a in the cl ssic l l ng ge . a r e, a a a ua ,
m m m g “ ,
? d ,
lso 3 1 1 w hich might
,
be ex p ecte d to an a 3 ,
follo w § 4 65 They form the we k stems fi g Elm W e mg ; . a , ,
an d Elfi Th s a m \
.
H Q W etc a fg a etc u , 3 1 m k es its or .
,
. 3 a
strong stem m d El “ an .
468 5 The roots 3 1 @ d two others d li

.
g 1.
p , ,
an one or ,
re u
c te from the semi o w el d contr ct a d a t 1 d B in

a v ,
an a an o an
”
we k forms Th s strong g m
a .
W we k u ,
or , a
4 6 9 1 The root a s e k fo nd only in this tense ’

i ‘ ‘
g
‘
. .
p , a , s u ,
an d onl y i n the following forms sing 2 W 3 mg; d 2 3" : . .

, . u . .
"
3 3m
9 3 m m p ; .l 3 m These forms h e onl y the l
. e . . av va u
f the p resent — 2 The root lfi k no w m k es erfect w itho t

‘
o
g .
p .
, a a u
re d p lic tion b t otherwise reg l r w hich h only p resent l e ;

u a ,
u u a , as -
va u
se e
§ 4l 7 2 f é
g
l find . for m s the reg ‘
l r r a g a ,
‘ ’
, u a
”
.
47 0 The roots f a .
fa i l fi n d f g form p erfect stems , , ,
an ,
as -
f a tes fa rm f a fi r, . , an d f a te .
186 Lesson XL I I I XL I V . .
of
1 5 . Th s f ro m W
u , 3 , pf .
a m t nq o r a m i qm t ;
from i n ,
c f t h P er f ect I cl ssic l S ns k rit the p erfect

474 . F or e o e . n a a a
coinci d es in me ning with the im p erfect ten se f n rr tion a ,

as a o a a ,
b t i less often met w ith

u s .
L e sso n X L IV .
47 5 . V e bsr The erb h

. F u t u r e -S y t e m s ( a n d Co n di t i o n a l) . v as
tw f t res I The sim p le or f t re whic h is by f the ol d er

o u u : . , s- u u ,
ar ,
an d m ch m ore common th n the other ;

u d I I the p eri p hr stic , a an . a
f t re
u u .
47 6 I Si mpl F t This tense cont ins in dic ti e m ode

. . e u u r e. a an a v
an d p rtici p le acti e d m iddle

a I t m y be m d e from ll, a v an . a a a
v erbs The tense sign is the s yll ble Q dd e d to the root either
.
-
a ,
a
d irectl y by the nion o w el in the l tter c se becoming

, ( or
m) u -
v a a .
The root h the g i strengthening w hen p ossible ; d some roots

as u ld -
an
with me d i l a; g n te w ith inste d f g ig The inflection is

a
“
u a a o .
p recisel y li k e th t of the p resent in d ic ti e f erb of th a a v o a v e
a conj g tion ; th s from u f a wfi r a

-
u a u , ,
° f
4 77 W hen is t t k en fin l r dic l conson nts s ff er the

. no a ,
a a a a u
s m e ch nges b efore Q : before a in the inflection f the root

a a
“
as o
cl ss
a re d p lic ting n s l cl ss Th s from g g M
or u
; a or a a a . u , ,
Ht w
h a rf
i . fl ag , W e ; we “ fi t; “ ( a fi fl ffl ; fifi b
fifa rfii ; f m , W
t -
i t l; a .
g a f f el -
. The root HQ d well m k es ’
,
a
47 8 . 1 . Most roo t ending in o w els reject s v th s u ,

{1
‘
Erra ; 3 mi n ; 55 W e 2 B u t a ll roots in
m m e rra s fa
, .
1 3
. . .
2 3; t a k e th u s iii E LM “; g W fi f ; a n d a lso the roots I f}

—
, . ,
(a fi m rf a ) a n d
am t sla m ) 3 a s m a k es m i n . .
Lesso XL I V n 18 7
g ener l th erbs which t k e in the infiniti e d

47 9 . In a ,
e v a v an
p eri p hr stic f t re ( see

a below ) t k e it lso in this
u u tense B t th ,
a a . u e
a ccor d nce is f fro m com p lete ; d these p rts sho l d be le rned

a ar an a u a ,
as a m tter f s ge for y gi en erb

a o u a , an v v .
4 8 0 Stems f c s ti e inflection
. d denomin ti es in ER]
o au a v
,
an a v ,
m k e their f t re ste m s in fi l
a m ; t h s fi g WW W ?
u u -
“
u , ,
P t i ci p l The p rtici p les t d m i d

ar m de fro m
e. a , ac . an .
,
a re a
the f t re ste m p recisel y fro m the p resent stem ; th s 3 T 3 1

u u -
as -
u , ,
( f '
o
w ) E , g an ; 3 , ar m , fi t mm Cf ' 2 6 0)
2 62 .
48 2 tense c lle d the con d itio l (i di onl y )

. Co n di t i o n a l . A a na n e .
is m d e f o m the stem of the sim p le f t re p recisel y the i m

a r u u as
p erfect is m d e fro m the p resent stem d simil

a rly inflected -
,
an a .
Th s W Q R mu , ; fl qrfi fi fi fi I t is of
,
extremely ,
r re occ rrence
a u .
48 3 . II . Pe r i p h r a s t i c
This tense which is llo w ed to F utu r e .
,
a
be m de fro m ll erbs cont ins single indic ti e tense cti e

a a v ,
a a a v ,
a v ,
“
I t is forme d by the m ig ti in
31 h ing the l e f f t r no en a en s , av va u o a u u e
a cti e p rtici p le to the nom sing f w hich ( m )

v a d d e d in th
,
. . o a re a ,
e
lt s d 2 d p ersons
a n f ll n mbers the corres p on d ing in flecte d
n o a u ,
forms f the p res f 1 3 m be I the 3 d p ersons the m

o . o
‘ ’
. n r no en
a g t i is se d lone in the p ro p er n mber w itho t the

en a u a xili ry ,
u ,
u au a .
4 84 The root h in most. the s me form before the as c a se s a
s ffix g w hich it t k es before t h an f the infiniti e Th s

u a e o v . u ,
m g; “fl i t ; 35 6 5 ; W m g ”
. ,
48 5 The inflection is then follo w s

. as
The H in d s lso p rescribe u a a mi ddle form tion ; it a h a s, how

ev er p r tic lly no existence
,
a c a .
188 Lesson XL I V .
Ao ri st S stem.
-
y
The orist com p rises three q ite distinct form tions e ch
48 6 . a u a , a
with cert in b rieties ; b t ll

a su bo nd together i nto
-
va u a a re u o ne
com p lex system by cert in corres p on d ences f for m d me ning a o an a .
I n cl ssic l S nsk rit orists

a a a com p r ti ely r re Their l a a re a a v a . va ue
is q ite th t of im p f or p f
u a tenses f n a rr tion B t they . . as o a . u are
u se d lso ( tho gh t ne rl y often the p rohibiti e p t ) wi th

a u no a so as v o .
the p rticle m in p rohibitions th

a ,
gment being then omitte d ; ,
e au
th s I “ Q T: d not gi e m fi ffi: d t fe r W ith this ex

u ,
‘
o v
‘
o no a
’
.
ce p t i theonorist lw y s h
a the gment in cl ssical S ns k rit
a as au a a a .
The tense com p rises in the l ter l ng ge only in d ic ti e m o d e, a a ua , an a v .

‘
The m in rieties of orist

a va three I Sim p le Aorist ; I I Reda are : . . u
p lic tedaAorist ; I I I Sibil nt Aorist . a .
48 7 I Si m p l . r i st ( 1) R t i st This orist is p recisely

. e ao . oo a or . a
like im p erfect f the root cl ss I t is limited to the cti e oic

an o -
a . a v v e
f f w roots in WT d f I E g
o a e
i , an o . .
l l b
g i
‘ ‘
1
W W '
fil m W 1
3 13 3 3 13
531
2 a
ga r w as wa s m it t sl m
a was
0
Li k e at : W .
m ;
”
en. W W ; m ; "T 30
‘
3 3"
48 8 s t This is li k e im p erfect f the cl ss

.
( 2 ) Th e a -
a or i . an o a -
a ,
acti e d mi ddle Th s from m l t p ersons afe “ Hfi fi fl m

v an . u , , s s ,
‘
m ; Wfi fi m g W m fs I gener
)
l the root a
n a
The p c t i is strictl y p ec li r
re a o p t ti e ; b t it is
ve a u a a o r. a v u so
r re th t its for m tion se d not be ex p l ine d here

a a a u a .
1 90 Lesson XL I V . XL V .
mfi rs ; d u . 1 .
o
t
a sér ra 2 .
o
fw m . 3 .
o
am ; pl 1 .
o
f a wfi s ,
2 .
”
rm This is the ly i t f w hich forms
, 3 .
°
f emfi on
'
aor s o a re
m de in the secon d ry d denomin ti e conj g tions ( b t for

a a an a v u a u
c s ti es d d eno m in ti es in W cf
au a v an a v .
.
493 ( 6) Th is r i st is cti e only the corresp on d ing mi ddl

. e s -
ao a v , e
being of the form An ex m p le w ill s ffix here 1 11 sing 1 w

s- . a u . : . .
mf “g etc q ite li k e h inflection f the i s orist

.
,
u t e o -
a .
49 4 ( 7) Th i st
.
m Act sing 1 mf “
g 2 fi qe sa a o r -
. : . . .
“
, .
P
,
3 . d li k e im p f f the conj g tion B t i the

an so o n, an . o a -
u a . u n
mid the gr mm ri ns p rescri b e the 1 t sing m

. a d 2 d
a d a s . .
,
an n an
3r d du
m and c
m
“
.
a .
s P ss i
49 5 . G ener lly the mi d dle forms f orists 4
Ao r i t a ve . a o a ,
5 ,
7 or se d lso f the p ssi e Roots which d not or din
,
a re u a or a v . o
ar il
y t ke orists ofathese forms m a
y m k e the m li k e 4 o 5 e sp e , a a r
i l
c a ly f the p ssi e or a v .
49 6 B t 3 d p ers sing
. f p ec li r form tion h
u a become r . .
, o u a a , as
a recogni e d p rt f the p ssi e conj g tion I t is forme d by d d

z a o a v u a . a
ing to the root w hich t k es lso the g m ent d is s lly , a a au ,

an u ua
strengthene d in some c ses by g z in others by r ddhi After

, a u za , v .
fin l a n is d ded 11 Th s fi r s ta rts ; as m o re ; 35 a re n t ;
a a . u , . , ,
’
i
‘
ai r w ts .
an ; but
ea .
a
al rm g t wzfi e
; a t wa t.t s ,
.
L e s so n X L V .
u Derivative or S ec onda ry Co nj gati ons .
4 97 Secon d ry conj g tions

. those in w hich w hole a u a a re a
system f forms more less com p lete is m d e from d eri v ti e

o ,
or ,
a a a v
conj g tion stem this wh ole sy stem b eing s ll y connected w ith

u a -
,
u ua
a cert in definite mo dific tion of the origin l r d ic l sense These

a a a a a .
conj g ti ons I P ssi e

u a I I I tensi e I I I Desider ti
are : . a v . . n v . . a ve .
I V C s ti e. V Denomin ti e
au a v . . a v .
Lesson XL V .
1 9I
49 8 I . . P a ss i ve
The p resent s yste m f the p ssi e h bee .
-
o a v as n
described ; lso the p ec li r 3 d p ers sing se d

as a p s u a r . . u as a o r. a s ,
the p st p ss p rtici p le in a a d the f t p ss p rtici p les

‘ ‘
a a . a or ,
an u . a . a
or ger n d i es I ll other p rts f the erb m iddle forms

u v . n a a o v a re
u se d if necess ry w ith p ssi e m e ning

,
a ,
a v a .
499 I I I t e si . The intensi e co j g tion signifies the

. n n ve . v n u a
intensific tion the re p etition f the ction ex p resse d by th

a or o a e
p rim ry conj
a g tion f root F or mus o tsi d e
a the p resent system
o a . u -
are too r re to nee d notice here ; in deed e en w ithin th t s y stem

a , v a
they by a re me ns common in the l ter l ng ge I ntensi es

no a a a ua . v
f ll into two cl sses

a a .
5 0 0 1 The erbs f the first cl ss ( onl y

. . t ) form their i
v o a ac . n
tensi e ste m by red p lic tion

v -
d the re d p lic ting s y ll ble isu a , an u a a
strengthene d R d ic l n d a . re d p lic te d w ith i s“

a . a a i an
“
e are u a ,
d i with Q 3 d 3 ?w ith W} ; th s
w fi }
t
an
, W an a “h i u , , , , .
6 So m etimes the re d p lic ting s y ll ble h

. fin lconson nt t k en u a a as a a a , a
fro m the end f the root ; th s fi x a ri a o So m etimes the u , ,

. 0 .
re d p lic tion is d issy ll bic

u a i o w el being inserte d fter the a ,
an -
v a
fin l conson nt f the re d p lic ting syll ble ; th s W

a a o u a a u ,
'
The m o d el f inflection is the p resent sy stem f the red p lic ting

o -
o u a
cl ss b t de i tions
a , u t r re ; in p rtic l r
v a
{ i sometimesa re no a a u a , an
J
s
inserted between stem d ending an .
5 0 l 2 F ro m the intensi e stem

. . j st describe d m y be formed v -
as u a
a nother form lly i d entic l with p ssi e stem by the s ffix 3 7

,
a a a a v -
u °
I t t kes m id d le inflecti o
a n b t h p ssi e l e being se d , u as no a v va u ,
u
p recisel y i s the intensi e j

as st mentioned Th s 5 1 é
3 fl m fi v u . u , ,
‘ ‘
5 02 A f w intensi es . h ing lost their l e s ch co m e

e v av va u as u
,
t obe se d p resents du tre ted by the n ti e gr m m ri ns

as , an a re a a v a a a
as sim p le roots Th s 31 13 re lly intensi e f 1! w ke is . u ,

a v o
‘
a
’
,
a ssigne d t the root cl ss p res m i rfi i etc d a w etc ;

o -
a : . .
, a . .
im p f 1 1 m m 2 wa n ts 3 m
. .
; d w ga t So
,
.
, . a . e c
1 92 Lesson XL V .
a lso ( fr at intens f a sed , p resen t w ith the sense

. o
“ ‘
r un
’
,
u as a
‘
be p oor fi ri l w sh d some others
’
. the intensi e
‘
a
’
,
an ,
u se v
p resent s y ste m in the-

s me w y d i g d to the a a ,
an a re a ss ne re
d p lic ting cl ss ; th s 3 d sing fi fi ffi 3 d p l W E

u a a u ,
r .
'
,
r . .
I ntensi e forms o tsi d e the p res ent sy stem

v ery r re u -
a re v a .
5 03 I I I D es i d r t i . By this conj g tion is denote d d esire

. e a ve . u a a
for the ction con dition d enote d by the sim p l e root ; th s

a or u ,
fi rmfi r I d rin k rd i d fi ‘
t nm fi I w ish to d rink ’
, es .
‘ ’
.
5 0 4 T form the d esi d er ti e stem the root i

. o red p lic ted a v -
s u a
,
an d dd s a
.
a sometimes “ C The conson nt f the re d p lic tion
, a o u a
is determine d by the s l r les ; the o w el f re d p lic tion is u ua u v o u a
if the root h o w el i o w el a
as an d 3 if the root
a -
v ,
an -
v , or ,
an
‘
h as an owel Th s a t fi m u fi ; f a fi fi afi ; ar: W e ;
u v u , , ,
v
e
fi afl éfi fi g fi fi re fi ; fi st fi fe n a
-
a t, ;
n m b er f roots for m
5 05 . A bbre i ted desider ti e
u o an a v a a v
stem ; th s m W E ; Q T f g mfi u , , , .
5 06 The conj g tion i the p resent system is li k e th t f

. u a n -
a o
other stems O tsi d e f th t d esi d er ti e forms

a -
. q ite i u o a a v are u n
freq ent The p erfect is the p eri p hr stic The orist is f the
u . a . a o
f; form ; t h s m m ; Elf a fi ffi g The f t res m de -

‘ ‘
.
-
u ,
. u u a re a
,
with the xili ry owel th s W fi i fi q g The

au a v u , , .
v erb l o ns a m de with
n in ll forms w here th t o w el is
u a re a a a v
e er t k en A p ssi e m y be m de ; th s fi q fi i t is d esire d
v a . a v a a u
,
t ‘
to be obt ine d ; p rt fift qa a

’
a
‘
.
5 07 I V C s t i l The p resent s y stem

. . f the c s ti e
au a ve . .
-
o au a v
h bee tre te d f lre dy 2 The p erfect is the p eri p hr stic

as n a o a a . . a ,
the d eri ti e no n in WT being forme d fro m the c s ti e stem ;

va v u au a v -
th s W
u , am 3 The orist is the red p lic te d m d e in . . a u a ,
a
gener l d irectl y fro m the root d form lly nconnected with the
a ,
an a u
c s ti e stem ; th s E3 W W
au a v -
m a n I f w ins nces u , , ’ . n a e ta
,
where the root h ss med p ec li r form before the c s ti e as a u a u a au a v
sign the r d p lic ted o ist is m d e fro m this for m not from the
,
e u a a r a ,
1 94 I . S nskrit E nglish G loss ry
a -
a .
Glossa r y to th e Ex er ci ses .
F or the l p h betic ord er a a o f S ns k rit words

a se e p .
l Sa nskrit Engl
. ish -
.
A djecti es in v -
form their feminine in
nless other w ise st te da -
d, u a .
ak m
sa di .
, d e, belo w d o w n d ice . db a as a v .
, ,
.
ak (
sa n k i 2 7 5 ) a
y d ls z t d t d belo w ; re
p p w n .
,
e e . a za s a v .
,
.
,
.
aym m
’
fire ; .
, p Agni the ge n n d erne th as n . r .
, ,
.
, u a .
g d 0O f fire d l d o er . b o e a n,
'
a v. , v ,
a v ,
on .
h k in d of p ri st dh i k d d ition l ; s p erior
' ’
ag m t m
o r zn .
,
a e . a a a .
,
a a u .
ag ra front ; ti p d
n .
, dli t p rt f dh i i ,
en . a z a a . o a -
.
ahy
’
a lim b ; b o dy
n .
, dh a d now . a un a v. , .
( 3 ) m cert in m y thic l dh y m p riest w ho recites

‘
afig 25
zr a s .
,
a a a va r u .
,
ch r cters a a the Y j r e d . a u v a .
afij h m a
’
gest re ( V .
1/ , a 4 2 9 ) b re the ; u oc . an a
m m sm ll ;
a .
,
tom p m bre
a the ; li e as n .
, a . a v .
t
a as a d hence v .
, b efore cons neg ti e p refix . a n, . a ,
a v .
t
a z
’
d a cross p st ; in p d
v .
, d h ( 27 8 ) m
a , a c s, ana u .
,
ox .
t excess
o t . m d ft i m m di t l y a nan a ra a v .
,
a er, e a e
ati th i m g est .
, fterw rd ; u re
p p w. b l a a as .
,
. a .
,
t
a ra d a here hither v . right fter
, , . a .
atb ad a then ; there p on

v .
,
tb m misfort ne u . a na r a .
,
u .
ath d m
a r va ve the fo rth Ve d dy a f ltless .
,
u a . a n a va a a .
, au .
ad (
as d 2 8
as7 ) p ron th t one ; u : h i l p d t k p city .
, a a na a a a n , n . . r .
,
a .
so - a nd -
so d . fter long tow r d a nu a v .
,
a ,
a ,
a .
a dya a d v .
,
to -
da y . a n u kfl l
a a .
,
f a vo r a b le ; asn , . f a vo r .
a dya t a n a a dj ,
o f to d a y -
. a nu j d f
fi .
, p ermission .
a dr o ba m . f ithf lness
,
a u . a n u r ztp a
’
a . s it b le
,
u a .
a dh a r m a m inj stice w .
,
u
,
xo n
g . a me ka a , se er l v a .
I . S nskrit E nglish G loss ry
a -
a .
a n r ta ntr th
n .
,
u py unecess ry . a va a a .
, a .
an t a m d ; in l t l st
en th d f con d ition st te oc .
, a a . a va s .
, ,
a .
an at m inner ; a .
,
interior 625 (2 72 ) d o w n w rd as n .
, ,
0 12 7 0 a .
, a .
mi d d le ; inter l di fference ; j/ l c ( p t é
va ) cq re,
obt in ; oc a a nu a ui , a
c sion j nct re Of 3 7 6 4
a ,
u m p u i d em . .
,
. sa -
u a .
an dh a blin d a .
, V ; (
2 g é t i ) . t ; c s ( d dy a a n ea au . c a
an d/ m er a
p eo
p p le .
,
ti )n m .k e t gi e to
r. , a t . a ea ,
v ea .
a nna foo d fo dder

n .
, p i t i ( 3 3 2 ) ,
m eight y . a nu .
, .
an
y ( a2 3 I) p ron d j other p te r . a .
,
. a ru n.
,
a .
a n y t a ra d else w herea v p m
.
,
horse . a va .
,
.
a n va fi (2 7 2) c follo w ing c m m d a .
, p the A c i . a
’
n . u .
,
72 . r .
, v ns
u n ua g m ad escen d nt p rogeny
.
, ( the I n d i n A B; fi p ) a ,
. a L xo oz .
ap ( 2 7 7 ) f p l w ter .
a t ( 3 3 2 ) .
,
m eight a . d a nu .
,
.
ap a ra
( 2 3 3 ) p ro dj hin d er ; s m d p ( 3 3 2 ) m n eighteen . a .
,
a a a nu .
,
.
other .
std i fi c ti m tw ty a v a nu .
,
en
ap (
’
zI 9 0 ) d nto ; f rther a; eight v .

,
u u as .
conj lso e en .
, a V l ( ti 42 6) be exist
, v . as as
’
: ,
.
ap sa r a s f he enl y y pn m h
.
, V Q ( y ) avt throw h rl ; .
'
as
'
as a z ,
u
a bh y a feeling f s fety ; s fe
a n .
,
bh i re p e t st dy le rn ; o a a a a ,
u ,
a
m entr st ; thro ’
ty .
p w u ra
a b/ dn
'
a to nto v .
, forw r d into,
u . a or .
bh p i y m p l n design ; iew swor d

’
i m
‘
a v rc a .
, a , v . as .
,
.
a bbyd m sa st dy recit tion .

,
m d emon
u ,
a . a su r a .
, .
a mrt aimmort l ; a .
,
nect r d s me d a a s n ., a . as u a as a a s.
m b ( 27 3 ) f m other ik ( h i 2 75 ) bone
‘
a er . t, . as an us : n .
,
.
a y m
a s me i d am m das s me ya m ; ste .m as u a as va a as
ar i m enem y .
,
in p d cf 3 5 2 4 . c s, .
, .
ar t/m m p p r ose ; m e ning

.
, ; b ( b u i m d y a a an a ar, a s: n .
,
a .
w e lth a . h m (2 23 ) p ron I a a .
, .
1/ th y
a r
( d a th a
y t ) k h i t d
en is gree ble ar a
’
a e as a a a , . a a .
f or
( w t w o +.
p idem h excl h l h l ra . a o .
,
o a
ar y m a
( 2 8 4 )
an m p b d t d y d . nigh
, tn . r . a or ra n , . a a an a .
V h
ar
( h ti ) d eser e ar
; h
'
e a v av a
right to ; w inf be ble d (| 3 0) d hither nto ; p re p

. . a . a v .
, , u as .
,
lm d
a a a eno gh ; ery ; w instr w b l hither from ; ntil
v .
, u v . .
,
. a .
,
u .
eno gh f w y with ; w d t d k i m form fig re

u o , a a . a .
,
'
c ra .
, ,
u .
s it b le f
u a d kd c m
o r. i ky a a r, s .
li m b d kr st p rt of i k m
“
a .
, ee . a a . ( -
.
a va d a do w n ff v .
, d k d t p rt f , o . r n a a . o
“
13
1 96 I . S nskrit E nglish G loss ry
a -
a .
d ga m a n a rri l n it .
, ( ) p
23 aI ron d
vaj other . a ra . a .
, .
d d c mra w l k d con ers i t .

,
“ d hence
a an v a as a v. , .
tion ; con d ct ; o b ser nce

”
i ti d uth s va . a v .
,
u , so .
d d y m
c r ate cher .
,
i tth m d a in this w y . a a v .
,
a ,
so .
dj fi d f comm n d .
,
{ d m ( 2 8 5 —
a 2 8 6 ) p ron .
this this a .
, ,
a tm m so l self ; often sim p le

an .
,
here u , .
reflexi e p rono n 444) k in d le

'
v i dh i db (i ddl u . a n ze : ,
d di m beginning ;
.
, p d cf light i n c s, . .
3 75 1 ,
. i d m moon n u .
, .
d ty m
cz z
'
a .
,
i d su n m .
p the god I n d r n ra .
, n . r. , a.
dd c m e a comm n d p rescri p tion i d p th

.
,
ap D elhi ,
. n ra ras a n .
,
n . r .
,
.
V pd cq ire re ch ; i d d z i f p go d d ess a u ,
a n r z .
,
n . r .
,
a .
—+ p m a va m p m i d em
, ; y t ( )
2 63 ,
gre
or a t ; so m ch t- ,
’
z an a .
,
so a u .
m i d em ; finish {y m fem f d m
'
8a . a . o o a .
dp d f a c l mity .
,
a a i d p t p .; li k e va a v .
,
os os .
,
as .
ap t p rt f dp tr st w orth y ; fit V l s (i hd ti | 09 ) w ish d esire

' '
a a . o ,
u . z cc : , .
d y sm u t ( 2 63 )an long li e d {a m rrow a .

,
-
v . n .
, a .
d i t
v s a p rt ,
f i 9 + d aentered i l .d here
o hither v za a v. , ,
.
( y)
b i e ,
filled (with .
) .
d ca f h p .
,
0 1e/ t i . i
s ( ks t ) behol d ; + p c a e se e , u a
dg u s w ift
a .
,
neglect ; + p t exp ect
. ra z
’
dc m ra m hermit ge
a . i dr c f
, s ch a .
, . a .
,
u .
V a ( d
s t 4 2 4 ) i t ;
s e :c s ( a V i c ( f t 4 2 2 ) r le w (g s
) au . a e : u , o n en .
y ) p
t
s az a z
’
l ce ;
’
p i t b y ; i p a m m ster ; lor d ; rich m u a s va r a .

, a a n.
w it p on ; re erence
a u v .
(w a n d. n se t ch ir .
,
h t p rt
a , f d c high
a . u cc rz a
’
a . o u -
r z,
'
db a r a za
z bringing n . d d
, p p forth t . u a v .
,
u , u or ou .
dh i
‘
c ra m foo d .
,
d ii (2 7 2 ) . north w rd u a c a .
, a .
dh ti f obl tion o ff ering

u .
,
d d hi m a oce n , . u a .
,
a .
d y m rise u a a .
, .
/
1 (i ét
‘
z go d h i d belly a u a ra n .
,
.
m id go o er re p e t re d ; dy t p rt f d y m re dy
.
,
v ,
a , a u a a a . o u -
a ,
a .
c s ( dhydp y ti ) te ch ;
au . a dyd g rden '
a a a u na n .
,
a .
+ f ll w ;
a nu p g o w y ; d o
y g m d iligence a a o a a u o a .
,
.
+ bh i p p ro ch ; dy g diligent energetic ’
a t m a a as a u o zn a .
, , .
( li t ly g
’
home ) set ( of the o p d to tow r d su n
,
u a a v .
, , a .
d rise ; p p p y u initi tion u a a u ana ana n .

, a .
p ro ch ; a + p go forth ; d i p m s d f cert in Vrae d ic works e . u a

’
a .
,
a .
i ba f wish
co .
, p bh g m . enjoy m ent u a o a .
, .
1 98 I . S nskrit E nglish Gloss ry
a - a .
ka m a m esire lo e ; .
p,
gen
d d t or 1 ,
v as n . r., .
,
a .
,
0 0 .
the g d f lo e o + p ad
o m k e k no w n isi ble ;v . r as a or v
kd m d g h a gr nting w ishes ;
u a m m ( 3 9 5 ) p re p re
a .
,
d orn a a ,
a .
as f s bst . db the f b 1/2kr

u .
,
stre w sc tter ;
se . en u , a ,
a
l
u W on d er
o us w i i d em -co
. v ,
.
ka m d h a ide m u j
a/ I g t
.
,
I IO ) t t .ff ; c
‘
cu , cu o
kd y m a bo dy .
,
i d em . a va .
ka z r a za re son c se n . kr ti f wor k ( liter r y)

,
a ,
au . .
,
a .
-
ka i r n c sing m k ing a .
,
kr t m au d o p te d ,
a . rz
’
a a .
,
a .
kd y r b siness concern
a n .
, kr t u w hole entire , . sn a a .
, ,
.
kd l m a time .
, krp z p oor ; nigg r d l y
. a za a .
, a .
ka l i da m p sa p oet k f p d. f , gr cio
n sness. it
p y r , . a . .
,
a u , .
k wy
'
c paoem n .
, V k m d r w ; . a d r w a a
k d ci f p city Ben res

.
,
72 . r
p ; .
, ( k r a a t a
) p lo gh , a . on or u
’
z u .
kd sfl f got ; w oo d
za n .
, kgsi f a gric lt re .
'
, a u u .
k d th m y
s a m d e f w oo d a kg si
a l m h sb n d m n p e s n t
a .
,
a o .
'
va a .
, u a a , a a .
ki m ne t f I ; w t u howe er kgsz
. o bl ck ; m p the
ra . u, v . r ta a .
, a as .
,
n . r , .
ki y t ( 2 6 3 ) p ro
an dj h w g d K r s n n . a .
,
o o a .
gre t ? a V klp (l ilp t ) be in or d er ; tend ca a e
ki ti f glory
r .
,
con d ce to . c s (k l or u au . a
k t u as a d w hence ? w h y ? v .
p y
, t i t ) or d in pp oint a
'
a ,
-
e a , a .
k tmu d where ?whither ?

a v k t m b nner
.
,
e u .
,
a .
k t m
un a sp e r .
,
k c m h ir a . e a .
, a .
Vk p ( kdp y t ) be ngry (gen ka i la m mo nt in

’
u a z a sa n u a
p . .
, . r .
,
a .
or k gi f p e k ; p oint t i p o .
, a ,
.
k m i
u m
c ra
‘
b y p rince k p m
.
, nger o , . o a .
, a .
k c l
u a a b le ; cle er ; le rn ed
a .
, k s m tre s re ; tre s ry
a v a . o a .
,
a u a u .
V k té 3 94 5 ) m k e kd t y m ara p : -
a ,
un e a .
,
n . r .
d poerform
, ; d / p t t k a l y d f p a
'
n u a u sa .
, n . r.
the he d m ke r ler o er a V
,
k m a k m t l3 4)
u v ra ra
’
a e :
p d e il to h a rm ( gen a ste p ; o t i p ss
v b e y on d ; ,
a .
,
a a
l oc
) .
, pa ced p y; . tr nsgress ; p ss ( of time ); a a -
a a a l
l m p re p re d orn ; d stri d e to tt c k
'
a a a a p , ; a cts u , a a
( a i sk v t ) m k e k nown aro z ex 2
’
go t a ,
71 1 9 ou .
bi bit ; p d goo d t b 1 /k i uk i i t é) a b y o o, e r r n u .
fi t ( gen ti ( i k d f g me S ort ’
ne t i i .
, p ra s r c .
, a , .
k ) hi d e ; bl me ; k d b ( k i d b ) b ngry ( gen ’
ras .
p m y t a aras ru a z e a .
p tu t the he da ; +p t p y a ra
’
z a ,
or
recom p ense p nish ( rei k dl m nger ,

u a c c. ,
ro za .
, a .
I . S nskrit E nglish Gloss ry
a -
a . 1 99
kva awhere ? whither ? i t

dv .
,
m ( m i d ) com e together c sa .
,
so m etimes e er meet ,
v .
k z m
sa za m oment ; time .
g
n , .i y com p ery honor ble . ar as .
,
v a .
w rrior m f the 1/29 a (g y t ) sing

i
k t y m
’ ’
sa rz a .
, a ,
an o e a z .
secon d c ste ag d d l . f i in the m nner n za r va ,

.
-
,
a .
, a
ks y ma ad ec y d estr ction .
,
f G n dh r sa ,
u . o a a va .
1/k s an k s a t é ) h rt n h (g i h t ) p l nge ; a u u . c a e u a va
wo n d u . di e p l nge n d er ( ) v or u u a ce .
y ks l ( ksd ldy ti ) w sh ;
’
a g i f a oice song a r .
, v ,
.
i d em g i m mo nt in ’
zr .
,
u a .
kad i ra s it ble for K t i y gi t

a .
,
u song ; singing
a sa r as . a n .
, .
1/W st ( ksi ti ) d estroy q lity excellence

’
e g z m
no . u za .
,
ua , .
ks t p
’
zz a m
’
k ing .
, g m te cher . ur u .
,
a .
1/lst}o ? h rl thro w Vg h (g h ti I 0 !
) u hi d e ,
conce l ; . u
i
t a : , a
ksi z p rt of 2ksi
za a re d ce d d . c s (ga /dy ti ) i d em ,
u , e au . z a .
ca
y d r eine d ,
u g k f c e . u
‘
ct .
,
av .
k i
s ra mil k n .
, g r i m . ho se n .
,
u .
ks d u little sm ll
ra a .
, g r h tb m ho seholder he d of
, a . as a .
,
u ,
a
ks dh f h nger
u .
,
u f mil y . a .
ks t e ra fiel d n .
, g y
r b . d omestic a a .
, .
g ( 2 0 9 ) m f b ll steer co w ; o .
,
.
, u , ,
/
j kb ( k
anh t i ) gd i ana
'
f fi g S p e ech . as .
,
.
, .
kk ara m .
, g t
a s s. n t re st p i d it y o va n .
, ox- a u ,
u .
g p m cowher d sh p her d ; a a .
, ,
e
g g
a fi f
’
cz
p the. G
, nges n g
. r d i
r n .
,
a . ua a .
g j
a ma ele p h nt .
, 1 g p d g/ ( d a g P y ) . t h kee p
/
o a en . o a
'
a z
'
Vg z y ( da za
g z a
y t ) n m ber er en ; g . r d : a za
'
a z
‘
u ,
ua .
co nt ; u d es p ise gd a va w eight ; d ignity . u r a va n .

, .
g t
a z f
'
g it ;. co,
rse a /
j g t/ u string to
. ran z
g an d / m zao d o p erf me .
,
ge her ; com p ose r, u . t .
g an d h m a r va G n d h r g th .
,
m liter ry w ork book
a a a va ,
one ran a .
, a ,
.
o f b nd a f celesti l singers
a g bo (g r / n i ti g b ni t é) recei e a . ra I c
,
r
'
v ,
/ m
lg a
(g d b t i l0 0 ) go ; + cc sei ea ; : m hol d restr in a nu z
'
, a ,
follow ; bhi isit tten d ; chec k ; a

p li t k e v ,
a ra a .
n d erst n d ;
a va t m g am
u m ill ge a as a r a .
,
v a .
g d own
o t ( cf i t m ) ; ,g a se m bite m o thf
. l os a r sa .
, ,
u u .
d come ; d rise ; u
m come forth ; p roceed fro m ; g h t m essel

‘
s
p t a a .
, o , v .
a - a .
g h asa m fod er .
,
d ,
ha y . ms
’
or deci de concl d e ;
vi - m s
’
,
u
g hr t a n cl rifie d b tter ; g h
.
,
a u ee. +p g ther ;
ra i i d em ;
a v
smel l m collect
Vghr d (j g h I O2 ) +
’
ti z ra : . sa .
ci tt a notice ; tho ght ; min d

n .
,
u .
ca encl conj . .
,
a n d, a lso , r e, -
g ue ; V i
c nt ( i t g t i )
c n a consi d er ’
a .
sometimes if .
f m d
e ra lon g long time
a v .
, , a .
ca k ra w heel n .
,
.
V cu d p m in c s (p d d g )ti au . r a co a ,
oa ks ( t c as e :behol d ; see , im p el .
a rel te ; c ll n me ; a a ,
a V cur ( d g t )
co r ste l a z
’
a .
vi -
d ex p l in a .
cfi da f t p k not sc l p
.
,
o -
, a .
ca ksu s n .
, e
y e .
ce d d a p vt p .if ,
os os .
,
.
fo r V st t ) stir be li e
( 3 3 2 ) n um ce e a v
-
c a tu r .
, u . , .
c a tu r tb a ,
f . 4 ,
a , . fo rth u .
cd l kg u u m a
p p eo p le .
,
n . r .
,
a .
c a tu r d a ga ( 3 3 2 ) nu m fo rteen
.
,
u .
V g ( gd t ) totter f ll
e a c va e + i ,
a v
c a tu sp a d ( 2 8 2 ) a .
,
q dr p ed
ua u .
f ll w y
a a a .
c a tv d r i rzca
’
t ( 3 3 2 ) nu m forty .
,
.
c a n dr a m moon .
,
.
cha t tr a n . mbrell
,
u a .
ca n d m ra m moon as .
,
.
c h a gd f .
,
sh d e a .
se onl w ith V c hi d c kzn d d zé /)

’
d c u t, c u t
( )
’
y m
ca d , y
u d a m t i c a
i p ; rinse the mo t h
s u .
o ff ; + i d em ; a va + d t ke a
ca m t kd a m stonishment
ra .
, a .
aw y a ,
remo e ; v + ud exter
1
/
ca r ( ti ) go
ca r aw n d er'
; gr e ,
a az min te a .
( of c ttle ) ; t a p erform commit ; r., ,
it p erform com p lete d ; , ,

o
j a ga t th n t w .hich
,
mo es ; men a v
m ii i d em ;
su d c s -
u au an d b e sts ; the worl d a .
p rono nce y u , sa .
Vj ( j i/
an a t I 5 S ;j la
g ti ) tr ns e ana
'
a a .
ca r a mo ing going
a .
,
v , .
(j i
a na
g t i d cti e aforms ) b egetan a v , ,
z m
c a r a za foot leg .
,
n .
, , .
p ro d ce ; u intr ns (j gi t d a .
’
c a e an
ca rit beh ior life

a n .
,
av , . mi dd le forms) be b orn ( mother in
ca rm hi d e s k in ; le ther
an n .
, , a . rise s p ring p ; a d ,
u u
ca rm m g a le thern a a a .
,
a .
( jj y )
d
u t b borna e rise e , a
V l ca stir ; p mo e ra v p m or m i d em sa .
onm rch ; + p i t mo e
,
a ra -
v ,
r., v , j a na m m ; p l .
,d coll i an .
, an . n
stir . sing p eo p le fol k s

.
, ,
.
cdt md g ur cert in s crifice

s a n .
,
a a a .
j ana k m a f ther .
, a .
cdmi k gol d
a ra n .
, .
j anan i f mother .
,
.
cd r a m .
, spy .
j an m an birth existence
n .
,
.
cd r u a .
,
be tif l au u .
j ga m a ictory .
,
v .
V ci c i n u té
) g ther ;a j a ra s ( 2 8 0 ) f .
,
d a ge
ol .
20 2 I . S ns rit E nglish G loss ry
a k -
a .
j /
t u s td sg a ti
( ) rejoice t k e p le s re , a a u da c (3 3 2)
a n um., te n .
in (w . d a pa r a th a m .
,
n .
p r .
V tr cross o er ; v a va d a s ga p a rt . o f d a ri“
c .
d escen d ; d emerge ;
u p m V da h ( d a h a fi
) b
’
u rn .
in c s au . ecei e Vld a (d d a ti d tté 4 3 6) gi e ; in d v . a

'
,
a : v
tr ti g f a a , . thir d -
( d ap g ti ) m k e
a gi .e ,
. ca n s . a
'
a a v o r
V rp ( fp g )
t t t i s tisf y oneself a
p y; a at k e ( );
3 I2 +p . a a ra
tr za f
s z thirst d esire
.
,
entr st ; gi e in m rri ge
,
. u v a a .
t j
e a svzn
’
co r geo s a .
, V 2da (dg ti I3 2) t
u a u . a
'
: cu .
Vtg j ( tg j t i ) le e b n d on ; d a tr m gi er ; gen
'
a a a dj a v , a a .
,
v as a .
+p le e fl gi e p
arz
'
av o
'
,
v u .
~
e r o u s.
t g d c (3 32)
ra o a m a thirteen da gift p res ent ; generosity
nu .
, . na n .
, ,
.
t i (3 32)
r m three nu da . m , d emon . n a va .
, .
t i i g t (3 32)
r v a m thirty da m nu sl e groom .
, . sa .
, av ,
.
t i lk
r o a ki f n the threefol d d a i f fem le S l e S er nt
.
,
-
.
, s .
,
a av ,
va .
w orl d . di d y va n .
,
a .
t i rt
r v tri p le threefol d
a .
,
d i ( 277 ) f ( r rel y
,
ky . v . a s .
l i gi s
r r an three he ded a .
,
di m d y -
a . va sa .
, a .
t i st bh f
r u me f metre .
,
nadi g he enl y d i ine o a . v a a .
,
av , v .
t g gi t
r a m
'
z nueighty three V p ( g ) S ho w p oint

d i
.
,
d i d t i t; -
.
, ou
tva stem f p ron of 2d p ers (2 2 6 ; o a comm n d ; .

p te ch . a u a a ,
cf 3 5 2
.
,
instr ct u .
tva d c lle d stem of p ron t

so - a di p f p oint c r d in l p oint ; . va . .
, , a a
tva sz r m p g d
.
,T tn .q rter r region
.
, ; d
a irection o ,
va s a r . ua , .
Vdi / ( d g ah i 4 2 8 ) S m e r '
z e a .
V d i c
ar ( g )
d a ti bite d i
a
g b long ; m d . fr r a a .
,
a a v .
, a a .
d i st a f tooth
ar r .
, di g h a g long li e d
. r us a .
,
-
v .
d ks m
a a
p .
,
n V . d i ( g ) p y
d ir t i . l v v a a .
d ks z
a
'
z za right h nd ; so thern Vd
a .
,
intr b rn feel di
-
a u . u .
,
u ,
s
d ad m
a a stick ; p nishment .
,
tresse d ; t d istress u . r. ,
V d nd g (d
a a d zd g t ) p
a d kkh en misery ; misfort ne
. : a z a
'
a z
’
un u a n., u .
ish . d g dh mil k u a n .
,
.
d db a
( d
an dh i 2 7 5 ) c r das d j :m sc m p rog e n .
, u . ur ana .
,
a ,
u .
d d bg fi ( w e k est d hi ) m misfort ne ’
a a c
p d ag a f - o .
,
n . r . ar aa .
,
u .
V d m (d am g ti I 3 ! ) control ; c s d l bh
a a h rd to fi d or re ch ; au . ur a a a .
, a n a
( d m d
a g ) ti t me ; com pa el d i fi l
a t . cu .
d ga f com p ssion p ity

a .
, V d s ( g )
d
a d s t i be d fi l d ,
. u a e e .
d idar ra
p oor a .
,
d sp y k t . b d ly rr nged u ra u a a .
,
a a a .
d c ar ana n
p hiloso p hic l system
.
, d s s t m p a . u an a .
,
n . r.
I . S ns k rit E nglish Gloss ry
a -
a .
d us inse p p refix .
,
ba d ; h rd a . d ha n u s a .
, b o w;
V d u h ( g , g
d d d bi d u al
le : 428 )
'
mil k dba r m a m .
,
right ; l
aw; v irt e u .
d u hi tr f ghter .
,
da u V1 dh a ( d d dla t i db tté 4 3 5 ) p t . z ,
a : u ,
da t m a m essenger en oy .
, p l ce ; p close
i co er,
v . a a , v ,
V r
d i c n s ( d a g t i ) iaute r kee p . S h t ; a pra t on '
; m i d a v a u u .
,
o p en . recei e ; m a ly p l ce v sa -
a or a
V fg ( )
d I27 ; c s ( p g ) on ;
d ti se e i ly down ; au . ar
'
a a v a
S ho w ; p ss ( d cg t ) seem p a c s dbap dg ti ) m ke
. r a
'
e , a rz i n au .
-
a ,
a
loo k .
p t clothe in (tw u o n, o
dr c f loo k gl
.
,
ce ; y ,
i rr nge or d in ;
au e e. v a a ,
a
d eva m god ; f i goddess ; .

,
m p t together nite ; l y
.
-
'
, sa u ,
u a on .
q een
u .
V 2dba (dhdg ti l2 6) s ck a : u .
d ev a ki f p .
,
n d h
. a t r m rcre . tor .
, a .
d eva k l u a tem p le n . d ba y,
gr i n . n a n .
, a .
d eva ta f d i inity d eity .

,
dla m i k v right j st ,
. z r a a .
, ,
u .
d g m
e a region l nd .
, t a (d bd ti ) , ; a . v va run a nu
da i va f i d i ine
,
.
-
, fter v . r un a .
d s m
o a f lt .
,
audb a . r nning ; co rse va n a n .
,
u u .
dg ti f brilli ncy dh i f , n d erst n d ing insight

‘
u .
,
a . . u a , .
d rav ay p pro ert y ;

n , o b ject
. d b i m t wise p r d ent . an a .
, ,
u .
d st m
ra r seer ; thor ( of V edic dhi .
, ste d f st firm br e au ra a .
,
a a , , av .
h y mns , V d i ? (dlm ti dh t 3 9 I) n no ,
unu e :
'
V d (dru ti ) r a va
'
sh ke r un . a .
V d ruh ( d i b g t i ) be hostile rz o f fend V d i r in a c s ( d h a y t i ) be r , z au . ra

'
a a .
d va
( 3 3 2 ) m two d b
nur t i f firmness .
, ; co r ge . .
,
u a .
d a l th m
v ts d oor k ee p er
a d/ w .
,
f w . nu .
, co .
d a f d oor g te
v r .
,
di a i g ,
ste d f stness
a . z r a n .
, a a .
a if m Ary n V hg a ( dhgag ti ) thin k p onder

d
'
v a .
, a . a , .
d ij a ti m
v Ary n .
, a .
d i ti g
v
( 3 3
a 5 ) second d not
a ;. w ,
ith p t cf 2 07 . na a v .
,
O .
, . .
d ip d (2 8 2 )
v a bi p e d k t a l n r m nsion
.
,
. na sa ra n .
,
u a a .
V d ivs ( d st i a i st )
é h te ;
ve
’
g ,
i f v city a na a ra n .
,
-
'
.
,
.
p ra h te extremely a d i f ri er . na .
, v .
d is m
v enemy .
, V d ( d . ti t ) bb i nan nan
’
a ,
- e a re
d i
v s a d twice v .
,
joice in g eet jo y f ll y .
,
r u
d ip i m p nther
v n .
,
V m a intr b w bend ; . i ta .
,
o ,
t honor re erence r .
, ,
v
dh ana mone y riches n .

,
m honor glor y , . na as n .
, , .
dl i
za n n we lthy a ., m m m m
a ( i d h .m ) .
, an v r an o o .
2 0 4: I . S ns k rit E nglish G loss ry
a - a .
nara ka m .
,
hell . ni ti f .
,
cond ct f li fe ; ethics u o , p o l
n a rma da f .
,
n .
p r .
,
a r v i er in I n di a . ities .
nal
a m .
,
n .
p r . n i ru j a .
,
he lth y well a , .
n a va a .
,
new . a ka
nil mba m . ,
n .
p .
r
n a va
( )
3 3 2 nine n um . .
V nr t d nce (m g )
‘
t a t i a .
n a va ti ( 3 3 2 ) m ninet y nu .
,
. nr tt d nce d ncing
a n .
,
a , a .
n a va da c ( 3a 3 2 ) m nineteen nu .
,
. urp m king a .
,
.
n a vi n a a .
, n e w. vrp ti m k ing
a .
, .
Va ag ( p erishna ;
'
cg ti ) a ne tr m le d er .
,
a .
p erish ; d is pp e r a a
y . t
n e ra n le ding rop e cord ; .
, a -
,
e c .
V nak ( d h g ti ) b in d ; n m a sa mi f shi p
n .
,
.
gir d eq i p oneself
,
ug fi ( )
2 7 2 lw . n a c a .
, o .
nag m a sn k e .
, g g/
a a m logic . n
’
a .
, .
nat k a dr m
a l
p y n .
,
a
g gg a right ro
p pa, er a . a a a .
, , .
n am an me ; ma m d by
n , . na a a v .
,
n me a .
p k s m wing S i d e ; p r ty a a .
, , a .
na i f r wom n w ife.
, p k s i m
a bir d , .
a a .
, .
adl i f p pi e. con
, d it p i / ,
m d b g u . a r ca n .
,
u ,
o .
ac d estr ction V p (p ti ) cook

’
v m a .
, u .
ac a ca .
m
’
d a do w n ; in into
v , .
p i ( 3 3 2 ) m fi , . a r ca n u .
, ve .
vi ty a const nt ; d il y ; m p i d g ( 3 3 2) m fifteen
a .
, a a -
a as
‘
a r ca a a nu .
, .
d
a vl w ys d ily
.
,
a p i a p ii a p (
,
33 4) afi f ty fi f h . a i ca a c a a .
,
-
t .
mi d g me a comm n d .
, p i a c t (3 3 2) m fifty
a . ar c
'
a nu .
, .
V mi d ( i d ti ) bl me
n n n Vp t (p a gdg ti ) s p li t O p en
a a . a a .
nip z u za shre w d Sk illed a .

, p i s k ille d , . a n a .
, .
nig t a a,
p rt of i y m or d ina V p t h .
( p tk t i ) recite re
ii d -
a , a a a
’
a
,
a .
ed fixe d p erm nent

, p r,
i m p l p cert in demons
a . a i . .
,
n . r .
,
a .
i d g
n r a
p itiless
a a .
p n, d i t m le rne d m ; p n d
. it a a .
, a an a .
i r ti f contentment h p p iness
n rv .
, Vp t (p at l) f ll fl y ; d ,
a . a a i a ,
u
i
n s a d t forth
v .
,
ou fly p , . u .
nic g m ca d ecision cert int y

a
p. t i , ( )
2 7 4 m lor d m ster ; h , a . a .
, ,
a us
V ( ag ti ; c s ag g ti ) le d
m n a b nd au . n
'
a a a 3
a .
g i de ;
u
p le d w y ; p t t lea f lettera a a a a ra n., a , .
a bring ; p introd ce p t i f w ife consort u a u ,

a n .
, , .
consecr te initi te ; a i p th i s me , p tb a n s a a as an an.
bring to d d etermine p tly an wholesome en , ,

a a a a .
, .
settle ; p i le d bo t ; p d ( 2 8 2 ) m foot ar a a u a .
, .
m rry a .
Vp d ( p adg t ) go ; i a in a a e v -
i
n ca lw a ,
o c s ( gap a d g ti ) k ill ;
. au . v a
'
a
20 G I . S nsk rit E nglish Gloss ry
a -
a .
p a u tr a m gr ndson .
,
soci blea . a .
p a ur a m citi en
.
, p g i z a d i . idem r av n a .
, .
p a (p y g )a t s w ell get sto

a t V p ei (p i n a t t d
,
u . r r i
’
,
ac .
,
e
p ra a d for
v w.
,
r d forth light ;
a m i d rejoice
, ; c s (p i . .
,
au . r
p ra k a c i n bright a gliste . ing

, ; z g t i ) m k e gl d p le se
,
n ia
'
a , a a ,
a .
ill min ting V p l (p l t ) a drench

'
ac t .
, u a . u a va e .
Vp ra c h (pr h ti ) k k
cc bo t a
'
as , as a u .
p jra a f cre
.
,
t re s b ject a p h l u fr it ,
re w rd u . a a n .
,
u ,
a .
p ra t i d a a d p p
v. re b c k b n ck p h l t fr itf l .
,
a , a , a a va n a .
, u u .
a g in ; to w rds ( p tp
a w a os os .
V b d / ( b d h ti b dh i té ) bin d ; an z a na , a n
p ra ti k l
’
it a n f or a ble .
,
entu ngle c
av tch ; join ; am . a ,
a co
p ra t g iia
( )
2 7 2
c b c k w rd west p ose a .
,
a a , .
w rd a . b dh m rel ti e an u .
, a v .
p ra tg ha m ad d il y a b l v . strength
,
might
a . a a n .
, ,
.
Vp th i ra c s ( p thdy ti ) b l t strong mighty

n au . ra a a a va n a .
, ,
.
s p re d ; p rocl im
a b lisgh a strongest . a
‘
a a .
,
.
p ra t h ma
( 3 3 5 )a first b h m cha . m
, ny . a u a .
,
u ,
a .
p ra b h a m
va might p o w er .
,
b a l y o ng ; m child
,
b y; . a a .
,
u as .
, ,
o
p ra b h t
’
it a m ch ; m n y a .
,
f a girl u a . .
-
,
.
p ra m tta a c reless a .
, b a p a m te r te rs . s a .
, a ,
a .
p ra
g g a m a p All h.a b,
a d b an h m . m r .
,
a . u .
,
ar .
p gra uk t p rt
a f p g j a b i d . m o d ro p ra -
u . n u .
,
.
p ra y ok t m r rr nger ser .
,
b d ad h p rt a f b d h w k ened ,; u . u a a . o u , a a
p ra al y m a d estr cti n.
,
enlightene d u o . .
p ra c h a m q estion .
,
b d ud h i f p r d ence intelligence
. u .
,
u ,
.
p r a sa n n a
p rt ,
f p d well a b d d b i m . to
p r d ent ra -
sa
,
u an a .
,
u .
d is p ose d V b d ( b i )
'
. h b dh t i t d h g t i t u o a ,
-
e i a ,
-
e ,
p ra h a m
ra stro k e S hot
.
; w ,
o n d w k e ; k no w ,
u a .
p ra h o
( )
27 2 forw r d e stw r d b dh m w ise m
a s ge ,
a a . u a .
,
an, a .
p ra z i a m often .
p
,
l bre th life b h m g life of holiness
.
, a , . ra a ca r a n .
, ,
p ra h i n m l i ing . cre
,
t re v
p re l igio s st d entshi p a u . es . u u .
p ra t ar a d e rl y i
v n the
. morning
,
b ah m a i ,
st d y ing s cred . ra ac r n a .
,
u a
p gra ac i t t c
p en ance ex p i tion
n .kno, w le d ge ; a m Br a hm n ,
a . as .
,
a
p ra g e za
z d commonly
a v . S t, d ent . u .
p l ce d e otion ; s cre d w ord

'
p ra s a d m a .
, b hm a a . ra an n .
, v a
p yri a d
a e . r,
a
( of . G d ) ; s cre d k no w ledge ; o a
p ri g a k m ar k in dan w aorl d .s p
, irit .
-
.
p gri av a s y ing p le s nt things b hm ( p rsonific tion of b a

c a .
, a a a , ra a n
’
a e a r
I . S nsk rit E nglish Gloss ry
a -
a .
hm a n ) m the s p reme All So l ; bha a f s p eech l ng ge

.
,
u - u
'
s .
, , a ua .
Br hm the C re tor
a a, bh a t S hining b rilli t
a . sva n a .
, , an .
b hm h
ra
( 2
a 8 3 ) man i killing V b h i k ( bh i k s t ) beg g t by beg
, a s a c , e
B r a hm n a . ging .
b a hm
r m ana
p riest Br a hm n b h i.k sa f
,
l ms ,
a . .
,
a .
Vb ( b
r tt
‘
i t i b a t é
ra v
) p S e k y ; b h i k ,
m begg r ; scetic
r ,
a , sa su .
, a a .
V bhi d (hhi tti bhi ddhé) S p lit

’
na ,
n .
+ i ex p l in v nno nce V b h i (ab i bh é ti ) fe, r ; in

a c s ( bh i u . a au .
sag / t b h a g ga ti ) terrif y a e, a .
bh kt d e ote d tr e V 2bh j (bh

'
kti bh kté)
‘
a a a .
,
v ,
u t . tt un a , u rz ea ,
bh kti f d e otion ; honor enjoy ; c s (bh j g ti ) fee d ; '

a .
, v . au . o a a
V bh k ( ab h k s
s g ti ) t a p a enjo
'
y a ea . u a .
bh ks a ana e ting n . bh j
,
a enjoy ing .
-
u a .
, .
bh g a t a va n honor ble b lessed bh j g m a .

, p V d i a
p erson , . u u .
,
n . r .
,
a e c .
Vbh j ( bh j ti t ) d i i d e ; w orl d
'
a a + i bh
a ,
-
e v v u va n a n , . .
d istri b te u .
V bha (bh a ti t ) become ; be va ,
-
c ,
V h kti ) bre k d estroy exist ; bh i o er p o w er ;

'
b iij ( bha a na a , . a v
bh d a goo d p le s nt ;
ra a .
, p i , des p ise ; a
p a as n , . ar ra
fort ne u . rise ; be mighty r le ; l a , u va er e .
bh g a fe r
a n .
,
67 2 f e rth gro n d
a . 21 .
, a ,
u .
bh t kh zd m
a ra a
p I
a tn d i bh a t a p r t f M n
.
;
,
nn s
. bst r .
, a. a a . o as . u .
,
bh tr m ar s p p orter ; p reser er ; being cre t re

.
,
u v , a u .
lord m ster ; h sb n d,
a bh izti f p ros p erity blessing u a . .
, , .
bh a vam p .n me , of i n bh
. b h j rm . king
, a a a. zt
‘
u .
, .
bh t f bh
a va n ,
ti ; in . bh bha bhr t m a va king ; mo nt in ‘
vo c . o s, .
,
u a .
f bh ti ; sed i res p ectf l bh m i f e rth gro n d l n d

. a va u n u it
‘
.
,
a ,
u ,
a .
d d ress inste d
a f p rono n f bh ag ( 3 40
a ) com p d j
o more ; u o as . a .
,
2 d p erson
n C f § 2 64 y
. d mostl y . .
-
as a v .
,
.
bh m as an shes n .
,
bh a n a orn ment . sa a n .
,
a .
V bh a ( b h a t i ) g l e m gl nce ; V b h r ( b h a t i t ) as p p ort ,( lit d a ra ,

-
e u . an
a i i d em or v .
bh ag m a
p rt p iece . S
,
h r e bh
a r g k h
,
n p B roch ,
a . u a cc a n. r .
, a , a
-bh aj S h ring a .
,
a holy p l ce in I n d i . a a.
bh a mnu .
, su n bh t k m . ser nt r a a .
,
va .
bh a mra b rd en .
,
bhr tg m
u ser n t . a .
, va .
bh a ya f w ife w o m n
r .
,
bhrc m d ,
gre tly m ch a . a a v .
, a ,
u .
V bh a ( I h a s s t ) pS e/ k ; + p t i b h ak em frog a ra e a .
, .
ns w er (
a f a ce. om bh g m enjo y ment sa o a .
,
.
con erse v . bh j me l o ana n .

,
a .
20 8 I . S ns k rit E nglish G loss ry
a -
a .
bh o s se e bh a va n t . m a sta ka n he d a .
Vbh r a m ( bh r a m a ti
g
'
: IBI) w a n d er m a ha n t gre t a .
, a .
abo t flit ; + p u ,
ari idem . m a h a n a sa n .
, k i tc h e n .
bh a tr m b rother
r .
, . m a h a r aj a m .
,
gre t k ing a .
bh f eyebro w m a hi sa m
‘
r tt .
, . .
,
n .
p r.
m a hi s i f
'
.
,
q een u .
m a ksi ka f .
,
fly gn t , a .
Vlm a ( m ati ; m i m i té : 4 3 8 ) m ea
m a g h a va n ( )
2 70 m .
, I ndr a . s re ;
u n is w ork cre a te ,
.
Vm ajj ( m aj j a ti
) sin k ; m 1d em ma a dv conj not ; se d in
. a nd .
,
u
ii m
ma z j ewel .
, .
p rohi b itions etc li k e L t ,
.
,
a . a c,
ma ti f mind .
, . gree k j n f I9S u
'
o . .
ma ti m t shre wd p r dent
an a .
, , u . m an sa flesh n .
,
.
ma t y m
s a fish .
,
. m at f rmother .
, .
ma thi s me m th a as an an . m a dh g ur sweetness a n .
,
.
ma d c lle d ste m a f h m ; cf o a a . m a n a va m .
, man ( h o m o
) .
3 5 2, 4 . m a n a sa sense ; n d erst n d ing

n .
,
u a .
Vm a d ( m adg )
a get dr nk ;
tz u ma nu a
s f i h m n
,
.
-
,
u a .
p ra be c reless a . ma g mr a ro d w y street .
,
a ,
a , .
m a dh u honey
n .
,
. m al a f g rl nd
.
, a a .
m a d hu p k mar s w eet drin k a .

, . ma sa m month .
, .
m a d hu l
ih m .
,
bee . mit ra frien d
n .
,
.
m a dhya a .
,
mi ddle ; as n .
, mi d dle ; m i t d h ( 2 49 )
ra ru frien d b a -
e
w a ist . tr ying
a .
Vm a n ( m an a tc ;
g m a n a te )
’
thin k mi na m fish .
,
.
S u p p ose ; sa m honor .
V l (m l ti ) wink ; + i clos
m i i a a e
mana s n .
, min d . the ey es .
m a n u sya m .
, m an ( h o m o
) . m kta f p e rl
u .
, a .
m a n o r a th a m .
, wish . m kti f s l
u .tion deli er nce
, a va , v a .
m a n o ha r a a .
,
a gree ble ; entr n a a o m kh
u a mo th f ce
n .
, u ,
a .
ing . m kh y
u a
p rinci p l first
a .
,
a , .
m a n tr a m .
, sa cred text ; Sp ell , V m uc
( m i ti free rele se
ur c a ;
'
: ,
a
ch rm a . m kt a witho t ( 3 I 2 )
u v , u .
m a n tr i n m inister ; co ncillor .
,
m u .
V m d ( m d t ) rejoice ;
u
’
om a e a t
Vm th ( m th ati ) stir
an a n . a llo w .
m anth ( )
27 8 m anstirring stic k .
,
-
. m m m
u
’
s ge ; scetic
.
,
a a .
m o nt in Vm s ( m sza ti ) ste l
'
m and m para .
,
n . r .
,
a u a . u b u z a ,
ro .
m a ra
n de th a n .
, a . m l m
u sa a cl b p estle . n .
, u , .
m t m
a ru w in d ; p l p the .
, ,
.
,
n. r .
, V m uh ( m a hg ti ) be conf sed or a u
Storm go d s -
. d ed or st p id
az u .
2 10 I . S ns rit E ngl i sh Gloss ry
a k -
a .
ra th a m .
,
w a gon . r ap a form be tyn .
, , au .
ra thya f .
,
street .
’
ri tp k gol d p iece
a a n .
,
-
.
( gr s m i ( 277) m ( r rely) f p ossessions

'
V ra bh p ; ra a bh a te) a . a .
, ,
t k e hol d
a begin on, . w e lth a .
V m ( m t ) m se oneself ;
ra ra
'
a e a u r ohi z
zi f .
,
n .
p r .
i ( i m ti ) ce se
'
v v ra a a
ra c m i m y ; rein .
,
ra . la ksa n . h n d re d tho s nd
, a u u a .
r a sa m t ste feeling .
,
a , . la ksm i ( )
2 7 6 f go dd ess f f .
,
o or
r a sa va n t t stef l a .
, a u . t neu .
d e m on I tt ch h ng cling
'
rak m
s a sa .
, .
Vla g ( a g a ti
) a a ,
a ,
.
V j ( j
a
r ti t ) direct
ra r le '
; a ,
- c , u la g h u , f .
-
g h u or
g h i light-
; v , a .
,
shine ; be il l strio s u u . sm ll littlea , .
aj k ing l
a i i ka f e lon C y
'
r anm .
,
. .
,
n
p. r .
, .
k ing d om ( p ti ) p r te ;
'
raj y a n .
,
.
Vla p l
a a a vi com
rat i f r night .
,
.
p l in a .
V a dh ( a d/m at ) s ccee d
r r
p e u a a Vla bh ( l
a bh a Zc)
'
recei e t k e ; v ,
a
d w rong c s ( I ti ) m k e rec i e
'
o au a m bh a a a e v
. .
g ,
ram m a
p hero .
,
n . r .
, a .
gi e v .
ra m ay z note d p oe m
a i a n .
,
a .
[a l
a ta forehe d n .
,
a .
ra va
a m a
p d emon .
,
n . r .
, a .
l a va n a s lt n .
,
a .
ra ci m he p .
,
a . la ii g l a a
p l o gh n .
, u .
V ( a di i 4 I0) cry scre m ;

ru r :
, a la bh m a cq isition g in .
,
a u , a .
i i d em
v .
V l i kh ( l
i k h d t i ) scr tch w rite a ,
.
V le se V lip ( limp li ) sme r

'
ruc
( d t ) p r
( d t ca c a a .
,
a a .
j f sic k ness d ise se V lih ( ldhi Ii dhé 42 7) lick ;

'
ra .
, , a . e :
V a ( dd i ti 4 2 9 ) w ee p
ra r : . i d em
a va .
p rt b esiege d V l mh ( l zzth g ti ) n i s
'
ra d ah a f dh,
a . o ru
, ,
u u a a ro b .
s rro n d e d ; s ff se d
u u u u . V lp (l mp d ti ) bre a k t o
a u
p ieces ;
V (
r u dh
) e st
rup a te ; p l n d er '
d dh i ,
r u n d dh é oh d va a u .
str ct chec k besiege ;

u ,p V l b h ( li bh y ti ) co et ( d t , a a a i a v a .
,
b esiege lh b . w riting co p y ing c ana n .

, ,
.
l
rudh i bloo d ra lk m
n w orl d ; sing
.
,
d . o a .
,
. an l
p ,
.
V h ( h t ) rise s p ring p
ru ro
p eo p le '
a i
, u ,
.
gro w ; c s ( h g ti p ag ti ) l hb m d esire au rice . ro

’
a a ,
ro a o a .
, ,
a va .
m k e rise
a gro w p l nt ; lm h ir or
,
a o an n .
,
a .
d escen d ;
a va a climb lh met l ; iron ,
o a n , . a .
mo nt scen d ; u
p gro w ,
a ra
pu .
g m r ce f mil y va n a a ,
a .
a ks
r h rsh ro gh
a a .
k, crook ed benta , u . va ra a ., ,
.
I . S nskrit E nglis h Gloss ry
a -
a .
va ksa s chest bre st

n .
, t g rment , a . va s r a n .
, a .
V va c
( k t i 4val
5 ) s p e '
k y ; V h :
( a h ti ) t c rr y be r ; a , sa ea v a r .
, a , a
n me ; c s ( a g ti) m k e ( intr p rocee d ; fl w ; blo w

a au . v ca
'
a a a .
,
o .
written le f ) S p e k i re d d encl a a
,
. e . a . c .
,
or.
zij m
va z merch nt .
, a f oice ; wor d a . v c .
,
v .
t
va sa m c lf .
,
aa g . bl me w orthy c l p v c a a .
,
a , u
V va d ( d t i ) p s vae k
'
y ; a b le a , sa a .
bhi in ( tr de '
a bh i a d g ti ) a z ijg ca nsa . a v a a v t a a .
greet ; i ( m i d ) d is p te at m w ind v . u ,
v a .
, .
a rg e u . a p t h m B r a hm n in v na ras a .
, a a
va dh m a k illing m rder .
,
the third st ge f his life , u . a o .
dh z f w om n ; w ife ap i f cistern
‘
va t .
,
a . v .
, .
va n a woo d s forest
n .
, ag m cro w, . v a sa .
,
.
va n a v a i s n forest d w elling a ag .
,
m w in d -
. v u .
,
.
V va n d ( a d t ) greet
v honor n a i a w e ter ,
. v r n .
,
a .
V p ( ap ti ) sc tter ; w
va v a i d p rt w y a t so . v a v .
,
a a ,
a a , ou .
va p as n b o d y ;. fig re
,
i h g ( 3 3 4 ) twentieth u . v a a .
, .
va g m
a
( 2 2 3 ) p ron w e i h p t i ( )
3 3 2 m t w enty
.
, . v a nu .
, .
va g as n
g .
, a i h c e. ti t m ( )
3 3 4 t w entieth v a a a a .
,
.
l va r a m
'
s itor bri degroom .
,
i k m a di tg
u , p king . v ra a a .
,
n . r .
,
a .
2
’
va r a m choice p w l g ; f or V ij ( ij ati ) trem b le ;
.
, , r d in r e e av . v c a
3 va r a best ; better ( w
a .
, ( d j g ) a ti terrif y . ca n s . u ve a
’
th n ) a . i tt p ossessions ; we lth v a n .
, a .
va r dh m a bo r .
, V ( i d ét ti a; é d .
— 4l 7) k now v v v a : ,
va r a i a
r m p g d .
,
consi
n d
. er ; c r s ( d
.
g
,
ti ) in f
a or m o . au . ve
'
a a
z m
va r za color ; c ste .
,
i c s i d em a . n au .
, .
V z g (
va r t a z g ti ) a describe V2 i d ( i d ti t ) find cq ire
v a r za
'
a v v n
'
a ,
-
e ,
a u .
p ortr y a . i d k no w ing -
v a .
,
.
va r ti n bi d ing being
a .
, a i dg a f k no w le d ge le rning ,
. v .
, , a .
s
va r a y e n r .
,
i d a a h . k no w ing wise v v s a .
, , .
va ll bh a de r
a a .
,
i d i st p ss
a p rt. f i d is v v a a . a . o v -
v ,
V c( va d g)
i w
v ish s d eteste d . .
V va s ( t i )
va sa d w ell ;
'
m i i dh i m r le f te ; Br hm ’
n v .
,
u ,
a a a .
h b it d w ell ; + p go w y i dh y
a ,
obe d ient ra a a v e a a .
,
.
on jo rney ;
a p ti u i i y m obe d ience ra n v na a .
, .
h bita . i a p re p w itho t ( w ith instr v v .

, u .
va sa ti f d w elling .
,
ofte n p t p ) . o r a cc .
,
os os .
va s u w e lth money
n .
,
ip a k m
a ri p ening ; recom p ens
, . v a .
, e .
va su d m e va p i p
.
,
m n Br . a hm n r. v ra .
,
a .
‘
14
21 9 I . S nsk rit E nglish G loss ry
a -
a .
vi bh u , f bh a .
p er - d ing f e s ( s ) r in gi e r in ;
e ,
t
a i . va ,
ar va r
’
a a ,
v a
re ching ; omni p resent mighty fi g sho w er d o w n ; o er w helm

a ,
. .
,
v .
i ah m
v v a we dd ing m rri ge .
,
d m S cience k nowle d ge ; , p a a . ve a .
, ,
es .
i ki
v ve n shrew d a .
,
s cre d k no w le dge holy writ . a , .
V i c ( i c t ) enter ; d a f p in
'
v v a m a z sa -
vc a n .
,
a .
app ro ch ; a p se t d a t m syste m f
u
p hilo a a one ve n a .
,
a o
self ; p enter p enetr te S o p hy ra , a . .
vi c m p l p eo p le ; the V a i cy
. .
,
di f lt r a ve .
, a a .
c stea . ai p rticle to be s re in v a sse v . a , u ,
vi gi st p a rt f i ci aexcellent sooth
. o ; often ntr
v nsl te-
d s, u a a .
’
rem r k ble a a a i gg m . m f the thir d c ste v a .

,
an o a .
vi c t p rt
ru a f i c af mo s g j
. ii o S pvice ru, a u . v a a na n .
,
.
vic va ll ( Ve d ic )
vga .th ,
in a c s ( g th a g ) ti tor . v a au . v a a
vic a v m sa tr st confi d ence .

,
ment u ,
. .
vis a
pnoison
.
, V g d h ( i
. d h g ) ti hit p ierce v a v a ,
.
vi szm m p .
g,
d n .
g l i k r . f lse
,
w arong o . v a a a .
,
a ,
.
vih g m a a bir d .
, g h a m .tri l l w s it ; tr de v a va ra .
, a , a - u a .
vi h i t p rt
a f i dh a or d ine d
a .
ga k o z v gr m m r
-
, a . v a r a za n , . a a .
V l vr
( m at i u r n té ) co er g a g
,
h v m t iger u v , su r v ra .
,
.
ro n d ; u a co er ; + p g h m
a d h nter v a a -
a v a .
,
u .
O p en ; i ex p l in ; m nifest ; g a dh v i m d ise se illness a a v .

,
a ,
.
m Sh t sa y a d h i t u S ic k
. ill v a a .
, , .
V 2 r ( m i té
v v g t i t ) choose g a m
va r a p
'
a ,
-
e ,
v sa .
,
n . r .
S elect .
V j ( aj ti t ) p rocee d ; vr a vr a ,
-
e
vr k m wolf
a .
,
w n d er forth ; become
. a an as
vrks m a tree .
,
cetic .
V r t ( a t t ) t rn ; exist s bsist
v c r a e m u wo nd , u ,
vr a n a .
,
u .
b b e, m eco + i t home e t w oblig tion ; d ty n r e ur n vr a a n , . vo , a u .
+p get going b re k t
ra a -
,
a ou
arise ; contin e ; c s ( t ) Vg ( h c
u t i ) p r ise ; p rocl
au im ; . ac . co n a s a u sa a a
tin ( tr n )
us a s p .
p rocl im ra a .
vr tt a con d ct
n .
, V g l (c k dti ) b ble ; so m etimes
u . a e a n e a
vr t ta t m
n a st te f ff irs ; p ss cf 3 2 2 .
,
a o a a a .
,
. .
ne w s . c k m Scy thi n a a .
,
a .
t
vr r a m p . demon,
n .
c k t mr .
, a . a a a .
, ca r.
vr ddh p rt a f r dh a ld c .k to la f pv
,
o . a un a .
,
n . r .
V vr d h ( d h t ) gro w
va r; c ’
s c i / a f hesit
a tion
e au . a t c .
, a .
( d
va r h g t i t )
a m '
k e grow
a
; g t ,( 3 3 2 3 3 3
-
) e h ndred a a a -
n .
, a u .
bring p u .
g t t m h ndre d th a a a a a , . u .
214 I . S nskrit E nglish G loss ry
a -
a .
so da ca (3 3 2) num , . sixteen . sa m ag a m a m meeting enco nter .

, , u .
sa m aj m con ention com p n y

a .
, v ,
a .
sa i ii gu l
cta
p a rt . o f sa m gu j , -
p ro sa m i dh f f got .
,
a .
vi de d with . sa m ip ne r ;
a a icinity
.
,
a as n , . v ,
sa m va tsa r a m
y e r .
, a . ne rnes s p resence
a ,
.
s a i ii ca
ga m .
,d o bt u . sa m d u m oce n
ra .
, a .
sa kr t a dv .
,
once . sa m ti f
unn a height ele tion ; .
, ,
va
sa kth a n ( sa kth i : 27 5 ) n , . thigh . high p osition .
sa kh i frien d
( )
2 7 4 m .
,
. sa m t e a
p ro i d e d
a w ith. , v .
sakh i f fem le com p nion friend

.
,
a a ,
sa mp i l z p rt
r i a f l p r m a . o sa ,
jj
sa re
a d y a .
,
a . f ll
u .
V j ( j
fisa a ti j j i l cf
s i n V a sa a e: . oc . sa mg k d a w ell p ro p erl y
a v .
, ,
.
22) h ng be f stene d
a on ,
a on sa m aj m
r gre t k ing ; em p eror .
,
a .
sa r i t f ri er .
,
v .
sa tka r a hos p it li ty m .
,
a . sa r g m a cre tion .
, a .
satt ra s cri fi ce
n .
,
a . sa r p m a sn k e .
,
a .
saty a tr th righteo sness

n .
,
u ,
ll u . sa r v a a .
, a .
V ( d
sa d t i )si i t ; settle d o w
a n ; be t s e er y w here sa r va r a a .
,
v .
o ercome exh sted ;

v a i tr m
or p the S god S au sa v .
,
n . r .
,
un -
e
a
pp ro ch ; a + m a se t i t ; sa -
a o ne v ar su n .
self ; c s a dag ti ) meet V h ( h t ) en d re

’
au .
-
s a , en sa sa a e u .
c o nter ;u i i t do w n ; h d together ; p re p of en it s sa a a v .
,
.
, t
p b
ra f or b le e p tpav with long waith . os os .
,
a ,
sada d a l w ys v .
, a a .
sadr c f i
a ,
S imil r ; w orth y
.
-
h ,
ma co m p nion ; i f
.
, a . sa a ca r a .
, a -
.
,
sa n td ig dh
'
d o b tf l ; nste dy
a a w ife .
,
u u u a . .
i dhg a f t w ilight
sa i z .
,
h a d s d denl y q ick ly . sa as a v .
,
u ,
u .
sa nt p , t f l ar b eing existing ;. h
o tho s nd
a s, ,
sa a sr a n .
,
a .
,
u a .
goo d ; m good m ; f h a y m com p nion hel p er

as .
, an as . sa a .
,
a ,
.
ti goo d w om n es p eci ll y
sa , a ksi m w itness a , a a s n .
, .
w i d o w w h immol tes herself a dh . o me ns de ice a . s a na n .

,
a , v .
ca
p t (
a 3 3 2 ) m se en a d h m nu hol y m s int .
,
v . s u .
, an, a .
sa
p t tia
( 3 3 2 ) m se ent y a m V
nu e d ic melo d y song ; .
, v . s an n .
, ,
sa
p t d a g ( 3 a3 2 ) m se
a enteen p l the S a m e d nu .
, v . .
,
av a .
sahh a f co ncil meeting co rt

.
, am u t m ss l , ,
u . s an a .
, va a .
sam d a long with ; com p letel y a mp tam d t p resent

v .
, a . s ra a v. , a .
sam k m a sa d before in the ag m d t e ening

a v .
, , s a a v .
,
a v .
p resence of ( gen ) a m cr ne . s r a sa .
, a .
sam th
ar c p ble ble
a a i hh m
.
,
lion a a ,
a . s a .
, .
I . S ns k rit E nglish G loss ry
a -
a .
V si c (si ii c ti ) dri p dr o p , moisten ; ferment

'
a
,
so zn a m .
, th e i n t o x i c a t i n g
+ bhi anoint a as k ing . d j ice f the Som p l nt

e u o e -
a .
V i dh ( dh ti ) re p el ; S ho l d er
'
l s se +p ti a ra k dh m
s an a .
,
u .
hold b ck ; forbi d a . V i ( ta i ti 4 II) p r ise

s u s t : a .
V 2 i dh ( i dhg ti ) s cceed ; in
s s a u ca ns t ti f
s u song f p r ise ; p r ise
.
,
o a a .
( s a dh g ti ) a
p erform
'
; cqa ire V i r ( tr p d ti tra t ; a tr p a ti u . s s ,

s a e
'
s ,
i dh m
s n u p the I.n d,
s n t r a
. i té ) rsc . tter
, stre w ; p u . s a ,
a a
sim an f bor d er bo n d ry ;
.
,
t sc tter b estrew ,
u a ou a ,
.
s k irts . t m thief s en a .
, .
eu a d w ell ; e s y ; er y
v. , t t song of p r ise
a v . s o ra n .
,
a .
V ( dti m t ) p ress w om n '
eu su n t i ( 2 7 6) f
,
su t e . e r .
,
a .
su kh a n fort ne l c k h p p iness V tha ( ti sth ti ) st n d intr ; be in

.
,
u ,
u ,
a s a a , .
su n d a raf i ,
be tif l .
-
,
a etc be S it te d ; c s
.
, au u . or on , .
,
ua au .
su m anas a f or bly min d ed ; .

, ( thava p y ) p ti a t p l ce ;
-
pp oin t ; as s a
'
a u ,
a a
f flo w er
.
, . sto p ; dh i mo nt st n d a u ,
a
sa r ap m a dr nk rd .
,
o er ; r le go ern ;
u a . v u ,
v a nu
su va r za z gold n .
, follo w t ccom p lish ; ( cf lso
. ou ,
a . a
su h d m r friend .
, p 9 6 l st. note ) ; d rise .
,
a u a ,
V ( 871 i t )
s t egener te bring
'
forth ; rise ( cf V a , p p . oc . a a a
+p gener te ra
p ro ch re ach ; .
p m i d a a ra .
,
sa kt a V e d ic h y mn
n .
, st rt ff ; in c s .sen d ; a o au .
i t m
st a dri er ch rioteer
.
, v+ m in ,
fi c se t rem in
a . sa ca us ,
au o a
si ld am coo k .
, th a .
p l ce loc lit y ; ste d s na n .
, a ,
a a .
i g
st r ma .
, su n . i ki t p rt f th a ; cf 2 9 0 e nd s a a . o s .
,
.
V ( sr ti )
'
sa r a fl w ; + follow i k i t i f
o con d ition a nu s .
,
.
u p ; + p go w y ; i n c s a V a (
a a ti ) b the a a au . sn sa a .
-
a d g ti ) d ri e
s r w y a at k m v one w h h p erform
a a . sn a a .
,
o as
V rj ( rj )
s t i s let go crea te
'
; d the bl tions c stom

, ry t
a e a u u a a
+ a let loose or
n t ; r ise ( the the d f religio s p p il ge ou a en o u u a .
voice) . a b thing b th sn na n .
, a , a .
V rp (
s p t
sa r
) m o '
e p idem
a z a g m ten d on v bowstring ra . sn u.
.
, ,
.
cr et i f cre tion
, a i g d h p rt
. f i h ff ection te sn a a . o sn ,
a a .
se ut m bri d ge d ike
. , V i h ( i bg t ) feel inclined to
, . sn sh a i ,
se mi f rm y
.
, a lo e ( gen . v .
,
V sev ( é t ) ser
s va e e honor ; s a f d ghter
v ,
i n l w sn u .
,
au a .
v i d w ell ; d e ote oneself t ; t/w e ( p r cd ti ) to ch v o S u
attend .
V p r h ( p r hag t ) d s s a z e s xr e
s ai ik n m a soldier .
,
m encl slightl y .
; o ften 8 a .
,
a ss e v .
s ai y n a rmy n .
, a cco m p nies .
p resent tense a a a ,
a -
a .
gi ing it the force f h i t

v o an s or ha r i n a m g elle .
,
az .
ic l tense
a . h l m
a a
p lo
. gh n .
, u .
V m ( m a ti ) remember ; thin k
s r s ra h i
av s n obl tion .
,
a .
on ; c ll to min d ; te ch ; a p in a eS . h t m
as a h nd .
,
a .
p ssa m g
. t it iss t ght i e ar a e
‘
au , . . h ti m
as n elep h nt .
, a .
tr d ition l
a a
’
. V lba ( j ha ti ) b ndon gi e p ;
a
'
a a ,
v u
sm r ti f tr d ition ; l w book
.
,
a a -
. neg lect .
sr aj f g rl nd .
,
a a .
V 2 b a (j i h i t 4 3 8 ) mo e e: v .
sr a str m cre tor .

,
a .
V h i (hi dti ) sen d ; + p idem
n ra .
sva a w ; one s
.
,
ow n
’
o n. hi a s se v
p rticle . s rely ; c as l , u a u a ,
V sv ai ij ( f a t ) embr ce ; sc a
'
e a for bec se ,
au .
p i
ar ( C f V 2 1) i d em . oc . .
Vhi h (hi a ti ) inj re d estroy
s n s u ,
.
sva dr c simi l r a .
,
a . hi t a p rt f a ld h a ; . dj do
'
as a .
,
a
4 2 9 ) slee p d nt ge
’
V p ( p
sc a i ti sv a : . va n a t g ; eo us as n .
, a va a .
s vap m
na slee p d re m .
, , a . hi m t
a va n snowy ; m a the .
, a s .
,
sva g m a
p ron w self self .
, o n , . H im a l y Mts a a .
sv a g m b
ah i z self existent ; m a .
,
-
as .
,
hi na
p rt ofa l h a b ndoned
.
; ,
a a
e p ithet f Br hm o a a . w nting in ; w instr w itho t

a . .
,
u .
sva r g m a he en .
,
av .
t (j k a ti j a h té ) s cri fi ce ,
u u a .
sva s r f sister .
,
. h t bh j ( nom bh k) m
u a u fire .
-
u .
,
.
sv ad u a ,s w eet . .
V hi t se e hv a .
p ri te recit tion t ke w y ; ste l ; '

a dhga g m h ( h )
‘
sv a .
, va a y r a r a ti a a a a
f s cre d texts
o a p l n d er ; p i d e m ; . u a a
sv a mi m n p ossessor lord a .
,
t d m id fetch bring ; , . ac . an .
, ,
ai m d t pl a a cite m ention ;
‘
sv ra a v .
, a e a su r . n -
,
p ty a bring b c k ; d ra -
a u
h t p rt
a a f h a s e resc e
. o en . av ,
u .
V h ( h
an ti 4 9
l ) kill ; c s (an
gh
'
a hr d : he rt au . n .
,
a .
tag ti ) a h e k ille d ; , p h d g he av rt a a r a a n .
,
a .
remo e ; bh i smite ;
v V hr s (h a s ti h fsg t ) rejoice be a r a ,
a z ,
m a wo n d ;
sa i k ill ;
-
d elighted ; p ide
u m it ra .
+ p ti hin d er ; inj re o ff en d ; h interj

ra O ho u , e .
, ,
.
m write sa h m t m winter . e an a .
,
.
-
h (
an 2 8 3 ) killing h m d a ., ne r by . r a sva a v .
, a .
h V h i (j i h ti ) be sh med
'
anuf j w .
, a . r re a a .
h m
a nu t m an
p m nke y h i f mo d est y b. shf
, lness
n . r .
, a o r .
, , a u .
k ing ( c ll in ’
V h h i ) ( h a
'
. a g t ; v va a a ca n s . v
h tr m killer sl y er h e c lle c ll ’
an .
, g g ti ) d ; + a , a . a a av a a ,
h i m
ar
p g d .
,
n S m mon . r , . a o . u .
2 18 II . E nglish S ns k rit Gloss r y-
a a .
b ttle
a : rana m . n .
; yu d d h a n . born to be j , : an ; j an +ad .
be, to : bba ; vr t ; ( be sit te d ) ua b oth bh d : a a a .
sth a . b w to
o m ,
: na .
be r to
a
,
: bhf ; ( b ring forth ) si t ; boy : a m ; ka m a r a m
ba l . .
sit +p ra .
r hm n
B a a : br a hm a na m ; d e ij . a m ; .
be r rks m
a : a . d vij a ti m ; . vip r a m .
be t to t d
a ,
: a . br nch pa kha f
a : .
be tif l
au d ; ap u : su n ara r a v a n t. b r e dhi
av : ra
be ty ap a n
au : r . b re st a ; ks n : a ras n . va as .
beco m e to hi t ; r t ,
: n v . bri d egro o m m : va r a
'
bee li m ; m dh lih m
: a . a u . bring to i + a hr + a, : n ,
~
.
be g , to : bhi ks . b ro d p r th
a : a a ra .
begin to bh + a ,
: ra . brother bh a tr m : r .
behind p p a t ( w : a c . b rn to d h
u ,
: a .
behol d to i ka ,
: . b siness k y n
u : r a .
Ben res ka pi f
a : . b u t : ta ; Ici n t ta ; p a n a r
’
ben d to m ,
: na .
benefit t ; 1kr + p ,
o u a . c ll t b d ; ( n me) ; d
a ,
o : a a va c va .
beseech to p d + p ,
: a ra . c p ble m th
a a : sa ar a .
besiege to dh ; dh + p , : ru ru u a . c ste j a ti f
a : .
best p sth ; j y sth

: re a e a . c ttle g m p l
a : o . .
bet k e oneself t ya ; p i + a
a , o : r . ce se t p m ; m + i
a ,
o : a ra v .
better p g ; j gag : re as as . celebr te d i p t p i m ta : v ra a r an .
bin d to b dh ,
: an . ch in h a m
a : ra .
bi p ed d ip d : v a . ch rioteer ; a t m
a s a .
bird i h g m ; p ksi m
: v a a . a n . ch rm ka ti f
a : n . .
b irth j a ti f ; j m n : . an an . check to d m c s ; dh ,
: a ,
au . ra .
bl ck kraz
a : za . chest he ; : va n as n . a ra s .
bl me to i d ; lkr + ti
a ,
: n n r a s. chil d ba l m ; pi p m
: a . a .
blessed bh g t ; ( p refix) : a a va n as choose to 2 r ,

: v .
pr i . cistern ap i f : v .
bloo d : r u d hi r a n . citi en p a m
z : ur a .
blow , to va h . city g i f ; p
: na f a ra . ur .
bo t a : n au f . cle erness b d dhi f

v : u .
bo dy : pa r i r a n .
; va p a s n .
; ka ya climb t h a ,
o : ra .
su n , jy o ti s n . close to l r m ; ldh a
, p i : v sa a .
bone i k n : as an . clo d m gh m
u : e a .
b ook ( m n scri p t) : a u
p u s ta ka n .
; co chm n m m m
a a :
( w or k ) g th m ra n a . come to g m + a ; ga + a ; i +
,
: a
II . E nglish S nskrit Gloss ry
-
a a . 219
a bhi or a; come o ut : g a m nie da u ghter : ka n ga f ; p a tr i f ; d a . .
g a n i s. h i tr f .
comm n d to di p+a j ii d +a c s d y d i
a , m ; di : ; h ; , au . a : va sa . na n . a an n .
com m n d j ri a f ; i d p m
a d by d di
: a di ; p tg h m ; . n e a . . . : ne ne ra a a
com mit to a ; lhr ,

d y d night h a t n
: car . a a an a : a or ra .
com p nion hay m ; h a de d m t ; ip : sa a . sa a ca a : r a v a nn a .
ra m . d eci d e to ( settle) i i , : n n s .
com p n y m aj m a d ee d k m : sa n a . : ar an .
com p ose to m d eity d,

ta f : e . : eva .
con d ct tt n u d elic te t
: vr a . a : arana .
confine t dh i , delight to o : ra t s c s n .
, a , au .
conq er to j i u d eli er nce m kti f

,
: . v a : a .
consecr te to i p d emon
a a ks
, m : a a a . : r a sa .
consi d er to i t ; l i d dep rt to i p
,
: c n v . a ,
: a a .
consort p t i f d escribe to
: a n p y .
, : c ar a a .
coo k to p ,
d esire to l bh
: a c. ,
: a .
cop y ing lhb n destroy t M y

: c ana .
,
o : an .
cor d s cre d p i t
,
a d es p ise to m : a ; bha p i av a 0 .
, : an a va ar .
co nt to g a g
u ,
d etermine t: i a i a i i a . ,
o : c n s or v -
n s.
co r geo s t j i
u a d e ote d bh kt ;
u : i g dh
e a sv n . v : a a sn a .
co rse g ti f
u : de oti o bh kti f
a
'
. v n : a .
co er to 1 ( m i d ) l r
v ,
m die ks m
: v_r . v sa : a a .
di to m g ; i + p ; p d + i e, :
‘
ra a v .
co w dh : f ; g f d iffic lt d l bh
en a .d sk o . u : ar a a a ara .
cowher d g p m d ig t : kh o a .
,
o : an .
cre te to rj
a ,
d iligence dg g m
: s . : a o a .
cre tor dha tr m ; sgr m

a d iligently bhr p m
: . sr a . : a .
cre t re p a zi m ; j g t n
a u d is p p e r to
: r
p+ i z n . a a . a a , : na v .
crescent k la f d ise se: j f a ; g a d h i m . a : ra . v .
cross t tr ,
d ismo nt t
o : h. u ,
o : ra a va .
crow y m d iso w n t h kya i

'
: va a sa
p t a .
,
o : ra -
.
c r d s d dh n
u : d is p te t
a d an i . u ,
o : va v .
cu t t,
kr t ; h i d
o : d istress t d c .
,
o : a .
cu t ff to kr t
o ; h
, i d d istrib te t: b h j i a va c a va u ,
o : a v .
d i ine d i g v : v a .
d to lhr ; + m a o, : ca r sa ~
.
d il y
a i tg ; ( d ) i ty m ; p
: n do m estic g hg a a v . h a ra : r a .
tg h m a a d g p . m ; p i f o : va n . an .
d ncing
a r tt n door I a f
: n a . : ( v r .
220 II . E nglish S ns rit Gloss ry
-
a k -
a .
doork ee p er d a h th m : v s a . e en
v p i a .
do e k p t m
v : a o a . e ery
v : sa r va .
dr w to h
a ,
: va . e il ( dj ) p ap ; ( s bst ) p ap n
v a . a u . a .
d rin k t lp a ,
o : . exceedingl y ti : a .
dri er a t mv : s a . ex p l in t b a i ; l r i
a ,
o : r v v v ,
drop to i ,
: s c. ca ks vi - a .
dro p bi d m : n a . extermin te a ,
to : c hi d a d .
d w ell to 3 ; ,
i ; d w ell : va s va s a e y e : n e tr a n . ; c a ksa s n .
; a ksa n n .
;
on sa fi j . l
oca n a n .
ea r : ka r a a m . f a ce m kh n : a a .
e rth p rthi i f
a : v .
; bha f ; bha m i f f . . a got m i dh f : sa .
e st e stern p
a , a : r a ii ; the Ecp a i f . : r c a ir d : sa n ara .
f .
, se . di p . f a ll to p t ; p t + i ; f ll to
,
: a a n a
e a t, t o ; d ; 2a p ; bh a ks; bh aj
a . one s lot r ; f llen ( k ille d )
’
: a :
ea ting n : bh a ksa z
za .
p a ti ta ; m yta .
ecli p se to H r ti ,
: e r a s. f m e ; ki ti f ; y p n
a r . a as .
eight st : a a . f mil y as m
a : va a .
eighth st m : e a a . f m o s ip t
a u : v ra a .
e ighty pi ti f : a . f st ( firm ) dr ab
a : a .
eightieth pi ti t m : a a a . f sten t b dh
a ,
o : an .
el dest j g sth : e a . f a t : p i n a ; p a sta .
elep h nt g j m ; h a : a a . a sti n m . f ther

a : j a n a ka m ; p i tr m . .
e le enth ka d p
v : e a a . f lt to
au ,
fi n d : llcr + ti r a s .
e m erge to tr d ,
: a . f ltless
au dg : a n a va a .
eminent to be c bh ,
: u . fe r bh g n
a : a a .
em p eror m aj m : sa r . fiel d ks t : e ra n .
e ncom p ss to l r ; a ,
: v c hi d a va . fifth p fi m : a ca a .
e n d : a n ta m . fight t y dh ,
o : a .
en d re to h u ,
: sa . filled p a a ; mp a z : r a sa r za .
enem y i m ; p t : ar . a ra m ; d vi s m
. . fin ll y ta : a n e.
enjoy t bh j ,
o : a . fi d to 2 i d
n ,
: v .
enjoy ment bh g m : o a . finish to ap m , : sa .
enter t i c p ,
o : v ra . fire g i m ; h t bh j m
: a n . a a a .
entr ncing m h a : ano ar a . firewoo d m i dh f : sa .
en oy da t m
v : a . first p th m ; t first
: ra a a a : p ra
entr st to I da p
u ,
: ra . th a m a m .
eq i p to h
u m , : na sa . fish m t g m : a s a . mi na m .
eu logy t t n : s o ra . fit to y j
, : a .
2 22 II . E nglish S nsk rit G loss ry - a a .
h p py to be m d
a ,
: a . inj stice dhu : a a r ma m .
h r d t find d l bh
a o : ar a a . intelligence b : u d dh i f .
h rm t 1 hr + p
a ,
o : a a . iron l h n : o a .
h te to d i s ; d i s p
a ,
: v a ra .
he r to p
a ,
: ra .
j aw : ha n a f .
he rt hrd g ; br d n
a : a a n . . je w el : m a ai m ; . r a tn a n .
; bha
he en av g m : sva r a .
sa g a n .
he y g av : a ra .
hell k m
: nara a . k ill to m r c s
,
: ,
au .
; h a n ; h a n, ca us .
here t ; i h : a ra a . k in d le to i ah ,
: .
hero pa m ; i m : ra . v ra . king rp m ; : a a . n rp a ti m ; .
p a ~
hesit tion p ka f
a : a ra
-
. r th i v a m ; . ra an j m ; . bh a bha j
high h it : a cc r a . m ; bh a bhg
. rt m .
high w ter p a m a : ra . k ing d om aj y : r a u .
hol d sh t t ldh a p i u ,
o : a . k no w to l i d ; j ii a ,
: v .
hol y i dh : sc a . k no w le d ge i dya f : v .
j n an a n .
holy w rit p ti f : ra .
home g h m r a . l a ment t lp ,
o : a vi .
honey m dh n : a a . l a nd d p m : e a .
honor to p aj ; m ; ,
: 71 a sev . l a ng ge bha sa f
ua : .
h p 0 a pa f
e : . l a st t t
,
a : an e .
horse p m : a va . la w : dha r m a m ; . vi d hi m .
ho se grh
u m ster f the h
: a n . : a o la w boo k m rti-
: s f ; . dh a r m a pa
gr h th m as a . t n
s ra .
ho sehol d er grh th m
u : as a . l w s it
a g h a
-
u : v a va ra tn .
ho se p riest p hi t m
u -
: arc a . le d to i
a ,
: n .
h o w ?: k a th a m . le d er tr
a : ne .
h m n ma s
u a : na a . le rn to g m
a ,
: a a va ; lvi d ; i
h nter ga dh m
u : v
'
a . a d hi .
h rl to 2 ; ksip
u , : as . le rne d i d a n ; p ndi t
a : v v s a a ka pa l
a .
h sb n d p ti m ;
u a : a . bh a r tg m ‘
. le rning i dg a f
a : v .
hymn it/t n : s e a . le ther a m n : ca r an .
le ings av h i st n : a cc a .
I : a ha m . lesson dhgag m : a a .
imp rt t I i d i c s
a , o : v a , au . lic k to lih ; lih
, : a va .
incline d to be i h , : sa : li fe j i i t ; a g
: ; v a n . as n . c a r i ta n.
incre se t r dh a , o : v . light j y ti n : o s .
I n di bh t kh zd m
a : ara a a z a . light ( not he y) l gh av : a a.
initi te to i p
a ,
: it a a . li k e i : va .
II . E nglish S nskrit Gloss ry
-
a a . 223 .
limb :
g n
a ii misfort ne d hkh ; ap d f
a . u : a a n . a .
lion : s i hh m mo d esty k i f
a . : r .
lip : o sth m amoisten t i .

,
o : s c .
listen t p ,
o : mon rch ; m aj m ra . a sa r .
li e to j i ; r t ;
v , p : money v d h ; v n an ra . : ana n . va sa .
long d g h ; ( d ) i m
: i r month m a ma a v . c ra . : sa .
loo k t to i hs p a , moon : d m m ; d m ; ra . : ca n ra as . ca n ra .
lor d i p : m p ti m va r a i d m . a . n a .
lot s p d m m n
u : a mostly bhag a . . : as .
lo e to i h
v , m orning i n the p a t
: sn .
, : r ar.
lo e god of l ka m m
v , mother m a t f ; m ba f . : a . : r . a .
l n r m nsion ks t n
u a amother i l w p p f : na a ra .
- n -
a : va ra .
mo nt in gi i m ; p t m u a : r . a r va a .
m iden k g a f ; bo l a f m o th m kh n
'
a : an . . u : a a
tn aid t da i f
se r va n m ch p bh a t ; b h
: s . u : ra a a a .
m k e to i hr
a , mo thf l g a m
: . u u : r sa .
m an
( )i m v r
; p m a i m ; m r d er
: nara to m r c s ; h ; h . u /s . u ,
: , au . an an,
p aras m ; ( h m
) j a m ; c s . o o : ana . au .
ma m ; m
n a va sg m ; m m t f: h
.
; cf § 3 2 0 d E
a na J a . nara . us a r . an x e r-
m n k in d j
a m pl cise 3 0
: ana . . .
m ny b h ; p
a bh a t
: a a ra a.
m rch to
a l+ p ,
n me a m n ; by
: ca am ra . a : n an .
'
n . : n a .
m rri ge i a h m
a a n me to
: v v ; d ; ( reck on )
a . a ,
: va c va
m rry to
a i p i
, g n y: a ar . a a a .
m ster bh tr m ; p ti m
a : neck k nth m
ar . a .
: a a .
m t k t m
a : a a neglect t lha .
,
o : .
m e ns a a dh n : s net j a l n a na . : a .
m e d icine a s dh ne er
: aI da a pi id a I] . v : na ca a , c ,
or
m eet to , g m m a sa ca n a .
m eeting m ag m m : sa n e w s r tt a t m ‘
a a . : v n a .
m elted b tter g hr t n night a t i f

u : a . : r r .
m ention t hr + d a ,
one
o : k + pi id a -
. no : na a o , c , o r ca n a .
m erch nt nii m a north northern d ii ; the N

: va .
,
: a a c . :
m erit p ng n : a di i f a di p . a c .
, 80 . .
mighty b li ; b l t ; i bh : t a ; ma n a a va n v u. no : no .
mil k t d h ,
o : nothing u I im .
p i i d : na e a ,
c , or
mil k ksi : ; p g n ra n . a as . ca n a .
m in d m : ; m ti f now dh a a mp t m
a nas n . a . : a un s ra a .
m inister m t i m : an r n .
2 24 II . E nglish S nskrit G loss ry -
a a .
0 : he .
p ilgrim ge ti th g a t a f a : r a
’
r .
obe d ient i dh g : v
p io s a dh e a. u : s u .
obl tion : h i n
a p l ce t
av s l d h a ; d h a + . m a a ,
o : sa -
.
occ r t d p p ss 2 i d p ss p l ce p d ; d p m
u ,
o : i ,
a . v ,
a . a : a a n . e a .
oce n d dhi m ; m d m
a : a
p l
a n b h i p a g m . sa u ra . a : a r a .
o ff en d t h + p ti ; lha ,
o : p l nt t an h c s ra . a , o : ra ,
au .
o ff ering ( s crifici l) h i n l
p y a to d a : av s . a ,
: i v.
o ld r d d h ; O l d er j g ag
: v p le a se to : a s. a ,
: ra c .
o m ni p resent i bh p le s re : v k h n ; with p u. p le s a u : sa a . .
,
a
once kyt : sa
’
tl y
. k h ; ( wish choice ) an z sa
'
en a ,
one : e k a . i ha f ka m m tp cc . a . a . : sve
only : eva . h ga cc a .
O p inion ; m ti f ; m t n p lo a gh l g l .
; h l m a a . u : an a a n . a a . n .
or ; a p v tp ; th a
, osp lo gh t os k rs . a av . u ,
o : .
ord in to klp c s ; 1 dh a + i ; p l n d er to l a th ; hr ; lp
a ,
: , au . v u ,
: u a .
or d ine d i hi t
a
p oem : v k a y n a . : v a .
order to j ii + a c s ,
:
p oet k a i m ,
au . : av .
other ; g ; i t an
p p oint
a t to ; d
ara ,i p a ara . ou : .
o tskirts i m f
u : s
p oll te d to
an be d s . u ,
: a .
o ercome to 2p r
v , p oor d i
: d . : ar ra .
o erwhelm to r
v p ossessions
,
dh
: v s. : a na 11 .
o w one s w
n,
’
p ost os crifici l
n : sva a
g p m .
,
a a : a .
ox : ana d h m a
p t g h t m
. o : a a .
p o n d t p si u ,
o : .
p air y g m
: n a p o ar to h . u ,
: a .
p l
a a ce p a a d m : r
p o w ers b l n
a . : a a .
p arents p i tr m d : p o w erf l,
b l i ; .b l t u. u : a n a a va n .
p art bh a :
g m p r
a ise song O . f p t ti f t t a ,
. s a . s o ra n .
p th m a g m
a :
p th m r
p r ise
a t p n .
; t an an . a ,
o : a s s a .
p e rl
a m kt a f : a r
p y for t . t h a ,
o : ar .
p e sa nt k
a r s i l m :
p rescri p tion
va a a d p m . : e a .
p en ncea t p n p a g p i:t t p resence

a as m i p n . r a c a n . : sa a .
eo
p p le j l
p ; l k: d p l
ana
p re io ,
s ; p a . o a , s . an . v u r va .
p erfor m to i dh c s ; , p riest r t
: ij m s ,
au . ca r ,
: v .
ca r + m a ; ( s crifice ) tsa
p rin
-
e k m a a m a a n. c : a ra .
p erf m u
g dh m e : ro
p p anert y a ; d h n . : v a sa n . a na .
p erish to p
, + i : na
p ros p erit y b h a t i f
o . : .
p estle m l m n
: a sa a
p rotect to k s 2
.
p a ; p a c s .
, : ra ,
au .
p ierce to g , d h ro
: v a
p t ection ; p n . ara a n.
226 II . E nglish S nsk rit G loss ry
-
a a .
secon d d i ti g : v a . son : p a tr a m ; . mm m .
to p p ; di p ; i ks; i ks p
se e , : a ra . so n -
i n -l
aw : j a m a tr m .
seer rsi m : . song : g i r f ; i

g at . n .
; ( o f p r isa e
)
send to tha + p c s
,
: s ra ,
au . s to tr a n .
ser nt bhr ty m ; bhr t k m

va : a . a a . so l u : a tm a n m .
ser e v : se v. so w, to : vap .
set to ( pl ce) ldh a ; ( intr

,
: a .
,
of Sp e a k , to : va d; va c ; bh a s .
s u n , e tc .
) i a st a m ; ga i n o s ta m . sp e r k t m
a : an a .
Sh a de : c h a ga f . s p eech a f ; bha sa f : v c . .
sh e , etc a . : s , f Of t . a . S p oon j ha f : a .
shine t p bh ; aj ; bh a i
,
o : a r v . st n d to
a th a
, s .
S hi p a f : n a . st te t b a
a ,
o : r .
shoe p a h f : a na . ste l to a ; m s; l ngh

,
: ca r a a .
S ho w to d p c s ,
: i ,
au . steer g m : o .
shre w d p t : a a . stic k : d d m a n a .
S h t t ldh a p i ; l g
u ,
o : m a e
:
sa . S tone dr s d f ; ( p recio s ) m ni m
: a . u a .
S ic k ga dhi t ; g n
: v a ra a . sto p t , dh o ra .
S i d e p ks m
: a a . str nge a
p ara .
S in p ap ; n a n . en a s . street thga f ; m a g m : ra . r a .
S ing to 29 a, : . stri k e to t d ,
: a .
S inging gi t n : a . S tri e t y t
v ,
o : a .
s i p to ,
m a : ca . strongest b listh : a a .
sister r f : sva s . st dy to i l dhi

u , 2 : -
a as
S it to
,
d; d i: sa sa a . a bh i .
sit te d to be r t
ua ,
: v . s ub ject p j a f : ra .
S ix s s : a . s u ch i drp : .
sixth s sth : a a . s u ff ering d hkh n : u a .
sk ille d p t : a a . s u ff se d
u ddh : ra a .
s k y d i f ; d i p f p i ; a ka p n
: v . . . a . s u it ble
a ap : a nar a .
S l e da m ; da i f
av : sa . s . s u mmit pi kh : ara 111 .
sl y t m g c s ; h
a ,
o : r, au . an . Su n : bh a n a m ; a d i tya m . .
slee p to p p
; i
, : so a . s r i e to pi s
u v v , : a d .
smell to ; gh a ,
r . sweet a d : sv a .
smite to hr p ; h ,
bhi : ra an a . s w ift a p : a .
so : i ti ; ev a m : t a th a . swor d i m : as .
sol d ier a i i k m : s n a .
some k p l ; some e a . t k e to
a , : do a; gr a b ; g rah
ers k i t k i t: c c e c .
p ra ti .
sometimes k i t : ra c . t k e p l ce to
a a , : j an ; bba
II E . nglish S nsk rit G loss ry
-
a a .
t k e ref ge t
a u
,
o : p d + p ra
a . tre s ry k s m
a u : o a .
t stef l
a u : r a sa va n t . tree r k m ; t m
: v sa . a ra .
t
ax : k m ara . tremble to k mp ,
: a .
te ch to i +
a , : a d hi , c s au .
; di p tr e tg ; ( f ithf l ) bh kt
u : sa a a u a a .
ap a . tr th tg n
u : sa a .
te cher g m ; a a g m
a : ara . c r a . t w elfth d a d p : v a a .
te r p
a ; ba p
: ma ra n . s a . t w el e d a d p
v : v a a .
tell t k th g ; d
,
o : a a a va . twenty eight sta p ti -
: a vzn a .
tem p le d k l n : ev a a a . t w enty se en p t i np ti
-
v : sa av a .
ten ; d p a a . t w ice d i : v s .
ten d to to kip ,
: . t w ilight ndhya f : sa .
terrify to bhi c s ; ij + , : ,
au . v t w ine b dh : an .
c s au . tw o d : va .
text book pa t n
-
: s ra .
th t t ; y m ; a
a : a a a as a. u m b rell h tt n a : c a ra .
then t da : a . u n d erst n d to g m a ,
: a a va .
there t t : a ra . u nite to , g m a sa m
there p on t t u : a as . u ntr th r t ;
u : an a n . a sa tg a n .
thief t m ; a m : s en a . c ur a . u p nis
a d p i s d
a f : u an a .
t hin k t i t; m ; thin k
, o : c n an on : us ef l to be
u , : s e v.
s m s; d hg a .
thir d tgti g :
'
a . vass l a m t m
a : s a n a .
thirt y t i np t : r a . Ved d m
a : ve a .
thirty three t g t p t -
: ra a s r zn a . verse pl k m ; ( of Rig ed ) r f
: o a . v a e .
this t ; g m : a a a . vessel p a t n : ra .
tho t m u : oa . victorio s to be j u , : t.
three t i : r . victory j g m : a a .
threefol d t i r t : r v . vie w ( Op inion ) m ti f ; m t n : a . a a .
thrice t i : r s. vill ge g a m m
a : r a .
th s i ti
u m ; t th a
: ,
e va a . virt e dh m m ; p ny n
u : ar a . u a .
time ka l m : a . visit to g m bhi,

: a a .
to d y dy
-
a : a a . voice a f ; g i f : v c . r .
to- morrow p : va s .
tong e j i h d f u : a . w gon th m
a : ra a .
torment t p i d; g th c s ,
o : v a ,
au . w rrior ks t ig m
a : a r a .
to ch to p r p
u ,
: s . w sh t ks l; p rp
a , o : a s .
tr d e g ha m ; a ng g
a : v a va ra . v a . w ter j l ; a i
a : a a n . t
‘
r n .
; a
p f .
p l .
tr el t w p ; tha p
av , o : e ra c ra w e i im
a v : v c .
n . we g m : va a .
II . E nglish S ns k rit G loss ry
- a a .
we r to dhr c s ; bhr
a ,
: , au . . w inter h ema n ta m : .
we ry to become p m
a ,
: ra . w i p e to m rj ; m rj
,
: ap a or p ari .
w e e to g th ; b dh
av , : ran an . w ish to i s ,
°
.
w e d ding i a h m : v v a . w ith : sa h a w inst ,

. .
; or by instr .
w ee p to ,
d : ra . lone
a .
w est western p tg
,
: ra a n c; the w ithered m la : na .
W est p ti i f : di p ra c .
, 80. . w itho t i a ( instr u : v n .
,
wh t a y a . w itness a ksi m : s n .
wheel k n : ca ra . w olf i k m : v a .
w hen y d a a . wom n a i f ; dha f

a : n r . va .
; s tr i f
.
when ? k da : a .
w hence ? k t : a as . w om a n ser va nt : -
f d asi .
w here g t a ra . woo d : ka sth d n ; ( forest )

. va n a 11 .
w here ? k ; k t : va a ra . w ord : va c f ; .
p bd m a a .
w h ich y a . w or k : ka r m a n ; (liter r y )
n . a g r a
which ( O f k t a ara. n th a m .
white p t : ve a . wo l dr : lo ka m .
j a
g t a n .
; bha
w hither ? k ; k t : va a ra . va n an
w ho y a . worl d s p r t b hm
-
i i : ra
’
an n .
w h o ?: ka . worshi p t p aj ,
o : .
whoe er v : ya ka ap i, ai d or w orthy d p : sa r a .
ca n a ; often by rel lone . a . wo n d to ks

u , : an .
w hole : kr tsn a . wre th m a i a f ; j f

a : . sr a .
w h y ?: ka ta s ; ka sm a i .
w ick e d p ap : a .
y e r
a h t m
: sa i va sa r a .
; va r sa m . n .
w ife : bha r ga f ; . n ar i f ; p a tn i
. f y o k e to y j c s
.
,
: a ,
a u .
win to j i
,
: .
y onder t t : a ra .
wind ay : v a m ; . v a ta m .
y o ngu g : a va n .
230 A p p endix .
p r imiti e w ith imit

v t ions
,
gi en in l b ; t h s
th e l h k d k ; a v . . u ,
'
ra a, r
’
rz a va
a
g g g
r d g
a y h
,
b t g a g g d g n
ri A n
a t r ll
, y short ouw el in the r a . a u a v
p en t
l if follo
u w e d , b y gro p f conson nts cont ining 3; a u o a a or v,
d oes t gener ll y become long by p osition ; th s p

'
b l p b
’
no a u ,
ro a a ,
ra a
l a m ; akta , akta va t
g .
3 In v a nd
. erbs
erb l d eri ti es joined with p re p ositions in v a va v ,
au gmented d re d p lic te d forms d so m etimes in d eclension l

an u a , an a
forms th ccent is recessi e if th root stem s y ll b le be Short ;

,
e a v , e or -
a
th s dg m t a t m asi hi t m b t tkzst m i akt m ; dg m t

u ,
a a ,
na a ,
a n a ,
u a
‘
a ,
n r a a a ,
a
'
ksi p t b t bi bh ti t ta
a ,
u j g a Poly sy ll bic p re p ositions when
’
ar ,
as va , a
'
a . a ,
p refixe d t other w or d s ret

o in their w ccent secon d ry ccent ; ,
a o n a as a a
th s ap g i h ti ap gdm ta m
u , a zc c a ,
a a .
4 I com p o n d s nless the first member be monosyll bic

. n u , u a a
wor d e ch p rt gener ll y ret ins its o w n ccent b t th t f the

,
a a a a a , u a o
p rinci p l me m b e r ia t h strongest ; t h s dj pa m pd s t pi e u ,
r a r a sa ,
r va a
kh a r a kar a m ba t an m a kha m , d igg aj a m , p r a pi sya m .
The d i isio n s l les is m ch ore v rent in S nsk rit

of y la b u m a
pp a a
th n in E nglish I re d ing S nsk rit p rose the H in d s gener lly

a . n a a u a
d ro p into sort f sing song t ti V erses l w ys ch nte d ’
a O -
r ec i a vo . a re a a a .

ASanskritPrimer 10081762 PDF

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

ASanskritPrimer 10081762 PDF

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

A

ELEM ENTAR CURSUS DES SAN SK RIT

EDWARD D ELAVAN R ERRY ,

Qro m p o s i ti o n ﬁ g iat rs sfn o rk 11g

the p ref ce t the work f which the following is re ision

Prof B i i . w ritesHLE Rfollo w s as :

The follo w ing L i tf d w w ritte l st winter [ 188 1 e a en as n a

an d p rinted in m n scri p t form w

q ite l rge n m ber f schol rs I t is b sed p on the p rely

an d h b ecome est blished there by me ns f R G B K

text boo k s The ttem p t to tr nsfer this method to E rop e n i

ve r s i ti is j stiﬁed by the p r ctic l s ccess which

beginners m ster the ﬁrst difﬁc lties f S nskrit ery r p i dl y d

th t le rners t ke the m ost li el y d contin ed interest in the

st dy if o p p ort ni ty for cti ity their w p rt is gi e them

l ng ge Moreo er t h q estion f econom y f time is m d e the

m ore w eighty by the f ct th t the ele m ents of S ns k rit form a a a an

Leitf den f ii den E l m t a des S ns k rit ; m i t U b g

im p ort nt i d to st dents f Cl ssic l d G er m nic Philology y t

can be m stere d in short time On the other h n d the d i d

va nt ges necess ril y ent iled by the p rel y p r ctic l metho d m y

re d il y be remo e d l ter by short metho d ic l exp osition f the

gr mm r a a The erses in the exercises t k en chieﬂy v a re a

from B I di h Sp h ; the sentences

cont ined in them To the l st lessons no S ns k rit exercises h e

been p p en d e d since the re d ing of the N l or f some other

e sy S s k rit w or k m y ery well be beg n soon the form

a tion of the p erfect h been le rne d as a .

After sing the L i tf d for some time in the instr ction f

a cl ss I w con ince d f its gre t m erits

d ction to the l ng ge ; w hile the other h nd it seeme d ery

un fort n t e th t it hel d t hro gho t t the n ti e s y stem of gr mm r

w hich since the p p e r nce f Prof W N S w ork w e in

Americ t le st h e le rne d to d istr st U n d er these circ m

st nces i t seeme d d is ble to ttem p t com b in tion f B ﬁ

boo k h been re ll y re w ritten An introd ction h be n dd ed

gi ing gener l ie w f the str ct re f the l ng ge ; the ex r

cises h e been p r ne d h d there chieﬂ y to remo e forms

which seeme d too n s l or d o btf l to h e j st cl im u u ua u u av a u a on

the beginner s memory ; d the n m b er f lessons h b ee

d d from fort y eight to for ty ﬁ

nee dlessl y f ll for beginners f the orist p rec t i e d secon d

ar y conj g tions I h e en d e ore d to ret in nothing b t w h t

wo l d s p p l y the re l w n ts f those f n w h m the book is de

I sho l d other w ise h e left f

A det ile d ex p l n tion of the ch nges in the gr mm tic l p rt

o f the boo k w o l d req ire t m ch s p ce to b gi en here They

a ll forms t p resent a q ot ble I the ex p lic tion of the “

r les I h e so ght to b brief b t ne er to the s criﬁce of cle r

words of Prof W r les h e been incorp or te d into those

o f the Primer which w d one with his s nction I t seeme d q ite

nee dless t d esign te ll s ch borrowings by q ot tion m rk s

p ossi b le the pp e r nce of the

ros i ty in consenting to the rendering of his boo k into ry a ve

d i ff erent form from th t which he g e it d eser es most gr tef l a av v a u

m ention T Prof W . o I o w e d eep gr tit de f

a ble s ggestions ; h w k in d en o gh to look o er the work in

his in l ble collection f erb forms To P rof L N N I m

eq ll y in de b ted ; w ell for m n y sef l hints for the rd o s

t sk of loo k ing o er p roof sheets w hich b im p ose d himself

with ch r cteristic e d iness M y p p il Mr A V W J S O

a ssisted me not little in the com p il tion of the Gloss ries M y

a ckno w le d gments lso d to the p rinters G a re UN